diff options
Diffstat (limited to '41425-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 41425-0.txt | 10110 |
1 files changed, 10110 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/41425-0.txt b/41425-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5baefe0 --- /dev/null +++ b/41425-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10110 @@ +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 41425 *** + + UNDER THE STAR-SPANGLED BANNER + + _A Tale of the Spanish-American War_ + + BY CAPTAIN F. S. BRERETON, R.A.M.C. + + AUTHOR OF "WITH RIFLE AND BAYONET," "THE DRAGON OF PEKIN," "A + GALLANT GRENADIER," ETC., ETC. + + + NEW YORK + STITT PUBLISHING COMPANY + 1905 + + + + +[Illustration: "THE BOWS OF THE MAINE WERE CRUSHED INTO SHAPELESS +WRECKAGE."] + + + + +CONTENTS + + + CHAPTER PAGE + + I. THE MARCHANT FOUNDRY 1 + + II. "FACE TROUBLES LIKE A MAN" 9 + + III. AN EVENTFUL VOYAGE 18 + + IV. A CALL FOR VOLUNTEERS 27 + + V. NO REST FOR THE WEARY 38 + + VI. A FRIEND IN NEED 47 + + VII. ALL BUT KILLED 56 + + VIII. THE LOSS OF THE "MAINE" 68 + + IX. "THE EVER-FAITHFUL ISLAND" 82 + + X. A SUDDEN ATTACK 94 + + XI. A BOLD COURSE 111 + + XII. A RISKY UNDERTAKING 128 + + XIII. IN DANGER AND DISTRESS 146 + + XIV. A DASH FOR LIBERTY 163 + + XV. WITH THE AMERICAN FLEET 178 + + XVI. THE BEGINNING OF HOSTILITIES 195 + + XVII. A BAPTISM OF FIRE 209 + + XVIII. A DESPERATE UNDERTAKING 226 + + XIX. FORTUNE FAVORS THE BRAVE 245 + + XX. THE INVASION OF CUBA 260 + + XXI. NEARING THE END 278 + + XXII. THE FLOWER OF THE HACIENDA 295 + + + + +UNDER THE STAR-SPANGLED BANNER + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE MARCHANT FOUNDRY + + +The city of Birmingham was wrapped in a mantle of fog so dense that the +inhabitants found it difficult to move about. The thick, soot-laden +atmosphere covered everything, and only a few faintly glimmering lights +showed that they really existed. + +The clock in the church tower had just struck two, and yet the street +lamps were ablaze. + +The pedestrians moved with the utmost care. Trudging along the soppy +pavements, their footsteps sounded hollow and unreal, and were heard +long before they themselves put in an appearance. + +One of the inhabitants, however, contrived to find his way with +comparative ease, for he was such an old resident that his feet would +not go astray, however absent-minded their owner happened to be. There +was a certain air of authority about him; yet there was that about the +stern, calm features that denoted a warm heart and a kindly disposition. +But still, as if the fog was not in existence, he hurried on, turning +from the main street to the lower part of the town. + +Ordinarily he could never accomplish this walk without meeting many an +acquaintance, for Mr. Thomas Marchant was a well-known man. He was one +of the magnates of this busy town, a wealthy employer of labor, and it +was to the work his foundries gave that many of the inhabitants owed +their prosperity. + +Mr. Marchant was troubled; for only a year ago he was one of the +wealthiest men in the city. His foundries were working night and day, +and even then could hardly keep pace with the orders. + +"I've never known such a rush," he said to his manager when discussing +the matter. "It gives me great satisfaction, for our men will benefit by +the increased orders as well as ourselves." + +That was a short year ago, and now there was a different tale to tell. +True, the iron foundry was still in full swing, but cotton mills, which +Mr. Marchant owned in addition, were losing money every day, and in +those few months he had been ruined; and he knew that the world would +know him and speak of him as a bankrupt, while his possessions would be +seized upon by the creditors. + +The Marchant iron-works were in full swing. As Mr. Marchant entered, a +mass of sputtering iron was dragged by a powerful man, dressed in rough +trousers and thin vest, and protected by an apron of leather. Another +dark and perspiring figure came to his aid, and the weight was dropped +onto a small trolley, on which it was run to the big steam hammer +standing near at hand. + +Mr. Marchant watched them a moment, and then walked to his office, in +which a somewhat untidily dressed gentleman was sitting. + +"Good-day, Mr.Tomkins," he said. + +"Good-afternoon, sir," Mr. Tomkins, who was the manager of the foundry, +responded. Then, in a doubtful manner, he said, "There have been some +visitors to see you this morning, and I told them to come again. One was +Steinkirk." + +"Does Hal know? Has he been told?" Mr. Marchant asked abruptly. + +"No one has liked to break the news to him yet, sir. We weren't certain, +and we hoped that things would turn out all right. I suppose it's +hopeless now, sir?" + +"Absolutely!" Mr. Marchant replied. "I am irretrievably ruined. The +mills are gone, and to obtain money when the times were bad, I had to +mortgage these works. I have nothing left. But I have seen to one +matter; if trouble has come upon me, there is no reason why it should +swamp all whom I employ. The creditor will carry on the work, and you +and all the others will remain as at present. Poor Hal! He is the one +who will suffer, more even than his father. He is a beggar!" He sank his +face into his hands and groaned. + +"It's not so bad as that, sir," said Mr. Tomkins. "Hal's got plenty of +spirit, and if there's no money, why, he'll put his shoulder to the +wheel. You should see how he works here. He's in the casting-shed, and +to look at him any day you'd think he had his bread to earn." + +"Which he has from this moment," Mr. Marchant exclaimed. "You do me +good, Tomkins. When I was a lad I had nothing. I had literally to slave +for years, and to deny myself many a long day. Then fortune came with a +rush which almost overwhelmed me. It has gone almost more quickly, and I +must learn to make the best of my troubles. As for Hal, I think you are +right. Let us go across and see him." + +They left the office and entered a shed in which a number of men were at +work. In a corner one of them was ramming a plug of clay into the +orifice of a furnace, and was replacing the lining of similar material +which protected the trough down which the molten metal was destined to +run. At the end of the trough was an enormous bucket, suspended from a +crane, which traveled backwards and forwards overhead. + +The remainder of the shed was occupied with castings, or rather, with +molds in various stages of preparation. Here and there were artisans at +work, and amongst them, kneeling on the sand which covered the floor, +was a youth who might well be taken for the son of a foundry hand. He +was between seventeen and eighteen years of age, and of more than medium +height. Dressed in a pair of rough trousers and a flannel shirt, he was +to the casual observer merely an ordinary employee. But there was a +certain something about this young fellow that made him different from +the others at work in the shed. There was a grace about his figure, +while his features were more refined than those commonly met with +amongst the working classes. + +This was the son of the owner, and he was known to all at the foundry as +Hal Marchant. + +It was delicate work upon which he was engaged. With a special tool he +was smoothing down the mold, carefully rounding off corners, building up +a portion here which had broken down. Finally he sat up, and, surveying +the work with an air of satisfaction, exclaimed: + +"That's finished, and I think it'll do. Now I'll get the foreman to pass +it, and then we'll see it cast. Hallo! The guv', as I live! Why, you +made me jump. What do you think of that?" + +"Very good, old boy," Mr. Marchant replied. "You are an adept at the +trade. What says the foreman?" + +"He knows what he's up to, he does," the latter remarked. "Another week +or so of this work and he'll be fit to boss the shed." + +"Ah, that's satisfactory," said Mr. Marchant. "But I've something to say +to you, Hal, so come to the office." + +He turned and walked from the shed, taking no notice of the friendly +glances his workmen threw in his direction. + +"What can be wrong with the guv'?" he asked, looking after Mr. Marchant, +and then at the manager. "What is it, Tomkins? Tell me." + +For a moment the manager of the works wavered, uncertain whether to tell +the truth. + +"After all, he's got to know, sooner or later," he murmured. +"Something's wrong, Hal," he continued. "There's no use in beating about +the bush any longer. My only surprise is that you haven't seen for +yourself that things were completely upset. I suppose every workman here +knows what is going on, and it seems strange that they haven't dropped +you a hint. The fact is, the foundry is broken, and the owner has lost +every penny he possessed. He's ruined, and the works go to a creditor." + +"Ruined! Part with the works! Why, we are full of orders, and by all +accounts are in the most thriving condition!" + +"Just so, Hal, that's the bitter pill about this matter. The cotton +mills up Preston way have broken. For two years they have been working +at a dead loss. Your father mortgaged the mills, hoping to tide over bad +times. But instead of improving they became even worse. Then the foundry +had to go to raise the money. The folks who advanced the money have +claimed it, and your father is unable to pay; so the long and short of +it is that he no longer owns these works; and, to put it bluntly, he has +scarcely a sixpence left, and both he and you must work for a living." + +Hal attempted to stutter out some answer, but a big lump rose in his +throat, making him almost choke. And yet, had it been possible to read +his thoughts at this trying time, there would have been found nothing +selfish about them, for the question as to what was to become of himself +had not crossed his mind. No; only the deepest sympathy with his father +was felt, for they were the very best of friends. + +"I can scarcely believe all you tell me," Hal said at length. "What will +father do? It is a terrible blow for him." + +"It's bad, and there's no denying that," Mr. Tomkins replied. "But come +along and hear what the guv' has to say." + +Hal followed the manager to the office and seated himself at the desk +beside which his father had taken a place. They looked at each other in +the most painful silence. Then Hal stretched out his hand and took his +father's. + +"I'm sorry, dad," he said. "I've heard all now, and only wish that I +could help you." + +"There is no help; nothing can mend what has happened," answered Mr. +Marchant, in despondent tones. "I have lost everything, and now that you +know, I only wish to discuss what is to happen to you. What will you do +for a living? For myself, I shall probably remain to conduct the +business for the new owner, and, of course, if you wish it, you may also +stay." + +"It is a difficult question to answer, dad," said Hal. "For the present, +at any rate, I shall remain where I am, as if nothing had occurred. +Perhaps later on, it will be better for me to go elsewhere." + +"I think you are right. Stay where you are for a while, and later I will +contrive to get a good post for you. There are reasons why I do not wish +you to stay at the foundry longer than can be helped. Now I will go, for +I have other matters to attend to." + +"Good-by, dad. Don't be too downhearted," said Hal cheerfully. +"Remember what you were when you were my age, and you will see that +there is no reason why matters should not improve." + +"Young men do not feel so acutely as the middle-aged," Mr. Marchant +replied. "Nor do the latter set their faces against adversity as easily +as they did in their earlier days." + +He smiled half tearfully, and, waving his hand, went out into the dense +fog. + +"It's a bad business--a cruel affair altogether," said Mr. Tomkins, at +length. "If the failure had been of his own doing, one might not have +felt the same for him. But I know that he has been the most cautious and +far-seeing of owners, and his mills have been patterns of well-ordered +establishments. But now it is all finished with." + +"One moment," exclaimed Hal. "Why should I leave the foundry?" + +"Ah, I thought you'd want to know," the manager answered. "The fact is +we are now the servants of a hard-fisted fellow. The gentleman who +advanced the money sold the mortgage, and the buyer has a very evil +reputation. It is because of this that your father advises you to quit. +Moses Steinkirk is the fellow who has bought us up, and I fear we shall +all have an uncomfortable time of it. Now we'll go back to the +casting-pit. That wheel's got to be finished." + +Quitting the office, they struck across the yard and entered the shed, +to find that the mold upon which Hal had been engaged was completed. + +"All ready for the metal, sir," said the foreman. + +"The top cover of Mr. Hal's wheel was slung on a few minutes ago, and it +will be as good a job as we ever put out. What do yer say, sir?" + +"I don't know that it will be as good as the castings usually turned +out from here," Hal replied. "Still, I hope it will do us credit." + +"That it will, sir. Joe finished it up when you and the guv' cleared +off, and he said as it was the best he'd seen for many a day." + +"Jack, boy, you can let her go," sang out the foreman at this moment. + +"Right yer are," was the gruff answer. "Now then, all of yer, bring the +bucket closer, and mind yer toes." + +Grasping a long iron rod, he thrust it into the lump of clay which +closed the orifice of the furnace, and which was by this baked almost as +hard as stone. A second later a jet of white-hot fluid poured out with a +gurgle, and, emitting showers of sparks, rushed in a broad stream into +the bucket. + +"She's full. Up with her, boys!" cried the foreman. + +At once the big crane creaked, and hoisting up the bucket, swung it +towards the mold. Meanwhile two of the men had grasped the handles, and +drawing the bucket to the orifice, tipped it. The fiery stream +disappeared into the depths of the mold. Then it began to well up in the +opening, and a moment or two later the empty bucket was whisked away. + +"That's finished, so far. Now, Tom, up yer get, and see that she cools +as she ought to," cried Mason. + +Tom, the man he had beckoned to, stepped onto the framework, and, taking +a rod, commenced to ram it into the opening through which the metal had +been poured. + +"That's finished, and we may as well go," said Tomkins. "It will take +five hours for that to cool. Come along, Hal. Good-night to you, Mason." + +"Good-night, sir. Good-night, Mr. Hal." + +The words came from all parts of the shed, and replying to them +cheerfully, Hal repaired to the office with the manager. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +"FACE TROUBLES LIKE A MAN" + + +Seen in the glare of the furnace flames as he emerged from the foundry, +Hal Marchant was a very different individual from the workman who had +been so diligent in the casting-pit. + +Then he had been much like his fellows--just a roughly clad artisan, +covered with sand, and with hands and face streaked with soot and dirt. +Now that he was ready to go into the town, however, he was a spruce and +dapper young gentleman. He had the manners of his father, and though not +a prig, nor less given to mirth than others of his age, he was a very +respectable and creditable member of society. + +But Hal was genuinely grieved about his father, and as he walked home, +his thoughts were busy wondering what he would do, and how he could +possibly extricate himself from his difficulties. + +"Surely this man will allow father to work off the debt," he murmured. +"I know for a matter of fact that we have numerous orders, and must be +making money. Why, then, should he not be allowed to remain? It might +take a few years to work off the amount, but it would be done." + +But Hal did not know the world very well. If he had he would have +realized that this was a business transaction, and that when the +creditor had a power over the profits of the foundry, and particularly +one with such a reputation, he was not likely to forego his claims. + +"We must just make the best of a bad matter," Hal at length remarked. +"I'll do my utmost to help, and all I make shall go to the funds to keep +up the house." + +He turned into the gates of the big mansion and, mounting the steps, +opened the door with a latch-key. He paused on the threshold to listen, +but there was not a sound in the house. + +"Strange!" he murmured. "The guv' said he was returning at once, and +these last few weeks one has usually known immediately whether he was at +home by hearing his steps as he paced up and down the floor of his room. +That was what first gave me an idea that something was wrong. But +perhaps he is in, and has fallen asleep in his chair, as I have often +known him to do." + +Hal walked across the fine hall, and opening the door on the left, +looked into an apartment which was evidently library and smoking room in +one. He put his head through the doorway and inspected the apartment. +But there was no sign of his father, and he was about to withdraw when a +faint groan fell upon his ear. In an instant he darted in, and +discovered a figure huddled in a chair in a dark portion of the room. It +was Mr. Marchant. + +Hal sprang to his side and looked eagerly in his face, but there was no +sign of recognition, for the eyes were closed. He placed his hand on the +wrist and felt for a pulse without success. Then the truth dawned upon +him--slowly at first, and then with a whirl, and with all its cruel +force. + +"Dead!" he gasped. "Father dead!" + +There was no doubt about it, and Hal had to face the matter. Once more +he felt for a pulse, and then he went to the bell and pressed the +button. + +"Send for the doctor at once, please," he said when the servant +arrived. "I am afraid that my father is dead." + +"Dead, sir? Dead!" the girl exclaimed in a whisper. + +"Yes, that is the case," Hal answered. "Send for Dr. Harding." + +Five minutes later the doctor arrived. He pronounced life extinct. "A +stroke," he said. "He died painlessly and swiftly. May we all do the +same, for it is a merciful ending. But tell me, Hal, was there cause? +Was there any sudden shock that you know of?" + +"Yes; there was a great one," Hal answered slowly. "Father was ruined. +To-morrow he would have been in the position of his manager, instead of +the employer of hundreds of hands." + +"Then he has had a merciful escape," said the doctor. "The blow was a +heavy one, and the life to follow would have been extremely hard. And +what of yourself, my boy?" + +"I, too, have lost all my prospects," Hal answered steadily. "But I am +hardly more than a boy. The world is before me, and I will make my way +in it. This house will be sold, I suppose, and if all the debts cannot +be met, someone will have to wait. It shall be my business to work, make +money, and clear my father's name." + +"A resolution to be proud of. Face troubles like a man, and half the +battle is already won," exclaimed the doctor. "But I hope that when all +is sold no debts will remain. Then you will be free to rise solely on +your own account." + +He pressed Hal's hand and left the house. + +A week passed and found Hal in lodgings in the town, for Mr. Marchant's +house had been sold, and, to Hal's relief, it was ascertained that not a +penny was owing to any man. + +"Now for myself," he said as he sat over the fire. "What to do is the +question." + +There was a knock at the door, and Mr. Tomkins put his head into the +room. "Hallo!" he said. "Do you feel inclined for a chat?" + +"Yes; come in. I'm wondering what to do with myself." + +"And so am I," was the answer. "That is, I'm wondering what would be +good for you. How about the foundry? Will you stick to it?" + +"On no account," Hal replied. "I could not bear to go there now. In +fact, I mean to leave Birmingham, for it would bring back these last few +days every time I passed the old home. I must work, and pay my way, for +at present I possess fifteen pounds and a few suits of clothes; that is +all." + +"I thought you'd not go back to the works," said Mr. Tomkins. "I've been +there boy and man these twenty years, and I've risen to be manager. But +I am leaving with my old master, for I cannot fancy the new. I'm lucky, +too, for I've accepted the post of manager to another foundry in the +north. Come along with me, and I'll see that you get something good." + +Hal thanked him, and thought the matter over before answering. + +"I scarcely know what to say," he said. "But I am determined to leave +Birmingham. I couldn't stand it." + +"It would be rough, I own," Mr. Tomkins said. "But what about coming +north?" + +"It is very good of you to suggest it, Tomkins," Hal answered, "but, +before deciding, there is something that I should like to know about. Of +course, I am not very well up in trade affairs, but I do happen to know +that the Americans are very go-ahead in the matter of iron-works. They +undertake bridge-building to a great extent, and I thought that it +might be worth my while to cross the water. I certainly ought to get a +job. They pay well out in America, Tomkins. What do you say to the +plan?" + +"Those Yanks are hard at work," he said. "They are go-ahead people, as +you say, and there's no doubt that they can show us a thing or two in +the way of bridges. Yes, anything to do with iron and engineering is +booming across the Atlantic, and there must be lots of openings for +youngsters. There's something else besides. In good old England we're +overcrowded, but in America there's a demand for chaps who know a little +above the ordinary. I should say it would be a good thing, Hal, and if +you decide upon it, the traveling there, and the new life, will rouse +you a bit, and help you to forget present troubles." + +"You think well of it," said Hal. "Then I shall go to America and try my +luck. I may as well start as soon as possible, and I wish very +particularly to do so, for while in this city I run the chance of +meeting old friends. Besides, if I went to see any of them, they might +think that I was looking for help, and I want to make a place for +myself." + +"And quite right too. Independence is the thing," the manager cried, +patting him on the back. "Now, look here, youngster, are you willing to +rough it from the very commencement? If so, I can help you get to +America." + +"Quite," Hal answered promptly. + +"Then come along with me to the office of a shipping firm I know. +They've carried many a time for the foundry, and I've only to drop the +manager a hint that you are wanting to get across at the cheapest rate +possible, and I'll be bound he'll arrange." + +"I've no cousins or relatives of any sort," he said, "and I've come to +the conclusion that this is the best thing I can do." + +"That's good! I'm certain you are doing what is right," Mr. Tomkins +answered. + +They went into the street, and within a few minutes were at the shipping +office. + +"Good-day, Mr. Tomkins. What can we do for you this time?" asked the +clerk. + +"A good deal, if you care. Can we come in behind? I want to speak to you +about my young friend here." + +"To be sure," the clerk replied. "Step in. Now, what is it?" he asked. +"I recognize your companion. He is the son of the late Mr. Marchant." + +"Quite so; and he wishes to go abroad to America, to make his way in the +world. Can you do anything for him in the way of a cheap passage?" + +"He could go for nothing, or rather, could earn a pound and food besides +the berth. But he'd have to rough it." + +"I'm ready for that, any day; in fact, I'd like to start right away," +Hal said, eagerly. + +"Then I may as well tell you that there is a vacancy for a greaser +aboard the _Mohican_. Will you take that? There! A passage, your grub, +and a pound at the end of the trip." + +"You can put my name down for it," said Hal. "I'll go on the _Mohican_; +and I thank you for your kindness." + +"Not at all; it's nothing after the freights we got from your father's +foundry. Good-day, sir; good-day, Tomkins. Excuse me, but I'm very +busy." The clerk nodded in a friendly way, and departed. + +"I put that down as a good omen," said Tomkins as they emerged into the +street. "You're in luck, Hal, for right from the commencement you get +what you want. The rest will come just the same, let us hope. Now I'll +leave you, as I have matters to attend to." + +He shook Hal's hand and walked up the street. + +Hal returned to his rooms, and hunted out his belongings. It was getting +dark as he went into the street with a bundle over his shoulder. He +entered a shop which he had noticed on former occasions, wondering what +class of people patronized it. + +"How much for these?" he asked, opening his bundle, and displaying five +suits which he had been in the habit of wearing in Birmingham. + +"They're not much good to me," he said. "They're not the class o' togs I +want. Six shillings the lot." + +"Six shillings!" said Hal quietly. "They cost four times as many pounds, +and that quite recently. Bid again." + +"Six the figure. Not a penny more," exclaimed the man. + +"I'll take four pounds for the lot," said Hal. + +"You may, but not from me, young man. Good a'ternoon to yer." + +"Good-day; I'll go elsewhere," said Hal quietly, and at once did up the +fastenings of his bundle. Then he lifted it, and walked calmly out of +the shop. + +"Hold hard there!" cried the man, arresting him at the door. "Let's see +the togs again." He inspected them closely; but it was merely a +pretense, for anyone could see with half an eye that they were really +good. "I'll make it three ten," he said. + +"Very well, you can have them," Hal replied, glad to get so good a +price. + +Next day he was told that the _Mohican_ would sail on Saturday. + +"She's one of the intermediate boats," said the clerk. "Of course, she +carries very few passengers--some thirty in all. You'd better be aboard +on Friday, for she leaves the river early the following day. Good luck +to you." + +"And many thanks to you," Hal answered. "I'll do my best to fill the +place you have obtained for me." + +Hal took a cheap ticket to Liverpool, and trudged from the station to +the dock in which the _Mohican_ was lying. + +Hal picked his way to the wide and slippery gangway, and began to cross +it. A notice above an alleyway caught his eye. "Engineers only," it +said. + +He entered the alleyway, and walked along it till he came to a door on +the left, where he knocked. + +"Who's there? Come right in," someone cried in a sleepy voice. + +Hal entered, and found a big man reclining full length on the settee. He +was dressed in an old uniform, and had a handkerchief tied round his +neck. + +"Wall, what aer it?" he asked. "A feller can't no more get ter sleep +upon this hulk than fly. Who aer yer?" + +He sat up and surveyed Hal sleepily. + +"I'm sorry I roused you. I'm the new hand--the greaser," said Hal. + +"Oh, you're the greaser! Wall, yer aint the sort as ships aboard the +_Mohican_ every time. What aer it? Rows with the boss? High jinks at +home? Broke; aint that it?" + +"Not quite, but nearly," Hal answered with a smile. "I'm working my +passage." + +"So; then you've come to right ship ter do it. But you'd better get to +your quarters; there, along the alleyway. So long, young 'un, and when +yer want a bit of a help, come along to me. I'm Old Yank, the boss of +the engine-room." + +Closing the door, Hal went along the alleyway till he came to a large +cabin, above which was painted "Greasers." No one was in, but one of the +bunks had evidently not been appropriated. + +"That will do for me," thought Hal. "I'll put my bundle here, and then +have a look round." + +Five minutes later he descended the ladder which led to the depths of +the ship. Beneath him was a maze of machinery. Down below were one or +two figures moving about. A wave of hot air ascended, while a loud whir, +caused by the revolving armature of the dynamo, filled the engine-room. + +Hal felt somewhat out of his element; but, congratulating himself on the +fact that he had some right to be where he was, he hastened down the +ladder, and dropped to the floor. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +AN EVENTFUL VOYAGE + + +Lost in bewilderment, Hal stared at the machinery, wondering at its size +and complexity, and which were the main and which the auxiliary parts. +Then someone addressed him: + +"Fine engines, and as clean as waste will make them," remarked a little +man, who was dressed in naval uniform. "What can I do for you? I'm the +'second.'" + +Hal turned round to find himself face to face with the second engineer. + +"They are, indeed, very fine, and I have never seen anything like them +before," he said. "But perhaps you will think I have no business here, +so I had better tell you I am the new hand. I have shipped as a +greaser." + +"Ah, then you're the fellow I was told to expect. Now, tell me what you +know about engines. Mind you, if you are ignorant of your surroundings, +you have picked a very dangerous job. I've seen more than one man maimed +for life, simply because he did not know where to look out for +accidents, and therefore could not avoid them. On the other hand, I've +known a greaser who had been at the game for many years meet his end +simply and solely on account of carelessness. But I'm going ahead. What +experience have you had?" + +"I am sorry to say that I have never been in the engine-room of a ship +before," Hal replied; "but I've worked amongst the machines we had at +the foundry, and have learned to grease them, and also how to effect +small repairs. Then I have spent some time in the turning shops, and, +latterly, have been in the casting-pits and in the drawing-office." + +"That's a record to be proud of. But it will be different here, and you +will have much to learn. Come along with me. I'll take you round. Whip +off your coat, and get hold of a handful of that cotton waste. After +this you'll never be without it, for it's always wanted down here, and +fellows get so used to having it; in fact, prefer it to a handkerchief." + +Mr. Stoner, as the second in command of the ship's engines was known, +smiled in a friendly way, and patted Hal on the shoulder as if to show +that he had already made up his mind to patronize him during the voyage +to America, so as to make it as pleasant as possible. + +"When do you sail?" asked Hal, returning from the corner in which he had +placed his coat. + +"Late to-night, or to-morrow morning, I should think. We are due on the +other side in about nine days, and put out again a week later." + +Leading the way, he passed to the back of the nearer of two enormous +pillars, which supported the cylinders above the revolving parts of the +machinery. Then he pointed to the pistons, which drove the propeller +shaft, and from these to the hundreds of other parts which it would be +useless to attempt to describe. + +"Chockful of bits that make the old girl go, isn't it?" said Mr. Stoner. +"Now we'll get into the stoke-hole. The dirty part first, and afterwards +the job you'll have to tackle. But it's as well for you to see all that +we've got down here." + +He passed into a lower part of the ship. A wave of heat fanned Hal's +face as he followed, and he was conscious of stepping into a warmer +atmosphere. + +"Yes, it's warm," said the "second," "but nothing to what I've known it +in the Suez Canal or in the Red Sea. That's where it _is_ hot. Now for +the coal bunkers," he said. "We've one here, and another amidships, +which we usually keep in reserve. Look out for your head again, and +follow closely." + +After inspecting the bunkers, Mr. Stoner then led the way back to the +engine-room, and began to show Hal round it. + +"This'll be your particular job," he said, "and you will have to keep +your ears open. I'll tell you all I can, and then hand you over to our +'fourth.' His name is Masters, and he's been with us only a few trips. +He's our electrical expert, and is as mischievous as a monkey." + +For half an hour longer the "second" devoted himself to Hal, and +instructed him in his duties. Then, as someone came swarming down the +ladder, he led him forward to the foot. + +"Here's Masters," he said. "I'll hand you over at once. He'll tell you +about the life, and will let you know your hours of duty, and when you +grub. Good-by, and bear in mind what I have told you." + +Hal thanked him, and was then introduced to the "fourth," a young fellow +of his own age, but shorter and slighter than himself. + +"There," said Mr. Stoner, "I've brought you a pal. He's not exactly +green, and he's only a temporary hand. He's tramping it to the other +side." + +"Right; I know the sort. Out of work at home, and bitten with the +Yanks," laughed the youth known as Masters. "By the way," he continued, +"what's your name, and where do you come from?" + +"As we are to be comrades," said Hal, "I'll tell you something about +myself. But I must not forget that you are an officer, so that comrade +is not quite the word I should have used." + +"Officer!" Masters cried hotly. "Officer be hanged! You've got to +remember nothing of the sort. I am an officer if you like, but we're not +going to talk about it. We are aboard a vessel plying to America, and +the Yanks don't take too much notice of officers. Everyone as good as +his fellow, whether millionaire or pauper, is what they think. But I +interrupted you." + +"You asked me who I was," said Hal, "and I may as well tell you. Things +have gone rather badly for me, and you will realize the truth when I +tell you that, barely a week ago, I had a fair prospect of some day +becoming the owner of a flourishing foundry. But there was a smash, and +the shock killed my poor father. I had to do something for a living, and +it occurred to me that I might manage to get employment over the water. +A friend helped me to get this berth, and here I am, ready to be guided +by you, and prepared to rough it to any extent." + +"Which shows that you are starting with the right kind of spirit," +exclaimed the "fourth." "This is no drawing room, I can assure you, and +at times the work is very hard indeed. But you'll get used to it. But, I +say, this isn't work. Come along with me." + +Masters gathered up a handful of cotton waste and led the way amongst +the engines. Hal followed, taking pains to listen to all that was told +him. After all, he found that the duties of a greaser were not onerous, +for the parts of the machinery requiring constant oiling were not +numerous, and in most cases were automatically lubricated. Half an hour +was sufficient for his lesson, and then he left the engine-room. + +"Say, young feller," said Masters, who, on the strength of a few trips +over to America, was much given to aping its ways and speech, "suppose +we knock off now. You've had a tidy teaching, and by the time we're over +you'll have had your fill of machinery. Let's get something inside, for +the old ship sheers off precious soon, and then there won't be so much +as a bite for us still we're out of the river. Come on, and I'll show +you to your mess, and fix it for you with your mates. They are a rough +set, but good fellows." + +Climbing out of the engine-room and turning to the left till he came +next to the room in which Hal had already deposited his belongings, then +glancing into a cabin, ushered his companion in. It was a tiny place, +and a fixed table in center of it seemed to fill it almost entirely. +Round it sat some five or six men, dressed in blue cotton overalls, and +for the most part with sleeves rolled to the elbow and grimy hands. They +were the greasers, or rather, half of them. + +"Here's a new pard," Masters sang out. "Look after him, men. He's +tramping it." + +"Walk in, and make yerself comfortable," one of the men answered. "Sit +right down there, pard, and fall to at it." + +Thus bidden, Hal entered and took a place at the table. There was a dish +of smoking and extremely appetizing sausages before him, and within a +minute the man who had welcomed him had forked one on to a plate, and +had added a pile of potato to it. + +"There yer are," said the first. "We're sailin' ter day, and coffee and +tea aer the stuff we drink. It's a kind er rule on the line. Fall to, +pard, and look lively, for the standby'll be soundin' afore long." + +Hal took the advice given him, and after eating heartily felt like +working again. For a few minutes he remained in the cabin chatting with +the men, then rose from his seat, and was in the act of leaving, when a +bell sounded far away, and he, as well as the other greasers, hurried to +the engine-room. + +"The signal's gone to 'stand by,'" said Masters, who stood on the plates +below. "Keep your optic on that dial, and watch 'Old Yank' when he +comes. Another thing, mind you touch your cap to him. He's boss down +here, and knows it." + +A few minutes later the first engineer made his appearance, and stood to +look round at the engines and men, ere he went to inspect all more +closely. Hal stood near him, and at once touched his cap. + +"Helloo! that you?" cried the "first" in a friendly voice. "Hang me, but +you've took to it like a duck. Cappin' the chief and all. Wall, come a +few hours more, and we'll see the stuff you're made of." + +He made a round of the engines, and then returned to the bottom of the +long iron ladder, where he waited talking to the third officer, by name +Mr. Broom. Suddenly the bell tinkled, and the hand on the dial placed on +the wall pointed to "stand by." + +Again the gong sounded, and, looking up, Hal saw that the hand now +indicated half steam ahead. He saw the "chief" place his fingers on a +big wheel and revolve it rapidly to the right. Then he moved a lever, +and the big piston-rods shot downward, the crank plunged forward, +swished round in a circle, and sent the propeller shaft rolling round. +The _Mohican_ trembled all along her length, and Hal felt her move ever +so slightly. After that he had little time for observation, for his +services were required. + +About three in the morning the _Mohican_ cleared the bar, and slowed up +to allow the pilot to leave. Then the gong sounded again, and the lever +was pushed right over, giving full steam to the engines. + +"There, she'll stick at that if we've ordinary luck," said Masters. +"Your watch is up, Marchant, and I'd advise you to turn in and make the +most of the off time, for you'll feel pretty boiled in four hours if you +don't get a rest." + +Hoisting his weary body up the long ladder, Hal made for the greasers' +cabin, and, without troubling to undress, threw himself on the bunk. He +was asleep almost immediately, in spite of the proximity of the engines. + +Four days passed uneventfully, and meanwhile the _Mohican_ had been +steadily forging a course towards America. The weather had been fine, +but for the past two days a fresh breeze had been blowing from the +north, and now a fine sleet was accompanying it. + +When Hal turned in at night, and lay down to make the most of the +respite allowed him, the _Mohican_ was wallowing in the seas, and our +hero was anything but comfortable. But he resolutely forced himself to +swallow his evening meal. And now he lay down on the hard bunk, and at +last he fell into an uneasy doze, when there was a terrific crash, and +the _Mohican_ was thrown on to her side. Hal was hurled from his bunk, +and was brought to a sudden stop by striking against the wooden wall, +now in the position of the floor. Close beside him was the door, and he +struggled to it, aided by the light given by the electric burners, which +still did their work. + +Then shrill cries and a loud thumping proceeded from the engine-room. + +"There's trouble down there. She's on her beam ends," thought Hal, in a +half-dazed way. "I suppose she's sinking." + +Next moment his soliloquy was cut short by the sudden righting of the +ship. There was a tremendous tearing crash as the weight of water on her +decks wrenched the rails and bulwarks away; then she swung into her +proper position, throwing Hal violently to the other side of the cabin. +Instantly he sprang to his feet, and darted towards the engine-room. It +was dangerous work descending, but Hal did not pause, and soon gaining +the iron plates below, he saw a sight that made him pause in +consternation. + +"Good gracious!" he exclaimed. "What a wreck!" + +Close beside the door leading to the stoke-hole lay the "second," +motionless. Just within the door stood one of the stokers clutching the +ironwork, and looking upon the scene as if in a dream. Farther to the +right lay two other figures, while in the center was the most ghastly +sight of all. Up and down, thrusting with irresistible force, the +piston-rod of the low-pressure cylinder worked, revolving the crank +which still hung loosely to its bearings, and tossing six feet of broken +propeller shaft from side to side. + +Thump, thump, thump! Time and again the sharp end crashed upon the +plates, tearing them like paper. Bang! The bearing gave way, and the +shaft of steel plunged downward, threatening to crash through the bottom +of the ship. + +What was to be done? Cut off steam? Yes. But who would take the risk? +for still that giant shaft swung like a flail, smashing the floor of the +engine-room; and all the while a huge jet of scalding steam shrieked +from a severed pipe close by. + +"It must be done," said Hal to himself, taking in the situation at once. +"I'll do it." + +He waited a moment while the ship rolled her rails under, when he let +his fingers slip from the ladder, and darted to the lever which cut off +the steam. + +Bang! Crash! The shaft struck the plates just beside his foot, and, +giving him a violent blow upon the shoulder, sent him flying to the +other side of the engine-room. + +"I won't be beaten!" Hal exclaimed recklessly. "It must be done, or the +ship will go to the bottom." + +Once more he approached the lever, and with a jerk threw it over to the +notch above which was stamped the word "Off." A moment later Hal felt a +stunning blow on the side of his head, and fell to the floor as helpless +and as unconscious as the "second." + +What happened afterwards he did not know, but when he came to, he found +himself lying in a corner of the engine-room, with Masters leaning over +him, while a short length of rope secured him to a bolt in the wall, and +prevented him from rolling with the ship. + +"Pull yourself together now," said the latter. "There, sit up, and say +how you feel. All right? Then I'll get off. We're in an awful mess below +here." + +He went across the iron plates, clinging to anything that would give him +a holding. Hal watched him dreamily at first, and then with awakening +interest. Then he moved, and a violent pang shot through his shoulder. + +"George!" he groaned, "I feel badly knocked about. That shaft has given +me a nasty bang, for my head's aching as if it would burst, and I am +sore all over." + +He lay back again, but thinking his services might be of use soon, sat +up again and struggled to his feet. + +"There's work to be done," he said doggedly, "and I am going to take a +share of it." + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +A CALL FOR VOLUNTEERS + + +Hal stood up and looked about him, feeling still dazed. Shouts filled +the engine-room, and figures were hurrying to and fro. Suddenly the +voice of "Old Yank" rang out clear: + +"Boys," he said hoarsely, "this here ship's done for right away ef we're +not precious slippy. That 'ere shaft'll be breaking clean away with the +next big roll, and will sweep the whole room. Bustle there, and let's +get cables and anything that's handy to shear things up. Here, Masters, +skip off, and see what's to be had." + +The latter, who was behind the massive pillar that supported one end of +the cylinders, started for the ladder. + +"I'll help," cried Hal. "Hold on, Masters; I'll come with you." + +"So; that aer the way--that aer the style of grit," answered the young +engineer. "Come along then," he continued; "there's precious little time +ter lose. That shaft has cracked the base of the big pillar, and ef +another of those rolls catches her, she'll carry away every cylinder in +the place." + +He ran up the ladder, and Hal followed, feeling at first so stiff and +sore that he could scarcely move. + +"We want cables badly," said Masters. "Look here, Marchant, I'll skip +along for'ard while you go aft. Find the quartermaster, and get him to +help you. If he's my way I'll send for you, and if not I'll return. +Savvey? Then off, and mind your toes as you cross the decks, for I've +heard that there has been a clean sweep." + +Turning on his heel, he groped his way along the passage, clinging to +the rail to keep himself upon his feet. Hal went in the opposite +direction, until he reached the alleyway, which led to the well-deck. +And here another sight was presented to him. + +"A clean sweep, as Masters said," he murmured. "Derricks the only things +remaining, and not a sign of bulwarks. Ah! it's going to be a nasty +place to cross." + +Of this there could be no doubt, for the waist of the ship had filled to +overflowing as she lay on her beam ends, and on righting, the water had +torn the rails away on either side, and hurled overboard everything that +was not built into the frame of the ship, or securely bolted to it. Only +the derrick engine remained in the center, and Hal looked across a level +sweep of wet and soppy deck between himself and the poop. At that moment +an enormous wave curled over the side, and fell with all its force upon +the _Mohican_. She shivered at the blow, and then recovering, reared her +bows high in the air, sending the water rushing across the waist and +over the side. Now was the time, and Hal made the most of it. He darted +from the alleyway and raced across the slippery deck. Bump! The +_Mohican_ buried her bows deep in the sea, and at once a fresh wave rose +high in the air, to fall with a crash upon the deck. + +It was a moment of peril, and Hal sprang towards the derrick engine, +and, passing his arms through the spokes of the fly-wheel, clung there +with might and main. Instantly he was buried in a foaming mass of water. +His limbs were almost pulled from his body, so great was the drag, but +just as his strength was exhausted, the ship lurched and tossed the +water off. A minute later Hal gained the poop, and clambered upon it by +means of the hydrant pipes, for the ladders had long since gone +overboard. + +"Now for the quartermaster," he gasped. + +He crossed to the deck-house, and pulled open a door. It shut to upon +him with a bang, and he was precipitated across the narrow cabin. + +"Hallo! What's up?" cried a man who was seated on the floor in one +corner, busily preparing some lashings. "One of the greasers! What is +it, lad?" + +"I want some lengths of cable for the engine-room," Hal answered. "The +propeller shaft has broken, and the cylinders may carry away. Can you +help me?" + +"Help! Why, I'm full up with work already," the quartermaster replied, +"but ef yer want cables there's plenty of ten-foot lengths under the +floor, in the lockers. Now you can see to it yourself, though how on +airth you're going ter get 'em across to the engines is more than I can +guess." + +Hal knelt at the opening in the floor, and laboriously dragged five +lengths of cable out. + +"That's about all you'll manage," said the quartermaster. "You'd better +get along with them." + +"That will keep them from slipping when she rolls," he said to himself. +"And now to get them across. They're heavy. Ah, I have it; a piece of +rope will settle the matter." + +He dived into the locker again, and finding a long cord, he at once +passed it through the last link of the cables. Then he ran across to the +edge of the poop, and having dragged them after him, he prepared to +cross again to the alleyway. + +"It's got to be done," Hal muttered. "Here goes!" + +He dropped to the waist, and at once commenced to run across. Crash! A +monstrous wave bumped on board, and catching him midway across the deck, +washed him dangerously near the side; but a roll of the ship sent it in +another direction, and gathering pace as the _Mohican_ suddenly shot +her bows into the air, the mass of water carried Hal aft, and finally +flung him down, breathless, at the entrance of the alleyway. + +"By George, that was a near one!" said Masters, who was standing near. +"You're always in the wars. First you get smashed up by the shaft, and +now you nearly sail overboard. Look here, if I hadn't gripped hold of +your collar that time, you'd be a hundred yards astern by this. Hallo! +What's this?" + +"That? Oh, that's the rope I made fast to the cables," exclaimed Hal, +struggling to his feet, to find that he still retained the length of +cord in his hand. + +"Tell you what, Marchant," said Masters, "for a greaser, and a green 'un +aboard a ship, you walk right off with the prize! It takes no small +allowance of grit ter do that rope trick. Come along, now; the 'chief' +is waiting for the cables." + +He shook Hal's hand heartily, then helped him to haul the cables to the +engine-room. + +"Good boys!" said the chief engineer, coming towards them. "Where did +you get a hold of them?" + +"He did it," answered Masters, pointing to Hal. "I can tell you, sir, +that he has grit. He just clung to the rope after going across to the +poop, and when I saw him he was within an inch of being over the side. +He got caught by a sea, and got badly flung about. But still he hung on +to the rope, and that's how it is that you see the cables here so soon." + +"So; aer that so?" said the "chief." "Reckon you're a good 'un, young +Marchant. I don't forget as it wur you as turned the steam off the old +girl. Ef it wasn't fer that we'd all be down below by this. Wall, this +aint the time fer gassing, but 'Old Yank' won't let it slip, and when +the time comes round we'll let the right folks know. Now, you had better +skip, and fetch a second heap. We shall want them, and more. Look extry +slippy, boys, while we get these bits fixed." + +Hal and Masters sprang to the ladder again, and prepared to cross the +waist in search of more cables. There was little time to lose, for as +they stood in the engine-room both had noticed a big crack in the +massive pillar that supported the cylinders. The end of the propeller +shaft had evidently struck it a tremendous blow, and had fractured it. + +"It looks very nasty," said Masters, as they climbed to the alleyway; +"and ef the old girl rolls like she did when the shaft went, why, it'll +be a case of all up. We'd better hurry up." + +They stood at the opening of the alleyway for a few moments then raced +across the deck. This time Hal was more fortunate, for he, as well as +his companion, escaped injury. They reached the poop in safety, and were +soon hauling out more cable. A rope was run through the end links as +before, and they started to return. + +"Now's the time, and mind you run for it," exclaimed Masters, lowering +himself to the waist. + +Darting across as rapidly as he could, Hal had gained the shelter he +aimed at before Masters was halfway there, and he turned just in time to +see his companion caught by a mighty wave which came aboard at that +moment. It hoisted the poor fellow high in the air, tossing him from his +feet. Then it swept him along and dashed him violently against the +corner of the alleyway. Hal just managed to grasp his coat as the water +receded, and dragged him into the shelter. But Masters was badly hurt, +for there was a long red seam along the side of his head, and he was +bleeding profusely. + +Picking him up, Hal carried him to the cabin and laid him on one of the +bunks. + +"Now for the rope and the cables," he said. + +Stepping into the alleyway, he was retracing his steps when the +_Mohican_ rose high in the air, trembled violently as a sea struck her, +and at once rolled heavily on to her beam ends. + +"Good gracious! that will finish it!" exclaimed Hal. "Ah, what was +that?" + +A loud crash reached his ears, coming from the open door of the +engine-room. He ran to the entrance and swarmed down the ladder. + +Once more he was to see a sight that seldom meets the eye. The chief +engineer had feared the effect of another roll, and though this one had +lasted for only a few seconds, and the _Mohican_ was now back in a more +or less upright position, yet the sudden movement, the weight of so much +metal thrown violently to one side, had proved too great a strain upon +the fractured pillar. It had given way, and had carried the cylinders +with it, the whole was bringing up against one of the massive ribs of +the ship. One sharp angle, projecting beyond this support, had struck +the steel plates and ripped them open. + +A fountain of water spurted in as Hal reached the engine-room, swamping +the place. Turning his eyes to other parts, he saw that the disaster was +even greater than it at first seemed, for lying upon the floor were +three greasers, while the "chief" was huddled at the foot of the broken +pillar. At this moment Mr. Broom emerged from the stoke-hole. + +"What a calamity!" he cried. "We are doomed. Nothing can save the +_Mohican_. The next roll will shake those cylinders free, and then they +will go through the side to the bottom, and we must follow. We are +under-manned as it is, and now so many of our hands have been injured +that we are helpless. What is to be done?" + +He clung to the rail which surrounded the crank-pit, and looked +despairingly at Hal. + +"They are the same on deck," the latter answered. "The quartermaster +told me that four of the hands had been swept overboard, while others +had been seriously injured. But, wait. You want helpers, sir? Why not +call upon the passengers? There are about forty aboard." + +"The very thing!" cried the third engineer. "The work we want done can +be managed by anyone with courage and muscle. Cut off, Marchant, and see +what you can do. I shall be surprised if the whole lot don't volunteer +to a man." + +Hal at once darted up the ladder again, and, reaching the alleyway, +turned to the right, and entered the big dining saloon. It was filled +with ladies and gentlemen, the former reclining on the settees which ran +round the side, while the latter were gathered in a group in the center +discussing the probable fate of the ship. Hal at once walked up to them +and dropped into a seat, for it was difficult to keep on one's feet +owing to the movement of the ship. + +"What is it? Has something more terrible happened?" asked a tall +gentleman, who occupied the center of the group. "I suppose we must +prepare for the worst?" + +"No; I think not," Hal answered. "Gentlemen, I am sorry to have to bring +you bad news. The propeller shaft broke, and before steam could be cut +off the main support of the engines was fractured, and now the ship is +in the greatest danger; for the cylinders have crashed against the side, +and have made a large rent in the plates. If the wreck is not secured +and the hole made tight, we shall certainly founder. The last roll the +ship made completed the break." + +"Then it is bad news!" exclaimed one of the passengers. "What will +become of us all?" + +"Wait; let us hear what this young fellow has to tell us," said the +first speaker. "Perhaps he has something to propose." + +"I have," Hal replied. "All our engine-room hands are injured, and we +want help. Will any of the passengers volunteer?" + +"Yes, here is one," exclaimed the tall passenger. "Here is a strong arm +and a ready will. Command me, and I will do all that I can." + +"And I, and I," came from each of the others in quick succession. + +"You see that all are ready," said the first speaker, whose name was Mr. +Brindle. "Now, what can we do?" + +Hal thought for a moment before answering. Then he turned to the +passengers and said: + +"It is likely to be a long job, and therefore I propose that you divide +into two parties--the first to commence work at once, and the others to +come down in two hours' time. The first party had better bring all the +blankets and bedding they can. We shall want something with which to +stop the rent." + +He rose from his seat, and staggered out. + +"Well," said Mr. Broom, as our hero swung himself on to the floor below, +"what luck?" + +"They have volunteered to a man." + +"I thought they would," was the satisfied answer. "But how are we to +employ them? Tell you what, Marchant, some of the passengers will have +to set to trimming. We've been taking coal from the starboard bunker, +and this side is full, so that it will all have to be put over to the +other. Will you boss the gang? I'm the only officer left down here, and +most of the greasers have been hurt. I'll look to the engines, and will +shear them up, if you'll take the other job." + +"I'll do my best," said Hal. "Ah, here they come." + +At that moment fifteen passengers began to descend the long ladder, each +carrying a roll of blankets under his arm. + +"Hallo, what's this?" the engineer exclaimed. "Bedding! What's that +for?" + +"I thought you'd want something to plug the rent," said Hal. "Don't you +think it might do?" + +"Do! Of course it will! Young fellow, you've a head on those shoulders. +You're a puzzle. Do! Here, pile it all over by the dynamo; and let me +thank you now, gentlemen, for the manner in which you have come +forward." + +"Not a bit of it," answered Mr. Brindle. "We're here for our own sakes +as well as yours; though I own that we should have volunteered in any +case. Now, what are we to do?" + +"Put yourselves in his hands," said Mr. Broom. "He's shown that he has a +head; he's got no end of pluck, too. Take your orders from him, and +you'll be doing your very best for all hands." + +He waved to the volunteers, and at once went to a group of stokers and +greasers near by. Hal turned to the stoke-hole without a word, and, +passing through the tunnel between the boilers, entered the place set +aside for coal. It was divided down the center by a bulkhead, which +reached from the floor to the deck above for the greater length of the +bunker, but was cut down to a height of four feet some six yards from +the door. + +"Now, gentlemen," said Hal, "all this coal wants to be moved to the +other side so as to check the list. I propose that a few toss the stuff +down from above, while the others pitch it over the bulkhead." + +A minute later all were engaged, plying the implements as if they had +been accustomed to them and to no others all their lives. + +"We'll have a breather now," said Hal, an hour after he and his comrades +had set to work. "Let us have a five minutes' interval, and then at it +again, for you will do better if you have a short rest." + +The trimming gang stood there breathing heavily, and making the utmost +of the respite. Some sat down upon heaps of coal, while others leaned +against the sides, and placing their hands upon their hips, supported +them there, as if their weight was too much for them. + +"Time's up, gentlemen. We'd better set to again," said Hal. + +"My hat, sir, but you are a stern taskmaster," cried Mr. Brindle, giving +vent to a hearty laugh. "Here are we poor fellows ready to drop, and you +give us a bare five minutes. But the lad is right. Gentlemen, think of +the lives depending upon us." + +An hour later the second batch of volunteers descended, and replaced the +first, but Hal and Mr. Brindle remained at work. + +All day long the two parties took it in turns to labor in the +coal-bunker, and when night came, Hal was able to dismiss his gang, and +inform Mr. Broom that the task was finished. + +"Good!" exclaimed the latter. "Your fellows have worked like bricks, and +have well earned a sleep. You, too, had better get one. Cut along up to +your bunk, and leave this to me. I'm used to long hours, and will keep +watch below. The _Mohican_ is steering now. That sea-anchor is +overboard, and we're able to keep fairly clear of water. Now, off you +go." + +He waved to the ladder, and Hal at once took his advice. He was, indeed, +worn out with his labors, for all day long he had shoveled coal, till +the skin was worn off his hands. Accordingly, he did not argue with the +"third," but, going to the ladder, climbed to the alleyway. He went to a +locker, and finding the remains of a loaf, tore a portion off, and went, +munching it, to his bunk. Less than five minutes later he was so sound +asleep that he would have slept the clock round had not a violent thirst +from the coal-dust he had inhaled caused him to leave his bed in search +of something to drink. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +NO REST FOR THE WEARY + + +An uncouth object Hal looked as he left his bunk and sought something +with which to quench his thirst. + +He went to a filter which was kept near the stairway leading to the +saloon. It was full, and he took a long and satisfying drink. That done, +he returned to the alleyway, where he stopped and looked out. + +"Good!" he exclaimed. "The sea is falling, and there is scarcely any +wind. That gives the _Mohican_ a better chance. But Mr. Broom will be +wanting me." + +He looked about, and seeing the nozzle of a hydrant at hand, gave it a +turn by means of the key. Whipping his shirt off, he bent beneath the +spouting water which gushed out, and thoroughly soused himself. "That's +better," he said, catching a glimpse of himself in the glass. "I look +more like a Christian again. Now for Masters." + +He went to the engineer's cabin and knocked. + +"Come in," someone cried. + +Hal entered, to find the ship's doctor engaged in dressing Masters' +wounds. + +"Well, what now, my lad?" asked the doctor. "More casualties? If so, I +shall be overwhelmed." + +"It's nothing, sir," Hal answered. "I came to inquire after my friend. +How is he? I left him here yesterday morning, with a big cut across his +head, and haven't been able to come near him since." + +"And we only discovered him a matter of half an hour ago. He has been +lying here ever since. He has a crack across the top of his head that +would kill the average nigger; but, thanks to an extraordinarily thick +skull, he's none the worse." + +Hal looked on for a few moments, then he left the cabin and climbed down +to the engine-room. How changed the place was since the day he first +descended! Then all was bustle, and after the ship had left port, the +noise, the whir of machinery had been unending. That was barely twenty +hours ago, and now all was still. The wreck of a portion of the fine +engines was piled against the side, wound round with innumerable lengths +of cable. Then, at the end of it all, a mass of blanket and bedding +bulged into the room, looking peculiarly out of place. As Hal glanced at +the rent which had been plugged during the night, a mass of water struck +the ship on that side, and drove in the caulk, a flood of water flowing +in immediately. + +"That's scarcely safe," thought Hal. "I had better find the 'third,' and +tell him about it." + +But there was no need to do so, for at this moment Mr. Broom appeared +from behind part of the machinery. + +"There's more work for us," he said wearily. "I've had my eye on that +rent all night, and the plug has gone at last. How are you, youngster?" + +"Fit and well," Hal answered. "But you look worn out, sir. Why not turn +in? Leave this job to me. I'll get the same hands as I had before, and +we'll soon see to it." + +"You can't work without something to keep you going," the "third" +replied. "Besides, I don't know that I am willing to have the job done +by someone else. The poor old chief is dead, and the 'second' was +knocked out of time by the first smash, so I'm in sole charge. I want a +sleep, I own, but I'm not done yet. You cut up now, and perhaps when you +return I'll take a turn at the breakfast table." + +"But I'm as fresh as a lark," exclaimed Hal, "whereas you are completely +done up. Give me directions what to do, and then turn in and have a +sleep. There will be heaps to get in order when you awake, and as you +are the only engineer officer left on the active list, you ought to take +care of yourself." + +"You're right there, lad," the "third" replied, sitting down suddenly +upon a step of the ladder, and turning a deathly gray, his pallor +showing through the thick layer of grime which covered his face. "I'm +done, and need a good rest to put me right. I'll tell you how we'll +manage it. You slip up and get a bite and a cup of tea; then you can +relieve me. You know what I want done. Plug this rent, and brace the +wrecked machinery still more. Then, if another gale springs upon us, we +shall feel secure." + +"Very well, sir; I'll get my breakfast and relieve you," said Hal +briskly. He hastened in search of breakfast. The mess-room was empty, +and when Hal looked into the cabin occupied by the engineer officers, he +found that it had been converted into a hospital, in which the wounded +were being treated. + +"Everything seems to be disorganized," he said. "I'll go to the pantry +and see what the stewards can do." + +He passed through the alleyway, and mounted the narrow stairs. + +"Can I have some breakfast?" he asked of one of the stewards, who +happened to be there. + +"Breakfast! Of course you can," was the hearty answer. "You fellows down +below have worked like bricks, and deserve something good. + +"Did you ever see such a smash?" he proceeded, pointing to the shelves +of the pantry. "Everything is upside down, and more than half the +crockery has been shattered." + +While speaking to Hal the steward had been plying a tin-opener, and at +this moment turned out a big tongue on to a plate. He cut off a slice, +and making a sandwich, handed it to Hal. Then a bowl of tea was put in +his hand, and Hal was on the point of retiring when Mr. Brindle +appeared. + +"My young friend the greaser, I think," he exclaimed. "Ah, how are +matters down below this morning? I assure you that I and my comrades +were so fatigued by the healthy exercise you gave us, that we retired +immediately the trimming was completed, and have slept like so many logs +ever since. But, thank Heaven, all looks well to-day, and hope is high +in everyone's heart." + +"Yes, all is well," Hal responded; "but there is still work to be done." + +"That sounds as though another call might be made for volunteers," said +Mr. Brindle. "Come, now, is that not the case?" + +"That is what I propose to do, Mr. Brindle. You see, the engine-room is +practically deserted. But for a few stokers who keep steam in two of the +boilers, and the third engineer, the place is quite empty. Mr. Broom is +done up, and when I return will place me in charge, and go to his bunk. +As soon as he has gone, I propose to replug the rent." + +"Then you will most certainly want us," said Mr. Brindle. "Come in here, +lad, and talk the matter over. No; you must not refuse. We are all +equals and comrades on this ship, and no one could object to your taking +a meal in the saloon, particularly at this time. Now, come along in, and +take your breakfast comfortably." + +It was useless to attempt to refuse compliance with Mr. Brindle's +request simply on the ground that he was only a greaser in the +engine-room. In ordinary circumstances, the presence of such a person in +the saloon would have led to a scene, and the fact would have been +reported to the captain. But things were changed now. The _Mohican_ was +little better than a wreck, her crew diminished, and those who were left +were incapable of carrying on the work. The call for volunteers had at +once placed regular hands and passengers on a common footing. Many of +them had heard Mr. Brindle speaking to Hal, and they at once supported +his request. + +"You must come in, young sir," one of them cried. "Come along, or you +will be offending everyone in the saloon." + +Hal blushed, grasped the bowl of tea firmly, and tucking the roll of +tongue and bread beneath one arm, made his way to a seat. + +The passengers gathered round him and plied him with eager questions. + +"Now, what is wanted?" asked one of them, with a laugh. + +"The lives of all on board depend upon our exertions," Hal answered. +"With good weather we need not fear, but if the gale blows up again, the +_Mohican_ may very easily go to the bottom. That rent has opened again, +and must be closed. Will anyone help me do it?" + +He looked round at the group of passengers, and was rewarded with an +emphatic nod from each. + +"We shall all be there," said Mr. Brindle. "And when the rent is +patched, what follows?" + +"The cylinder covers should be taken off and the piston-rods and cranks +removed. I fancy I know enough about engines to instruct you, and if +not, we must wait till to-morrow." + +"Perhaps I could help you there," remarked Mr. Brindle. "On the +plantations in Cuba a trained engineer is a rarity. As a consequence, +one becomes something of an expert one's self. Many a time I have had +to effect some minor repair, so that I have picked up some knowledge of +machinery. Now, when shall we come?" + +"As soon after breakfast as possible, and I would suggest that you bring +more blankets." + +"Very well, Marchant. We'll divide into two parties as before, and you +can expect the first in a quarter of an hour." + +Hal thanked him, and left the saloon. Then he went for'ard, and looked +up the carpenter. + +"We want some planks, a few hammers, and a saw down in the engine-room," +he said. "Can you let us have them, Chipps?" + +"You can take what you can find," was the answer. "There, the store is +under the poop. Take a look round and help yourself." + +Hal went into the space set apart for carpenter's stores, and dragged +out two long planks. These he carried to the engine-room. Then he made +other trips, bringing hammers, nails, a roll of canvas, a saw, and many +useful things. + +"Now for Mr. Broom," he said. "I'll get down and free the poor fellow, +for he looked worn out with hard work and want of sleep." + +Glad of the relief, Mr. Broom climbed the ladder, swaying from side to +side, and looking as if he were incapable of controlling his limbs. But +he was not the one to give in easily. He reached the top with an effort, +went to the cabin, and, tumbling upon a bunk, fell into a deep slumber. + +A few minutes later the first batch of passengers appeared, and a +consultation was held. + +"How are you going to do it, lad?" asked Mr. Brindle, looking at the +rent in the vessel's side, and at the mass of blankets displaced by the +sea. "It seems to me that something stronger is wanted--something +behind the bedding, to force it into the opening and keep it in +position." + +"I thought of that," said Hal, "and I've got planks from the carpenter. +I suggest that we cut lengths, which will go from end to end of the +rent. Then back them with cross-pieces. If nailed together in that +position, we shall have a fairly solid board, which can be pressed +against the bedding and wedged in place." + +"That's about as good a way as any," exclaimed Mr. Brindle. "But I've +one idea. Get your canvas soaked with tar, and stretch it over the +blankets. When the edges are squeezed into the rent they will keep the +water out. Undoubtedly our first job is to get the plugging done. Now, +young sir, put us at it." + +It was work which was urgently needed; and the passengers, looking very +business-like in their shirt-sleeves, set to at it so heartily that the +rent was safely filled by afternoon. + +"Now we'll tackle the cylinders and cranks," said Hal. "It has to be +done, and better now than later on." + +The work was tackled willingly, and when the "third" descended to the +engine-room he found the rent safely plugged, the wreck of the engines +securely braced, and the cylinder covers and all movable parts taken +away, and made fast elsewhere. + +He stopped abruptly at the bottom of the ladder, and fell back a pace in +astonishment. + +"Why, what's this?" he cried, as though he could not believe his senses. +"The hole plugged as tight as a barrel, the wreck stayed up with yards +of cable, and all the movable parts unshipped and set aside. Here, +what's been happening? Have we fallen in with another ship, and borrowed +a crew of engine hands?" + +"It means that we carried out your orders, sir," said Hal. "You were +dead tired, and left the engine-room to me. Our friends, the passengers, +came to our aid again, and this is their handiwork." + +"Yes, that is so, and glad have we been to help," Mr. Brindle +interposed. "But allow me to tell you, Mr. Broom, though we have carried +out your orders, it was under the direction of this lad. It seems +extraordinary that he, who never saw the machinery of a big ocean-going +steamer until a week ago, should so soon be placed in a position of +responsibility. Few would have been so level-headed. The lad has won our +admiration, for he is as free from conceit as he is full of resolution. +He will get on in the world." + +"So he will," the "third" responded. "The lad's got grit, sir--the stuff +that won't give way whatever the danger. Who stopped the engines, and +nearly got knocked into so much pulp? Why, this kid. I'm not going to +say one word about the other part, though we don't forget in a hurry +that it was he who stuck like blazes to the trimming. And now he just +goes and packs me off to my bunk, and then coolly tidies the whole place +up, and there isn't anything more to be done! Why, I might just as well +have had my sleep out!" + +"Ha, ha, ha! So you might," laughed Mr. Brindle. "But come along to the +saloon. We are all in need of a meal." + +"By George, we are!" Mr. Broom replied. "Come, Marchant; we'll defer the +discussion of your good works till later. But when the time comes for +you to seek for a job on the other side, you've one here who is your +friend, and who will gladly help you." + +"And here is another," exclaimed Mr. Brindle. "But to dinner now." + +Early next day passengers and crew ascended to the deck, for the time +had come to commit to the deep the bodies of those who had been killed. + +It was a sad group that stood upon the planks, hats reverently in hand, +and peered into the sea, soon to become the grave of those unfortunate +comrades stretched still and motionless at their feet. Swathed in +blankets, with fire-bars to bear them down to their last resting-place, +the chief engineer and two hands lay awaiting the last rites at the +hands of their friends. Very earnestly, and as if he would emphasize +every word, the captain read the burial service, while the ship's bell +tolled mournfully. Then, at a sign from the quartermaster, the grating +upon which the bodies lay was tipped by two of the hands, and the three +forms slipped from beneath the pall, and disappeared forever. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +A FRIEND IN NEED + + +It would be tedious to describe the manner in which the _Mohican_ +finally reached New York, for from the date of the accident to her +machinery, and the successful plugging of the enormous rent in her side, +all went well. + +But what had once been a fine-looking vessel was now little better than +a bare hulk, with smoke-stack and masts rising from a deck which was +clear of everything save the broken remnants of fixtures which had +defied the fury of the seas. + +"There's one thing about her," said Mr. Broom to Hal, "she's been +stripped clean, and looks dismantled, but she's right and tight still, +and will well repay the overhauling which will be necessary before she +can put to sea again. Wait till we get alongside the dock; there will be +no end of excitement! And when it is known through what dangers we have +come, we shall be the talk of New York; and won't the newspaper +correspondents rush for us!" + +And, indeed, this was the case. No sooner was the _Mohican_ moored than +thousands came down to look at her, and roamed all over her decks, +marveling at the manner in which she had been buffeted, and at the pluck +and skill which had brought her safely into port. + +"I call it wonderful!" said the line manager, addressing the crew after +their arrival. "Two weeks ago business called me across from England to +New York, and I experienced the full fury of the same hurricane which +wrought such destruction here. I know what your difficulties have been, +and I am glad to be here to congratulate you all. It is difficult to +thank you sufficiently, and it is almost impossible to single out any +individual for special praise when all have worked so well. Your +captain, however, has done remarkably; he has shown such seamanship, +skill, and courage, that I at once promote him to the command of one of +our big passenger ships. Your second and third engineers have well +earned promotion, and, by all accounts, so has one of their +subordinates. I refer to the youth called Marchant. He, too, shall be +rewarded. And now, as by bringing the _Mohican_ safely to port you have +saved the company a considerable loss, I am glad to be able to tell you +that two thousand pounds will be divided proportionately amongst you." + +The manager bowed and retired, leaving the crew to discuss the matter. +Next morning Hal found that his share was ten pounds, and to this a +further sum of ten was added for stopping the engines at the time of the +accident. + +"You're a rich man," said Mr. Brindle chaffingly. "At any rate, you have +made more in one trip than you would have earned in three or four +months. What do you propose to do with yourself, may I inquire?" + +"Really I cannot say, Mr. Brindle; of course, I am awfully lucky! The +twenty pounds, with what I had before, will enable me to live while I am +looking for a job." + +"And have you any decided preference?" asked Mr. Brindle. "I mean, must +the employment be in America? I have a proposal to make, and you must +consider it before you decide. I am a Cuban planter. I told you that I +had some rough engineering knowledge. It has been acquired amongst the +machinery on my plantations. I want an engineer, one who can act as +master in my absence. Will you accept the post? The pay shall be good. +You shall have a percentage on the profits, and where your department is +concerned I will give you a free hand. But in addition to the engines, I +shall want you to help me with the management of the plantation." + +He sat on the rail of the ship, and looked curiously at Hal; for he had +taken a fancy to our hero, and was impressed by his behavior on the +ship. + +"It is very good of you, Mr. Brindle," Hal exclaimed. "I never expected +to be offered such an important post, and I accept with pleasure. Tell +me when I am to sail, and where I am to go to." + +"I am glad you fall in with the plan," Mr. Brindle answered. "To tell +you the truth, I have been itching to get hold of you ever since you set +us to work at that trimming. You showed a fine example. You see, +appearance and manner is everything when dealing with blacks; and the +natives of Cuba, who are anything from genuine negro to almost pure +Spanish, recognize and look up to a European who knows how to treat +them, and can show them what to do. Now, as to marching orders, I have +business which will keep me in New York for a few days; after that we'll +go to Florida, where I have another plantation. From there we will sail +to Havana, and three days later we shall reach the hacienda, which goes +by the name of 'Eldorado,' and is one of the most beautiful spots I have +ever seen. But when can you leave the ship? I should be glad to take you +with me this evening." + +"I can get away whenever I wish," Hal answered, overwhelmed by the +prospect before him. "But where do you stay? I am sorry to say that my +clothes are rough, and scarcely fitted for polite society." + +"That is a matter that is easily arranged, my lad. Now, pack your traps, +and come along. Leave the clothes to me, for as my engineer you are +given a free kit, just as they say to the soldier." + +Mr. Brindle smiled pleasantly, and, turning away, hurried to his cabin +to collect his baggage. + +Left to himself, Hal went below, and soon had his few belongings packed +in a bag. Then he went the round of his friends, and took farewell of +them. + +"Lucky beggar!" exclaimed Masters, whom Hal found propped up in his +bunk, with his head enveloped in bandages. "You are a fortunate fellow, +Marchant! But you deserve it all. I wish you were staying, for, after +what has passed, I am sure we should have been capital friends, and had +some splendid trips together. And now you say you are off to Cuba, and I +suppose in a few weeks' time you will be lording it over hundreds of +niggers. Well, old man, must you go? Good-by, and the best of luck." + +"Thank you," Hal answered, with a laugh. "A rapid recovery to you. As to +my looking a swell and doing the grand, why, that's all humbug. Ta, ta; +and if ever you come to Cuba, look me up." + +Whatever idea Hal may have had of his appearance in the future, the +matter was soon settled when he and Mr. Brindle had left the ship. + +"There, in you hop," said the latter, motioning him to enter the cab +which had pulled up beside the wharf. + +Then he mentioned the name of a fashionable hotel, to which they were +driven. They obtained rooms, then emerged from the enormous building, +which rose for many stories into the air, and entered one of the +numerous electric cars that run through the streets of New York, and +within ten minutes they were entering the doors of a big tailoring +establishment known as Riarty's Store. + +"I always get my clothes here," said Mr. Brindle. "It is not more +expensive than obtaining them locally in Cuba, and as they have my +measure for suits, boots, and hats, I can get anything by writing. Ah, +good-day, Mr. Riarty." + +He suddenly stepped towards a florid man, whose enormous proportions +almost dwarfed his own. + +"This young gentleman is my overseer, and requires suitable clothes for +plantation life," he said. "You can take his measure, and I should like +the things in four days. But he wants a ready-made suit for wearing in +town, and an evening one as well. Can you do it?" + +"To be sure I can," was the ready answer. "Step this way. One of the +assistants shall attend to you." + +Hal was astonished at the extent of the order. In the old days--which +already seemed so very long ago, though only a few weeks had actually +elapsed--he would have thought nothing of it. Then he was the son of a +wealthy man, and had no need to stint himself; now it was totally +different, and a gentleman, who was not much more than a stranger, +though one with a kind heart, would pay whatever was called for. + +"But you are ordering too much," expostulated Hal. "I shall never need +all these clothes. Besides, think of the cost!" + +"The cost, my dear young sir; that is my affair," Mr. Brindle laughed +pleasantly. "I can assure you that if you only do your duty by me you +will rapidly repay the outlay. As to there being too many things, you +will want every suit I have ordered. I am an old hand, and know now +exactly what will be useful." + +Hal was silenced, but determined to do his utmost to repay the kindness +of his benefactor. Fortunately, Mr. Riarty had a smartly cut plain suit +which fitted his youthful customer, and another of evening clothes which +required but slight alteration. + +"We'll take the first with us," said Mr. Brindle, "and Mr. Riarty can +send the other to the hotel in time for dinner. Good-day, sir, and +please do not disappoint me. Remember, in four days' time we require the +bulk of the order. Come along now, my friend. By the way, I must have +some shorter name for you. Marchant is far too long. How are you usually +called? Hal? Ah, that is short, and sounds well. It fits your character, +and is a good one." + +Five days later they boarded the railway cars running south, and Hal had +his eyes opened as to the possibilities of traveling in comfort. The +saloons and dining-cars were decorated in sumptuous fashion; and when +night came, the accommodation had nothing of the make-shift about it. +Americans, he discovered, did not consider that discomfort went +hand-in-hand with travel. Their railways were designed for speed, +safety, and easy running, and their cars for rest and freedom from +vibration. Mr. Brindle led the way into the smoking-room at the end of +the cars, and pressed the button for the porter. + +"We shall want two compartments through to Florida," he said. "See that +it is a good one, and take our small traps there." + +When the man had gone Mr. Brindle turned to Hal, and, pointing to a +hand-bag, said: + +"All save that may remain in the sleeping saloon, but the bag you see +contains notes, gold, and valuable securities. Now, I am going to give +you a job. Your duties will commence from this moment, for I place you +in charge of the bag, and will beg of you never to allow it out of your +sight." + +"Then you may rely upon me to look after it, and wherever I go your bag +shall come with me." + +Hal was as good as his word. Hour after hour the train hurried on. +Occasionally the cars would pull up at some wayside station to allow a +change of locomotives, and then the passengers would descend and take a +short walk to stretch their legs and take the stiffness out of them. On +such an occasion Hal strolled along the platform, leaving Mr. Brindle +reading in the car. It was a sultry morning, and, feeling hot and +fatigued, he sat down on a bench, being joined first by one passenger +and then by a second, the former entering into conversation with him. + +"Busy scene, sir," he said with some foreign accent. "Traveling alone, +sir?" continued the stranger. "I should say you're not. The gentleman +with you is Señor--I mean, Mr. Brindle of Cuba?" + +Hal felt annoyed at the catechism through which he was being put. + +"Well," he answered curtly, "and what if he is?" + +What reply the dark-bearded stranger was about to give was cut short by +the sudden clanging of a bell, and by the cry from the conductor, "All +aboard!" + +Starting from the seat, Hal ran some dozen paces, when he remembered the +bag intrusted to him, and which he had placed by his side. To his +consternation it was not where he had left it on the bench; a moment +later, however, he noticed with a thrill of surprise that the stranger +had it, and was hastening with it along the platform. + +"Hi, there! Stop!" cried Hal, running after him. "What do you mean by +taking my bag?" he demanded indignantly, rushing up to the man, and +grasping the handle. + +"Señor's bag! Pardon, but this is my friend's," replied the dark, +Spanish-looking stranger, feigning astonishment and some amount of +anger. + +"Your friend's! Nonsense! It's mine! Give it up!" Hal cried, and without +more ado wrenched the bag away. + +"Sir, how do you dare? Ah, but here is my friend himself. He will +explain," the stranger replied hotly. "Then, señor, you shall answer." + +"What is this? What is the trouble?" the second man, a short, +swarthy-looking fellow, asked, joining them at this moment. "Come, the +cars are about to start." + +"The trouble!" his friend replied. "See; we hasten to board the train, +and you forget your bag. I would rescue it for you when this fine +gentleman wishes to prevent me." + +"But the bag is not mine; it belongs to him," the second man replied +blandly, indicating Hal with a wave of his hand. + +At once the face of the first speaker changed. He smiled, showing an +excellent set of teeth, and made a profuse apology. + +"My dear señor, but you must pardon me," he said. "It was my error, and +a grievous one indeed. A thousand pardons. Señor must have thought me a +thief!" + +Hal certainly did, but it was not quite wise to admit it, and as the +cars were moving, he acknowledged by a curt nod the theatrical bow with +which he was favored, and hurriedly exclaiming, "I am glad the matter is +settled," turned on his heel and boarded the cars. But one thing struck +his attention at the last moment and filled his mind with suspicion. In +the hurry of replacing his hat the Spanish-looking stranger had +displaced a coal-black beard, and disclosed for the fraction of a minute +a clean-shaven chin. Next moment the beard was back in its place, and +the two men had leaped on to the train. + +"I don't like the look of those fellows," thought Hal, as he took his +place beside Mr. Brindle. "It was a trick to steal the bag, and from +what was said I feel sure that they know who we are, and what valuables +I was in charge of. Do you happen to know either of those two men who +were speaking to me on the platform?" he suddenly asked, leaning forward +to address his companion. + +"Do you mean those who joined the cars after you? No, I cannot say that +I do; and yet something about the bearded one struck me as familiar. +What about them? They seemed to me to be holding a heated conversation +with you." + +"They very nearly walked off with your bag," Hal answered. Then he +described the facts of the case. + +"Yes, it looks nasty," said Mr. Brindle at last. "It appears to me that +those two are scoundrels. Strange, but one certainly seems to have a +familiar face. Pshaw! It cannot be! But we must be on our guard in +future." + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +ALL BUT KILLED + + +Undoubtedly an attempt had been made to deprive Hal of his charge. Had +Hal waited another minute before discovering the absence of his +possession, the thieves would certainly have escaped with the valuables. + +"Yes, they are rogues," said Mr. Brindle that evening, returning to the +subject as he and Hal sat down to dinner, "and the more I think about it +the more certain I feel that I am right. After dinner we will endeavor +to ascertain who they are." + +Accordingly, half an hour later, they rose from their seats, just as the +train drew up at a platform, and walked from end to end of the long +string of cars, failing, however, to see the two adventurers. + +"They've gone; and, after all, it was to be expected," exclaimed Mr. +Brindle. "I suppose they slipped off a few minutes after boarding the +train. There can have been no difficulty, as we crawled out of the +station. Well, we shall not be troubled again; but let it be a lesson to +you, Hal. Nowadays, one ought to be most careful when dealing with +strangers." + +Sauntering back, they took their seats once more, and looked at the +people on the platform. At length the bell clanged, and to the familiar +cry of "All aboard!" the cars were once more set in motion. + +"Hallo! Those fellows were here all the time," said Hal, glancing at two +figures on the platform. "Look, Mr. Brindle! There are the men who tried +to steal the bag!" + +"Ah, is that so, Hal?" exclaimed Mr. Brindle. "Precious scoundrels they +look too, and the one with the beard strikes me again as being a man I +have met before. Well, we need not trouble, for the train is off, and +they are left behind. Now, lad, we'll have a good sleep, and to-morrow, +when we leave our berths for breakfast, we shall be within an hour of +Sable Bay." + +Ten minutes later our hero was lying between the sheets, looking +sleepily at the shaded electric light above him. + +Meanwhile, what had become of the two men who had attempted to deprive +Hal of the bag? + +No sooner had the car passed in which Mr. Brindle and his young engineer +were seated, than the swarthy-looking foreigners leaped on to the step +of the following one, and hastily passing through the smoking-saloon, +entered a small cupboard set apart for the porter. + +"That was well managed, Señor Capitan," the darker of the two at once +exclaimed, seating himself. "Ha, ha, did you not see them look at us? It +is clear that they suspected our game, and no doubt their inspection of +the cars was to discover us and have us ejected. We have played our +cards well. While they fancy that we are miles behind them, we are in +reality but a few yards away. No doubt this negro will entertain us till +the time for action arrives, and then we will have the gold you say the +bag contains, even though that stalwart young Englishman objects." + +He spoke in Spanish, gesticulating and gabbling the words, and +introducing a tone of marked disdain when alluding to the porter. There +was little doubt that he was a half-caste, and owed some part of his +existence to the negro race to which he had alluded with such contempt. + +"When do we make the attempt, Señor Capitan?" he asked. "See, it is +half-past eight now, and the majority of passengers are thinking of +going to bed. Shall you try at midnight, or will you think it best to +wait till the early hours of to-morrow?" + +The man addressed did not answer for the moment, but, removing the beard +from his chin, slowly rolled a cigarette. He was a small, active-looking +man, of undoubted Spanish blood. At first sight he would have been +called a handsome fellow, but a glance at his eyes and mouth altered +that impression. There was something not altogether pleasing about him. + +"You are overhasty, and forget yourself, Pedro," he said at length. "One +would have thought that it was all of your planning. Remember that it +was I who decided how we would act; and do not forget that in +undertaking to abstract this bag, I am risking far more than you." + +"For which you will, no doubt, extract a proportionately large share of +the booty," grumbled the one who had been called Pedro. + +"Perhaps. And why not? Am I not the leader? and are you not the servant? +But do not let us argue so, or we might quarrel, and that would be bad +for one of us. Listen to me, and see that you do not interrupt. This +English brat, who just awoke in time to upset the plan which I had +devised so carefully, is still in charge of the precious bag for which +we have traveled so far, and from which we hope to recoup ourselves. We +know that he is about to retire for the night, for the porter has told +us so. Very good. What of the others? They are weary, and will turn in +early, so as to awake fresh and rested to-morrow. Our accomplice here, +the negro whom you scowl at so heavily, will tell us when all in that +car have retired. That will be our time. Any noise we may make will be +unnoticed, owing to the fact that it is so early; while if this young +fool of an Englishman shouts--well, perhaps the rattle of the train will +drown everything!" + +"Perhaps," Pedro growled. "And what if the sounds are heard?" he asked. +"Supposing the Señor Englishman cries loudly for help?" + +"Ah! then he must look to himself. We will deal gently with him till +then; but if he refuses to be silent----In any case, you have the +revolver and some inches of steel? Now we understand each other," said +the Spaniard. "We will wait till all is clear, when we will enter the +Señor Englishman's compartment and bind him. That done, this porter will +signal for the cars to stop and will raise an alarm. Of course he will +not know precisely what has happened, nor, if questions are asked will +he have an idea of the appearance of the two mountebanks who have dared +to commit robbery on the cars. Our friend, the Señor Brindle, will not +dream of us; for did he not see us descend from the cars some miles +back? By the time the passengers have collected their senses we shall be +a mile behind, hidden in the forest, and it will be evil luck indeed if +the bag which we covet is not with us. Then back to 'the ever-faithful +island,' Cuba, the island of freedom, where a Spaniard who is poor may +live in contentment, certain of being able to return to his native +country with provision for the remainder of his life, and all plucked +from the islanders. Yes, Pedro, we will return home and, later on, we +will repeat the process of bleeding the Señor Brindle." + +"Buenos, Señor Capitan! You are a veritable wonder!" Pedro cried +excitedly, waving his cigarette in the air, and patting his comrade on +the knee. "And now to pass the time. It is dull sitting here doing +nothing but smoke and listen to the rattle of the train. Here, boy, +bring glasses and a bottle." + +Thus addressed, the porter produced a decanter of liquor and two +tumblers, and for an hour or more the two conspirators refreshed +themselves, and carried on an eager conversation in low tones, in the +voluble, gesticulating manner common to their countrymen. At length the +porter, who had departed and left them to themselves, returned to inform +them that all was clear. + +"Now for the money, Pedro!" the Spaniard exclaimed. "Wait, though; let +us pay this good fellow for his services." + +Taking a purse from his pocket, he placed four dollars in the porter's +hand, and led the way into the smoking saloon. Two minutes later they +were standing at the end of the car in which Hal was sleeping. They +paused for a moment as if in fear, then they opened the door, and crept +along the passage till they were outside the compartment he occupied. + +"No, not there, Señor Capitan. The English boy has gone into the other +bunk," Pedro whispered, pointing to the next compartment, in which Mr. +Brindle lay. "See, I am sure of it, for here is his coat, hanging +outside the door." + +"Are you quite sure, Pedro?" the Spaniard asked doubtfully. "The porter +said we should find him in the fifth from the forward end of the car, +and this is certainly the one." + +"That is as you say," was the reply. "But here are the young man's +boots. It is clear the negro is mistaken." + +For more than a minute the two crouched silently in the corridor, +doubtful as to the compartment in which Hal slept, and in which lay the +bag they hoped to capture. It was, indeed, a puzzle, and it was long +before they could come to any solution. To enter the wrong compartment +meant ruin to all their hopes. But more than that might come of it, for +Mr. Brindle was a powerful man, and to be caught in his clutches would +be no joke. It was not a pleasant thing to think about, and it troubled +the Spaniard. He ground his teeth, and, muttering an oath, whispered in +Pedro's ear: + +"Keep the revolver," he said, "and give me the knife. Whatever happens, +we must contrive to get away." + +Convinced by the boots which Hal had placed too far to the right when +leaving them in the corridor for the porter to attend to, they crept on +a pace, and grasped the handle of the compartment in which Mr. Brindle +was sleeping. + +"Quick, the key!" whispered the Spaniard, trying the door, and finding +it locked. + +There was a grating sound and a faint click as the key was introduced, +and the bolt thrown back. But slight though the noise was it reached +Hal's ears, even amidst the rattle of the wheels, and startled him from +his sleep. Ignorant as to what had disturbed him, he lay on his back, +his eyes wide open. Another minute, and he would have turned over to +sink into sleep once more, when something bumped heavily against the +woodwork which separated his compartment from Mr. Brindle's. + +"Don't move, or it will be the worse for you, Señor Englishman!" he +heard a hoarse voice exclaim in threatening tones. + +It took a few seconds for Hal to comprehend what was happening. "Don't +move, or it will be the worse for you!" That meant that someone was in +difficulties next door. + +"By Jove, those rascals are making another attempt!" he exclaimed; and +at once sprang from his bunk. + +Flinging the door open, he rushed into the next compartment, to see +kneeling on the floor, in the full glare of the electric light, which +had been switched on by the Spaniard, Pedro, revolver in hand, the +muzzle of which was pressed into Mr. Brindle's ear, while the other hand +was placed over his mouth. + +Hal had just time to notice that the other scoundrel was busily +searching for the bag beneath the bunk, when both men turned and rushed +at him, Pedro pressing the trigger of his revolver. There was a blinding +flash, followed by a loud report, and Hal felt something strike him on +the left shoulder with stunning force. Next second the Spaniard's face, +with the long, coal-black beard, suddenly appeared before him in the +smoke, and he struck at it with all his might, sending the ruffian +staggering back; but he recovered himself in a moment, and rushed +towards the doorway, throwing Hal to the floor as he passed. + +"How is that now, lad? How do you feel, old boy? Better? That's it; +you're smiling. That's the way. Pull yourself together, and drink this +off." + +It was Mr. Brindle who was speaking, and, scarcely understanding what +was said, but feeling dazed and queer, and much inclined to close his +eyes and sleep, Hal swallowed the contents of the tumbler which was +placed to his lips. But suddenly Mr. Brindle's well-known voice brought +him to his senses. + +"By Jove, what a fright you gave me!" he said. "How do you feel, Hal? +Come, pull yourself together and look at me." + +"Eh, what? I'm all right! What's happening? Here, let me sit up!" +exclaimed Hal, suddenly suiting the action to the word, and looking +about him with wide-open eyes. "Why, what's this? I was asleep, and +then----Those thieves! What is it, Mr. Brindle? I dreamed that they had +made another attempt, and that I happened to hear them. It looked as +though all was up with you, and I remember feeling in a terrible way. +After that, everything seemed to stop, and I fell into a glorious +dream." + +"That is just about what has happened, my lad, and very fortunate it was +for me that you awoke when you did; though for you, poor lad, it has +meant trouble. Those Spanish scoundrels did make a second attempt, but, +in their endeavor to get possession of the bag, they pitched upon the +wrong compartment. I can tell you that it was a ticklish moment for me. +As I lay there, not daring to move, I saw you come in. The only wonder +to me is that the gentleman called Pedro did not have his revenge at +once by shooting me. At any rate, he managed to put a bullet into your +shoulder, and then he escaped from the car. The other rascal, whom you +tackled so gamely, and who will have a splendid black eye for his pains, +also got clear away, leaving some of his property behind him. Here it +is." + +He held up a mass of black hair, which had formerly covered the chin of +the Spaniard. + +"Now, Hal, you have the whole story," he continued. "You were wounded +and fainted from loss of blood. A fellow passenger, who happens to be a +doctor, has already examined and dressed the shoulder, and reports most +favorably. A week will see you up and about, so he says, for the bullet +was of very small caliber." + +"What? A week in bed, Mr. Brindle!" exclaimed Hal, aghast. "Why, I am +fit to get up now. See here, I feel quite myself again." + +He struggled to his feet, but next moment he was glad to sit down again, +and was forced, though much against his inclination, to confess that he +was shaken. However, with his old dogged determination, he resolved not +to give way, and not to submit to being put ignominiously to bed. + +"I am a bit groggy," he admitted. "My legs don't seem quite to belong +to me; but it's only a temporary matter. Thank you, I will have another +sip." + +The tumbler was raised to his lips, and he drank deeply, for the loss of +blood had induced a violent thirst. + +"There you see for yourself how fit you are," said Mr. Brindle. "And +now, as the thieves have escaped, and your wound has been seen to, you +will lie down and sleep till morning." + +There was no gainsaying this direct order, for Mr. Brindle waited to see +that Hal lay full length on the bunk. Then he left the section, and +entered his own. As for Hal, though badly shaken, he suffered little +pain. The injured shoulder felt numbed, but nothing more. After lying +awake for half an hour, thinking over the little adventure through which +he had passed, he, too, dozed off, and finally sank into a deep sleep, +from which he was awakened by the opening of his door. + +"Breakfast in half an hour," said Mr. Brindle, putting his head into the +compartment. "How goes it with you this morning, old boy?" + +"I feel quite myself," said Hal briskly, sitting up in his bunk. Then, +to demonstrate the truth of his words, he stood up. "Yes," he continued, +"I feel ever so much stronger than I did last night. I suppose the +excitement and the shock had unnerved me, but now I am perfectly +steady." + +"That's good, Hal, and I am glad to see you making an effort. After all, +there is no reason why a bullet wound in the shoulder should lay you up. +Last night, as you say, the shock and suddenness of the injury had upset +you, and no doubt you felt the rapid loss of blood. A few hours' sleep +have made that good, so that you will quickly mend. I have no fear of +the wound going wrong, for it was skillfully treated from the first. +Now, let me lend a hand, and help to put your clothes on." + +Half an hour later, with his left arm in a sling, and his empty sleeve +pinned to the coat, arm in arm with Mr. Brindle, Hal entered the +breakfast saloon, where they took their places at one of the many small +tables. Numbers of other passengers were already there, and they looked +at our hero with curiosity and admiration. + +An hour later the engine steamed into a large station, and the +passengers descended from the cars. + +"Just look out for the youngsters, Hal," said Mr. Brindle. "They'll be +coming to meet their dad." + +"Youngsters? Your youngsters?" asked Hal, in surprise; for Mr. Brindle +had never mentioned that he was married and had a family. + +"Why, mine to be sure! There's Dora, the dearest blue-eyed girl that +ever breathed; and Gerald, the biggest and most mischievous monkey that +ever wore clothes. You'll know them at once. Ah, there they are, or I am +mistaken." + +"Hallo! There you are, dad!" cried the boy, a sturdy young fellow of +some sixteen years. "Hi! Come along, Dora! Here he is, looking as fat +and jolly as possible." + +Breathless, and with hat tossed to the back of his head, the lad rushed +at Mr. Brindle and embraced him, a graceful and pretty girl, looking +charming and dainty in a white frock, following suit quickly. + +"There, there, how glad I am to see you both again, my dears!" exclaimed +Mr. Brindle. "Both of you looking as well as ever too. But I am +forgetting my duties. Dora--Gerald--come here and let me introduce you a +very great friend, who is to be my overseer. Steady now, shake hands +gently, for he has been in the wars. Hal, my dear boy, let me present +you to my dear children." + +Each in turn shook Hal heartily by the hand, Dora looking +sympathetically, and, at first, somewhat shyly at him; while Gerald, +boy-like, took good stock of the new overseer, not fearing to look well +into his face. + +"What has happened to your arm, Mr. Marchant? What war have you been in? +And are you very much hurt?" Dora asked these questions in rapid +succession. + +"Dora," said her father, "this young gentleman was shot by a ruffian who +attempted to steal my bag. He has risked his life for me, and he is +helpless. I place him in your charge. You have had some experience of +nursing and will do your best. Now, let us get to the carriage." + +Dora was a young lady about whom there was no nonsense. Here was a +fellow-being who was obviously suffering; somehow he had come by his +injury in protecting her father. That was enough for any daughter. For +his sake she would look after Hal. So she marched our hero from the +platform, chuckling secretly at the blush which had now changed his +cheeks from dullest white to brilliant red. They stepped into the +comfortable carriage, and at a crack of the whip, the team of mules set +forward at a hand-gallop. + +What thoughts were Hal's as he was driven to his new home? It seemed +like a dream, for, a few weeks back, he was an orphan, with few friends. +Then he had decided to start to America, where he would be entirely +unknown. But what had happened? Friends seemed to have risen up on every +side. Yes, it was good fortune. At least, that was what he thought as +his eyes wandered from Mr. Brindle and Gerald to Dora. Never before had +Hal taken notice of any girl. + +And here he found himself unconsciously glancing at Dora, and listening +eagerly to every word she said. It was sense too. Indeed, she discussed +everyday matters with her father in a manner which opened Hal's eyes. + +"She's clever," thought Hal, "and she's a pretty girl. How kind she was +to me!" + +And what of Dora? She, on her part, was taking stock of the overseer. +Beneath her lashes she stole many a glance at him, always to meet his +steady eyes, and turn away in confusion. But still, she was able to come +to a conclusion. She saw a stalwart young man, who had yet an inch or +more to grow. He had an open face, and eyes which never flinched or +turned away. + +"I like the new overseer," she said to herself. "He looks honest, brave, +and kind. But how pale he is!" + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +THE LOSS OF THE "MAINE" + + +Thanks to a healthy constitution, and to the fact that, though painful, +his wound was really a simple one, Hal Marchant was very soon off the +sick-list, and in the stage of convalescence. + +From the railway station at which the train had set them down, he and +Mr. Brindle, together with Dora and Gerald, were driven into the +country, along dusty roads which were fenced in on every side by +luxuriant vegetation of every description and hue. Sometimes a long, +flat, and unsightly marsh came into view, and at the sound of the wheels +thousands of wild-fowl rose, screaming, into the air. But they soon +began to ascend, though at a gentle slope, which the mules galloped up, +still at the same steady pace. + +Up and up the road mounted, curved suddenly to the left, and then +quickly disappeared into a dense jungle of trees and growth, from which +the delicious perfume of orange blossom was wafted. + +"Here we are, and very thankful we ought to be, my lad," said Mr. +Brindle, addressing Hal. "Look over there. Welcome to the 'Barn.' This +is our winter residence, and here I guarantee that you will soon get +back that color which you have lost." + +He pointed with his cane to a fine bungalow which appeared at that +moment at the end of an open glade, nestling beneath a wreath of +foliage. + +It was, indeed, a perfect place for an invalid. Perched high up on +sandy soil, and surrounded by a forest of gorgeous orange trees, the +house peeped over the top of the leaves at a scene beautiful beyond +description. In the veranda, arm in sling, and with legs lazily +stretched along the sides of a big cane chair, Hal could lie the whole +day long, gazing across a sea of green shrubs and leaves--a sea which +rustled musically, and was ever changing from brightest green to +shimmering blue in the rays of the southern sun. And if he but lifted +his eyes an inch or two, a rocky, irregular coast, and an ocean beyond, +looking for all the world like a strip of brightly burnished steel, +filled him with a sort of rapture, so that to lie there was no hardship, +and the hours never dragged, but flew by almost too rapidly for his +liking. + +"You are an exceedingly good patient," said Dora one day, more than two +weeks later, coming on to the veranda and taking a seat which stood +vacant by his side; "but I suppose this obedience will not continue for +long. The doctor who has been attending you says that your wound is +merely a pin-prick--how he can be so very unfeeling I do not know! +Still, he is convinced that it is now so far healed that it requires +very little attention or dressing. That means, I suppose, that you will +throw off my authority, and do your best to get into trouble again at +the very first opportunity. What have you to say to that, sir?" + +"Pin-prick! Quite so, Dora," Hal answered, with a smile. "The wound is, +of course, quite a simple affair, and I am really fit for anything. As +to more trouble, I can only say that, if it comes, I hope you will be +there to nurse me again." + +It was an unusual thing for Hal to indulge in pretty speeches, and it +was as much as he could do to get the words out. His bashfulness made +them stick in his throat, though he meant every syllable. + +"I'm sure you've been awfully good to me, Dora," he said. "How can I +repay you?" + +"Oh, nonsense! Good, indeed! I have only done what any other girl would +gladly have undertaken; and you forget, Hal, that you were wounded in +helping my father. There, we are evens! We owe nothing to each other, +though, if you ever have an opportunity, I am sure you will do your +utmost for us." + +"Hallo! What's this? Pretty speeches, and from my Dora, too! Who would +have thought it!" + +Mr. Brindle stepped on to the veranda just in time to overhear the end +of the conversation between the young people, and burst into a hearty +fit of laughter. + +"There, it is only my chaff," he added with a smile. "A little gratitude +on either side is what one would have expected. But how are you, Hal? +When do you think you could travel?" + +"Now; as soon as you like, Mr. Brindle," exclaimed Hal, springing to his +feet. "Take a look at me. I am as well as ever; and as for the arm, +beyond a little stiffness, which will soon pass away, I have no trouble +with it." + +"Then, we'll clear for the ever-faithful island of Cuba, and for our gay +little hacienda, Eldorado. Hal, you shall see a spot which compares +favorably with this. I built this house in which we are living more than +fifteen years ago, but the hacienda not for some time later. To my eyes +the latter is perfect. It is a gentleman's country residence, and, with +its grounds, is a beautiful oasis in a desert of impenetrable jungle and +burnt-out plantations--not to mention swamps innumerable, for which the +eastern end of the island is notorious. But you shall judge for +yourself. To-morrow we will make our preparations, and on the following +day the steamer will sail with us from Tampa for Havana." + +Accordingly, all at the "Barn" were extremely busy, Hal even taking his +arm from the sling to lend a hand on occasion. By the second morning +their packing was completed, and, leaving the house in possession of a +negro caretaker, the party was driven away in the mule cart to the +harbor at Tampa. Three days later they sighted the coast of Cuba, the +biggest and one of the oldest of Spanish colonies in the West which +remained at that moment in the hands of Spain. + +"It is at once the finest and the most unfortunate island in these +seas," remarked Mr. Brindle to Hal and Gerald, as they gazed towards the +distant shore. "For years--I cannot at the moment recollect how +many--the bulk of the inhabitants have been in rebellion. Fighting has +taken place almost incessantly between the Spanish rulers and the native +population; and things have come to such a pass that ruin stares +everyone in the face. Planters and their laborers have had hard times +indeed, but I trust a brighter future is in store for us. America has +intervened between insurgents and Spaniards, and it seems that her +influence will avert further bloodshed, and peace and prosperity will +then return to this smiling land. I am sure I hope it will be so. +Personally I have not lost, though others have. But it is a long story, +lads, and I will reserve it for another time. Take a look through my +glasses, Hal, and tell me what you see." + +Mr. Brindle suddenly handed his field-glasses to Hal, and pointed +towards the harbor. + +"I see a big passenger boat in there," the latter said, after taking a +long and steady look. "She is lying against the quay, and close beside +her are two ships, which look like men-of-war--one flying Spanish +colors, and the other the Stars and Stripes of America." + +"Good! I thought so," Mr. Brindle exclaimed. "That vessel sailing +beneath the colors of Yankee land is the battleship _Maine_, and she is +here on a special visit, which it is hoped will cement a long friendship +between the two countries. Now, I fancy we had better go below and +prepare for dinner. The gong sounds in half an hour." + +By half-past eight that night, the ever-memorable 15th of February, +1898, the ship upon which Hal and his friends were passengers had +anchored in the harbor of Havana. On the upper deck, beneath the glare +of the electric light, they made a group that was interesting and +pleasing to the eye. + +Stretched in hammock chairs, Mr. Brindle cigar in mouth, and all dressed +in white, relieved in Dora's case by a sash of palest blue, they chatted +in low voices, now and again lapsing into silence and listening to the +sounds that came from other ships across the placid water and from the +dimly lit streets of the town. Some sailor lad aboard the _Maine_ was +delighting his fellows with banjo and song, and our hero and his friends +listened as if enchanted. + +"Ah, honey, my honey"--the words came clear and strong; then they died +down and became merged with the notes of the banjo, only to burst forth +again as the audience took up the chorus, and sent it swelling across +the harbor. + +"How nice it sounds! How peaceful!" exclaimed Mr. Brindle, thoughtfully. +"God grant that this visit from America to a Spanish port may settle +every squabble. I am sure braver and more agreeable fellows could not +have been sent; and if only the Dons are as friendly, all will be well. +Listen! How those lads love that song! They would sing it by the hour if +they were able. But there sounds the bugle, and away they go to their +hammocks. I think, Dora dear, that it is time you and Gerald also went +to your bunks. Remember, we have a long and tiring day before us +to-morrow, and you will be in need of all your energies. Now, off with +you! Hal and I will stay on deck a little longer, as I wish to speak to +him." + +The two young people looked somewhat disappointed, but strict obedience +being amongst their virtues, they said "good-night" and retired. + +"Now for a stroll, Hal," commenced Mr. Brindle. "I have much to say to +you, and you have a great deal before you, for which a little advice +given now will prepare you. Within three days we shall be at Eldorado, +and new duties and new faces will confront you. I want you to have some +knowledge of them beforehand, for it will be better if my overseer can +come to the plantation ready for any emergency. You will thus make a +better start, and will be held in higher estimation by the men. That is +the secret of plantation work. Respect yourself, show that you are +capable, fair, and strong, and the negro hands will be ready to obey you +in every particular." + +Mr. Brindle took Hal by the arm, and walked him up and down beneath the +awning. At length, having communicated to him all the information he +wished, he led the way aft, and the two leaned against the rails at the +stern of the ship. + +Havana, one of the oldest harbors in the West, lay wrapped in the black +mantle of night, dotted here and there by the riding light of some small +fishing schooner, bobbing gently to the swell which ran through the +harbor channel. Closer at hand were other lights, flashing, tier above +tier, from the state cabins of the _City of Washington_--a leviathan +which was filled to overflowing with passengers. She was a contrast to +the _Maine_, aboard which all those who had been so merry and +lighthearted seemed now fast asleep. But for her riding lights, and the +reflection from her gunroom, she was enveloped in darkness, into which a +flicker from her smoke-stacks sometimes flew, to disappear in a moment. +Not a sound came from her deck. All was still, and every soul beneath +her armor-plates, save the few who kept the watch, lay wrapped in +sleep--sleep, alas! to extend forever and ever, to hold them in its cold +embrace till the end of everything. + +What was that? Crash! A second or two's interval, and then a +nerve-shaking boom, an appalling explosion, a rush of flame into the +night, that lights up the surroundings for miles. And then? Ah, Heavens! +shriek upon shriek, the clatter of scattered wreckage and rent iron upon +quay and neighboring ships, and the hissing of flaming woodwork falling +into the sea. A minute before there floated as fine a vessel as ever +sailed from the shores of America, carrying, too, as gallant a crew as +ever shipped under the famous star-spangled banner. Where were they now? + +Clinging to the rail, stunned by the roar of the explosion, and dazed by +the suddenness of it all, Hal and Mr. Brindle looked at a heap of +flaring wreckage, and wondered what had happened. Then the explanation +burst upon them with a shock and a rush which almost unmanned them. + +"She has blown up! The _Maine_ has been smashed to pieces! How +dreadful!" exclaimed Mr. Brindle, in a breath. + +"Yes, something awful has happened," Hal answered. "Quick, sir; there +may be men to be saved. Let us help; everyone will be required, and we +may be of use. Come; I see them manning one of the boats." + +Without waiting for further conversation, he sprang towards the gangway, +followed closely by Mr. Brindle. + +"That's it! More lads for the work. Slip along down that 'ere gangway, +and get fixed up to your places," sang out a quartermaster, who stood on +the deck close to the ladder leading to the boat below. + +As cool as if nothing unusual had happened, he waited a few moments to +collect more men, and then hurried down to the boat in which Hal and Mr. +Brindle had taken their places. + +"Get hold of them there oars," he cried hoarsely. "Some of yer aer new +at the game, but yer can pull for what we want. There, shove her off, my +lad, and out oars all of yer. Bust me! aer some of yer goin' ter take +two weeks about it? Bustle yourselves! Aer yer ready? Then fetch hold of +your time from me. Now--pull--again--once more, my hearties--pull--at +it, lads--we are nearer--good boys--with a will;--pull ho--all +together--ah, steady there all." + +Never could an amateur crew have had a better coxswain. There was no +confusion, and no desperate hurry. Instead, coached by the +quartermaster, they sent the boat flying through the water, and before +they could have expected it, were close beside the _Maine_. + +"She's down by the head," cried Mr. Brindle, who sat next to Hal. "Keep +a look-out for any man in the water." + +"Aye, she's down, and will go more too," the quartermaster shouted. +"She's flaring like a torch, so I reckon we ought ter see any poor +feller who happens ter be about in need of help." + +Indeed, the bows of the _Maine_ were crushed into shapeless wreckage, +which was burning fiercely, the flames lighting up the whole of the +harbor. By this time, too, the death-like silence, which had fallen +immediately after the first cries for help, was broken by a roar of +frightened voices from the town. People rushed from their houses +demanding what had happened. Bells clanged the alarm, and the +fire-brigade turned out, ready for any emergency. And, meanwhile, every +ship in the harbor sent her boats on an errand of mercy, and soon the +sailors, who but a few short minutes before had been sleeping +peacefully, were being lifted from the water. But not all were there to +be helped; numbers of the poor fellows had sunk, others still slept--the +everlasting sleep--beneath the shattered plates of the _Maine_. + +"Look, there is one sailor," cried Mr. Brindle suddenly, pointing to a +figure struggling close beside the _Maine_, and seeming to be almost +enveloped in flame. "Quick, quartermaster; let us row in and rescue +him." + +"No; can't be done. It's hard ter say it, but it can't," was the curt +answer, given with a sad shake of the head. "That 'ere chap don't +scorch, because he's under water. We should, though. We'd be blistered +and dried like so many herrings. It's hard, sir, but it's out o' the +question." + +"Not quite," muttered Hal. "Hold on to my oar, Mr. Brindle. I'm going +for him." + +Next moment there was a splash, and he was overboard, swimming towards +the flaming wreck as strongly as though he had never suffered a wound on +his shoulder. A few lusty strokes took him close to the man, who by this +was spinning round and round in the water, wholly unconscious, and on +the point of sinking. His hand shot in the air, his fingers clutching +desperately, while his eyes seemed on the point of bursting from their +sockets. A sudden flare from the burning woodwork lit up the ghastly +scene, and showed the poor fellow's mouth wide open in the act of giving +vent to a cry for help. But just then the water swirled about him, +overflowing his face, and hiding all but the pair of hands, which still +grasped despairingly at the air. + +"I'll save him whatever happens," said Hal to himself, sinking for a +moment to escape the fierce heat of the flames, which burst forth +furiously from the deck and sides of the unfortunate _Maine_. He swam +beneath the water, and rising a minute later beside the man, grasped him +by the shoulders, and easily turned him upon his back. From that moment +all was plain sailing, for it was not for nothing that Hal had learned +to swim. Floating beside the drowning sailor, he kicked out with his +legs, and towed him towards the boat. Before he thought it possible they +were alongside, and were being hauled on board. + +"Good lad! You're one of the right sort!" sang out the quartermaster. +"There, sit right down and get hold of your wind. Perhaps yer'll be +wanting it again in a minute. Hillo! aint that another poor feller?" + +He shielded his eyes from the glare by placing his hand to his forehead, +and looked towards the _Maine_ once more. A piece of wreckage floated +into the light, and on it was seen another poor sailor, clinging for his +life. + +"Ah, there he aer! Can't yer see him, boys? He's right under the ship, +and she's scorching the life out of him." + +"Yes, he's too close to the fire again; and if we row in there we should +all be shriveled," remarked Hal, very quietly. "Here, I'm for it again, +so keep a look-out for me, quartermaster." + +Once more he slipped overboard, and, pursuing the same tactics, escaped +the heat by diving beneath the water. When he reached the plank upon +which the sailor was lying, it was to find him, like the other, +unconscious, and almost dead from the combined results of heat and +smoke. He did not trouble to take the man from the float, but pushed it +towards the boat, and in due time had the satisfaction of seeing him +lifted from the water with the aid of many willing hands. Then the boat +pulled round the flaming wreck, and, finding no one else in the water, +went beneath the stern, which was free of flames, and made fast to a +rope. + +"Now, right aboard, my hearties!" cried the quartermaster. "If there's +chaps blown into the sea, there's safe ter be a tidy few knocked silly +between the decks, and they'll want helping. Aer there any man aboard +this boat as feels like coming up? It's ticklish business, for this +craft has tons of powder in her magazines, and I reckon the fire'll soon +find it out. Aer anyone following?" + +He sprang at the rope ladder which dangled overboard, and swarmed up it, +followed by everyone who had accompanied him in the boat, save, of +course, those who had been rescued from the sea. + +"What, aer the whole crew of yer coming?" exclaimed the quartermaster. +"George, but yer aer the finest set of pards I ever come across! Every +blessed soul of yer itchin' ter get blow sky-high!" + +He waved to them, motioning to them to scatter in all directions, which +they did at once, diving below, and penetrating as far forward as the +heat would allow. + +"There is danger of the magazines exploding right aft here," Hal heard +someone exclaim in the calmest tones. "Say, men, who is for it? I want +six of the boldest and best." + +The voice, which was that of a young man, came from an officer standing +beside him. At the words a number of dark figures sprang forward from a +group occupied in lowering a boat, and Hal promptly pushed his way in +amongst them. + +"That's the way; and now for the buckets, boys," the officer who had +spoken first exclaimed. "Fill 'em up, and follow down below. Quick's the +word, for there isn't much time to lose." + +Grasping the rope attached to a wooden bucket, one sturdy sailor flung +it overboard, and soon filled a couple of others, which stood at his +feet, while four more were taken to a sea-cock close at hand. Hal +quickly possessed himself of one, and at once hurried below to the +magazine. + +"Hillo! and who's this?" the officer asked, stepping up to him and +lifting a lantern to his face. + +"I'm a volunteer from a ship alongside," Hal answered. + +"And a Britisher?" + +"Yes." + +"Good! Put it right there." The lieutenant shook him heartily by the +hand. + +A moment later the men threw open the magazine, in spite of the terrible +risk they ran, and flung the contents of their buckets upon the +explosives. Then they raced to the deck again for a fresh supply of +water, and did not cease from their arduous labors till all danger of +another explosion was at an end. + +Flinging his bucket away, Hal now made a tour of that part of the ship +which was not in flames. Then, having helped to lift three injured men +into the boat, he descended himself, and at the quartermaster's order +they returned to their own ship. A few minutes later, Captain Sigsbee, +the commander of the _Maine_, stepped sadly from her deck, and was rowed +away, the last living man to leave the terrible scene. + +As for Hal, he slipped into a fresh suit of clothes, and for hours +worked with the other passengers endeavoring to alleviate the sufferings +of the poor fellows brought aboard the ship. Then, tired out with his +labors, for he had taken a prominent and a large share in the work of +rescue, he retired to the upper deck, with Mr. Brindle, Gerald, and +Dora, and flung himself into a chair. But though utterly fatigued, he +was too horrified by the ghastly tragedy he had witnessed, and too +shaken by all that had happened in the past few hours, to be able to get +to sleep. It was out of the question, so that instead of going straight +to his bunk, he felt that he must stay in the open air, where he could +rest, and at the same time talk over the occurrence with his friends. + +"I've a weight here," he cried peevishly, striking himself on the chest. +"The horror of it all distresses me. What a terrible calamity!" + +"Aye, what a misfortune! What an inhuman deed!" replied Mr. Brindle, in +a voice which faltered in spite of himself. "Think of it; try to realize +the cruelty of it all. In the times of peace, in the cause of good-will, +and in the earnest attempt to bring alleviation of suffering to a +long-stricken people, the poor lads of my adopted country are cruelly +blown to pieces, sent into eternity at the very door of those who have +invited them. They came with nothing but friendship in their hearts, +expecting to meet with the same. The shock of the news will be felt from +east to west, and from north to south, and everywhere will be received +at first with incredulity, and later with loathing and scorn, for never +was such a dastardly deed committed." + +"Committed by whom? What do you mean?" asked Hal, in astonishment. "Do +you really think that the explosion was arranged--that it was not a pure +accident?" + +"I do; unhappily, I do," answered Mr. Brindle sternly. "How could it +have been otherwise? It is sad, far too sad for words, and I shall be +mistaken if to-night's work does not prove the cause of a war between +Spain and America." + +"But why war, Mr. Brindle? Had matters come to such a pass that the +destruction of the _Maine_ would set the countries at each other's +throats?" + +"Perhaps not that, Hal, for the aspect of affairs of late was distinctly +brighter. Still, I think I am right in saying that the wrath of the +American people will be so great when the news is known, that serious +trouble will be inevitable. But come, let us to our bunks. To-morrow we +will talk the matter over." + +"To our bunks, dad! I could not possibly sleep!" exclaimed Dora. + +"Nor I," chimed in Gerald. + +"And I must confess that I am too troubled and too disturbed to sleep," +said Mr. Brindle. + +"Then why not fill the time in till morning dawns by telling us about +this affair?" cried Hal. "We are all agreed that we cannot sleep; we +have done our utmost for those who suffered during or after the +explosion, and now we have nothing to do but to lounge here, and fume +and fret till to-morrow. Be kind to us, Mr. Brindle. Stir your memory, +and let us know the ins and outs of the whole story." + +"Well, I will; and if I try your patience, bear with me a little," +replied Mr. Brindle. "The quarrel is not of a day's making, nor does it +turn upon one single point. Cuba is the cause of it all, and as we are +here, perhaps no more fitting spot could be selected for a description +of the rebellion and bloodshed which have caused trouble between Spain +and America." + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +"THE EVER-FAITHFUL ISLAND" + + +Dressed in a clean suit of white, with wide-open waist-coat and expanse +of glossy shirt, the whole set off by a black evening bow, Mr. Brindle +stalked moodily up and down the deck for several minutes, his hands +thrust into his pockets, and his chin resting upon his chest. He was +evidently in deep thought, and Hal, with Dora and Gerald close at hand, +watched him curiously, wondering when he would commence to speak. + +"It is hard to know exactly where to start," he said at last, coming to +a stop in front of them, where he leaned against the ship's rail, and +producing a cigar, bit off the end with a nervous snap. "It is +difficult, I confess, to fulfill my promise. To begin with, I am shaken +by the horrible calamity we have witnessed to-night. My grief is great +and heartfelt for those poor fellows who have been so ruthlessly slain, +and loathing and contempt for the inhuman wretches who perpetrated the +ghastly deed are so much in my thoughts that I find it difficult to fix +my mind upon the subject before us, or grasp its details with sufficient +clearness to narrate them to you in lucid form. + +"Still, a promise is a promise, and I will therefore do my best to tell +you why there is bad blood between Spain and America, and why I fear war +in the immediate future. + +"Just fancy, this, the most beautiful, and once the most prosperous, of +Western isles, is still known in Spain as 'the ever-faithful island of +Cuba'! And yet there is scarcely a single Spaniard who is not conversant +with the true state of affairs, and is not very well aware that Cuba is +in revolt, and has been so for close upon fifty years. Go to the country +of the Dons and question her lower classes--I mean the poor people who +exist by tilling the soil, or earn a livelihood in factories or +workshops. I will answer for it that hundreds, aye, thousands even, +curse this fair isle, curse the government that rules it so evilly, and +the necessity that has called, and still calls, for their sons to go +across the seas and die, in the depths of jungle and morass. + +"Looking back as I do at this moment, I feel that all this suffering, +all this misery and heart-ache, are Spain's just reward. The great man +of Genoa, Christopher Columbus, who explored these Western seas in the +fifteenth century, would have passed by the lovely shores of this +gorgeous island and refused to annex it for his adopted king and queen, +if he had foreseen the future. + +"In those days a race of comely men and women, the Carib Indians, +inhabited the land, and their descendants might be here to-day had not +the lust for gold and riches led Spanish adventurers to disembark in the +hopes of satisfying their greed. As might have been expected, trouble +followed, and the better armed invaders hunted the Indians till they +were exterminated. That unnecessary bloodshed has cost Spain dear. She +occupied the island, and made it the headquarters of the African slave +trade. Little by little other people and races were attracted here, till +at the present moment the population amounts to about a million and a +half. Of these a third are negroes, and the remainder anything you +please to call them. You can pick from amongst the populace distinctive +races, whose color ranges from negro black to almost pure white. Of the +latter there are but few in the island, for even the proud old Castilian +families which came here years ago, and throve and made money by the +sweat of these imported negroes, are now no longer Spanish. Scarcely +one of their descendants but has some trace of African blood. + +"Of white inhabitants there are few, I said, and these are only +temporary residents. They come across the seas to Cuba with one object +in view, namely, to make money and return home at the earliest possible +date. They are mainly the military and officials, and it is from this +greed of theirs, from the careless, thoughtless rule which has allowed +matters to go anyhow, and from the gradual fall from bad to worse, that +the present trouble arises. Greed and the craving to be rich beyond the +dreams of avarice, obtained for Spain this lovely island, to the +misfortune of thousands of harmless Caribs; and the same vice has cost +her dear already in lives and treasure, and will demand much more, even +the loss of the land itself. + +"What can you expect? Put a puppet in command, far from observation, and +over a race which in his pride he deems utterly inferior to himself, and +he becomes a jack in office and an oppressor. I do not say, mind you, +Hal, that all rulers here have been unscrupulous; but many have, while +others who have been honest in their dealings have failed to bring +content to the people through sheer incompetence. You cannot +satisfactorily rule a conquered people unless you study their +prejudices. Give them some liberty, respect their customs if possible, +and their religion, if not harmful and barbarous, and you will make them +willing and contented subjects. + +"But you have the facts; the Cubans have been misgoverned. They have +been fleeced and ground down by their rulers, both civil and military, +and, as a natural consequence, they have become rebellious. + +"That was the position in 1850, when, following the example set by +Mexico, Chili, and Peru, and other western colonies of Spain which had +successfully revolted, the colored inhabitants of the island raised the +standard of revolution. They attacked their white masters, and galled +them by sudden and ugly rushes. When fighting in the forests and swamps +which are to be found everywhere, they poured a scathing fire into bands +of soldiers brought against them, and disappeared like ghosts, only to +return and harass the foe at the next opportune moment. + +"How long this particular revolt lasted it would be difficult to say, +but no doubt it dragged on for many months, subsiding here only to burst +forth elsewhere with redoubled fury. But end it did at length, and the +island enjoyed peace for a time. + +"Then once more the natives took up arms, and, while Spain strove to put +down a rebellion at home, had things much their own way, for the mother +country had her hands full. For ten long weary years that rebellion +lasted, and many a conscript from the fair land stretching from Pyrenees +to Mediterranean bit the dust in this far-away Spanish possession. + +"It is, perhaps, a coincidence that America in those days came into +conflict with Spain, so that war very nearly resulted, the cause of +quarrel being then, as now, aggravated and brought to a climax by an act +of peculiar cruelty. For in those days the condition of the poor natives +aroused the sympathy of Americans, many of whom, moreover, had already +settled in the island. Their pity took the form of substantial help, for +they dispatched various filibustering expeditions to Cuba, and thus +supplied the natives with arms and ammunition. Unhappily, a certain ship +known as the _Virginius_ was discovered attempting to land her cargo, +and failed to make good her escape. Capture was inevitable, but before +being taken by the Spanish gunboat, the Americans on board managed to +get rid of all their warlike stores. It made no difference, however, for +once landed at Santiago, little time was given for friends to intervene. +All were condemned to death; and as a preliminary, a number of Cubans +who formed part of the expedition were shot, their heads being severed +from their bodies by the mob, and paraded round the town. Fourteen were +executed on the following day, and others on the next, including the +commander of the expedition and other Americans. Then the butchery was +put a stop to by telegraphic orders. + +"But the mischief was done, and I ask you to think how you would have +felt had such a deed been perpetrated nowadays. I can assure you that +America cried loudly for retaliation, and war was only narrowly averted. + +"For ten years the insurrection flourished, subsiding in the winter to a +mere nothing, for then the Spanish troops were able to take active +measures to suppress it. In the summer, however, from May onwards, when +the rainy season commences, the insurgents had the best of the fighting. +Themselves immune from fever, and acclimatized, they could live and +fight in the 'manigua,' as the bush and swamp in the interior are named, +while the Spaniards were helpless. Drenched by constant tropical +downpours, and plodding along a narrow, irregular track which was thick +with mud, they were fired upon by unseen foes from the trees and jungle +on either hand. What use to charge into the thickness of the vegetation? +It was sheer suicide, for they were at once separated and split into +small parties upon which the Cubans fell with unspeakable fury, armed +always with a deadly chopping weapon, the 'machete.' + +"Cold steel did the grewsome work silently and mercilessly, sending many +a poor lad of Castile to his end. + +"Imagine the conditions for a moment, Hal, and you too, Gerald and Dora. +You all know what a thick forest is like, for the 'Barn' in Florida is +built in the midst of the jungle. Think what it must be to be weary with +trudging along a path thick with mud; to be footsore, drenched to the +skin, and hungry; and then to be wounded by some unseen hand. No wonder +that the Spanish troops died in their hundreds, poor lads! Scarcely able +to crawl themselves, was it wonderful that the transport of food and +ammunition was difficult? It was impossible, and I can tell you that, +though the cruel machete accounted for many, exposure, want, and disease +killed thousands more. + +"It was a wearisome rebellion, and it, too, died a natural death in +1878. + +"And now to bring you and my tale to more modern times. Following peace +came renewed prosperity, and with it myself, for it was then that I +purchased a plantation. As I became acquainted with the ins and outs of +the island life, I learned that the appearance of tranquillity was false +after all. Discontent was manifest everywhere, and matters were +beginning to wear an ugly look. Factions were openly at work stirring up +the people; and of these, one clamored for a system of home government +under Spanish guidance, while the other would have none of it, and +openly advocated a free Cuba--Cuba for its native people, exempt from +all interference. + +"I need not tell you that the haughty, careless officials who had come +from the home country formed another party, which sneered at all things +native, and, mindful of the fat purses to be made from their several +appointments, cried loudly for military rule, less consideration and +less conciliation, and, as a change, a tighter grip of the hand which +had already cost Spain so dear. + +"It is wasting breath to recount what happened. Of course, discontent +grew to active rebellion, till the island was once more swept by fire +and sword. To describe every detail of this new insurrection would be +wearisome, for it has dragged on ever since, and not once has there been +anything in the way of a battle. Minor skirmishes have been the order +of the day; in fact, it has simply been guerrilla warfare. + +"On the Spanish side the main scheme has been to divide the island into +three parts, and so separate the rebels. For this purpose two continuous +lines of forts, called 'trochas,' have been constructed. They stretch +from north to south, cutting Cuba into three long strips. You will see +one as we drive from Santiago to our destination, but I may tell you +that they are of enormous strength, that a double fence of barbed wire +protects a road cut through the jungle, and that along the latter +innumerable forts have been erected, while a railway stretches from end +to end. + +"But these trochas have proved almost useless. The enormous force at the +disposal of the general is swamped in garrisoning them, while the +mortality is very high. And the insurgents are more active than ever. +Trains are blown up with dynamite, the trochas cut, and the men in the +forts forever harassed. + +"And now I come to the stage in the rebellion which is the real cause of +trouble with America. Determined to conquer, the insurgents have adopted +the custom of burning the villages, so as to force those who were +wavering, or who were faint-hearted, to throw in their lot with them. In +addition, they have taken to destroying plantations, thus depriving the +working classes of the means of livelihood. This naturally led to much +misery and hardship, but the condition was as nothing when compared with +that produced by the Spanish general, Weyler, who now came on the scene. +Finding that the peaceful laborer of to-day was the insurgent of +yesterday, he ordered all living in the country to come into the towns, +a concentration order excellent in its intentions, but heartlessly +carried out. Thousands were congregated together and starved--literally +and actually starved. There was no method in feeding them and looking +to their well-being. The Spanish authorities had made utterly inadequate +provision for them, and as a consequence they sickened and died in their +thousands. + +"And there you have the cause of trouble between Spain and America. My +adopted brethren have warm hearts beneath a calm exterior, and their +sympathy for the poor Cubans is deep. They resent this perpetual +bloodshed occurring so close to their coast as a slur upon their +humanity; and they demand, for the sake of all, that it be put a stop +to. Correspondence has passed between the governments, and seeing that +America means business, Spain has promised to amend, and do her utmost +to end the sad condition of affairs. As an assurance of the truth of her +words and the honesty of her intentions, she has dispatched a warship to +New York, and the unfortunate _Maine_ was here on a similar friendly +errand. + +"And she was blown up by a mine. There were two definite and distinct +explosions: the first produced beneath the keel of the ship, and the +second in her forward magazine. That is my opinion, and others share it. +I am sorry even to think it possible, and I say now, that it is my firm +belief that Spaniards in general are too honorable, too chivalrous to +attempt such a dastardly deed. But there are black sheep in every flock, +and some inhuman scoundrel has this night sent numbers of his fellow-men +to an untimely end, and at the same time has, in all probability, +plunged two countries into war, the ultimate consequences of which one +cannot even dream of." + +"But why should you think so, Mr. Brindle?" Hal asked eagerly. "I know +that the blowing up of a steamer is an unusual occurrence, but still it +has happened before to-night, and why not again? Accidents come when +least expected." + +"True, Hal; but in the chapter of mishaps likely to befall a +war-vessel, explosion of the magazine is almost unknown, save in +battle-time. What are the conditions now? We are at peace, and I who +know the spirit of discipline in the American Navy can tell you that the +same careful look-out and the same precautions are taken in everyday +life as during a war scare. It is a strict rule of the service that the +officer on watch shall inspect the ship at a certain hour at night, and +report all lights dowsed, and magazines in a safe condition. It was done +this very night, you may be sure; and see what follows! The men we have +rescued say that they were awakened by a violent shock, and that a +second and more powerful one threw them from their hammocks. We, too, +noticed the same, and I can swear to it that the first sent a column of +water into the air, while the second shattered the forward portion of +the _Maine_ to fragments. + +"I fear it must be the case," said Hal, after a few thoughtful minutes; +"and I suppose that the next item of news will be that war is declared." + +"Yes, almost without doubt; and it should be so, then all my plans will +be altered. I must get through to Eldorado, to see that the plantation +and hacienda are safe, and then I shall probably send Dora and Gerald +back to Tampa. No, don't try to dissuade me," he cried, lifting a +warning finger as they both began to expostulate. "I shall take time to +come to a decision, and it must be considered as final. + +"And now let me tell you of another matter which concerns you, Hal, more +than the others. You bear the mark of a bullet on your shoulder, and +shall learn what I have hitherto kept from you. The scoundrel whom you +heard addressed as Señor Capitan is no less a person than Captain José +d'Arousta, a gentleman of very evil reputation. I may inform you that he +came to the island many years ago--quite twenty, I should imagine--when +only a lad; that his father had a position under the government; and +that the man of whom we are speaking first disgraced him by his riotous +living, and then broke his heart by marrying a half-breed girl. Poor +thing! she was too good by far for such a reckless fellow. She owned a +plantation, and I need scarcely tell you that he quickly ran through her +ready money, and then all that could be possibly raised upon the estate. +What happened to her later I do not know, but he became captain of an +irregular Spanish band near Santiago, and rumor reports that his +cruelties made him hated by insurgents and friends alike. I know that he +burnt down plantations wholesale, and that if one wished to escape, it +was necessary to bribe him with large sums of money. I paid heavily at +first for my immunity, and then, tired of his constant threats, I one +day horsewhipped him before all the hands, and afterwards defied him; +but I was careful at once to organize a band of armed men, to keep a +watch over the plantation and house. + +"Money seems to José d'Arousta a dire necessity, for that is the class +of man he is. He even thought it worth his while to come to Tampa, +knowing well that he would not easily relieve me of my valuables in the +island. You foiled him, and I warn you solemnly, Hal, beware of the +fellow. He possesses that love of vengeance and ferocity common to his +race, and he will surely repay you when he has an opportunity. Therefore +take care, and as the times are unsettled I advise you to arm yourself +at once with a revolver. Carry it in a hip pocket, and use it if your +life is threatened." + +"I will," Hal answered quietly. "I am not afraid of the fellow, but he +looked a nasty customer, and it is always best to be on the safe side. +If he happens to knock up against me, he will be less inclined to +quarrel when he sees that I am armed." + +"Quite so, and I am glad you fall in with my views," said Mr. Brindle. +"Gerald, too, while at the hacienda, had better carry a weapon, while I +am sure that the three of us will be easily able to defend Dora from all +harm." + +"That we will!" Hal blurted out enthusiastically; and then, seeing Mr. +Brindle smother a knowing smile, he became suddenly silent. + +But Dora heard, and presently, when her father's head was turned, she +flashed our hero a grateful glance from her eyes, which seemed to say, +"Yes, I am sure you would do all that was possible"; a message which Hal +must have appreciated, for he tingled strangely from head to foot. + +"By George!" he murmured, as he lay back in his chair and conjured up +the dark, forbidding features of José d'Arousta, "I would smash the +beggar into little pieces if he even attempted to harm one of my +friends." Then his lips tightened, and his fingers gripped the arm of +the chair. + +"Thinking of our acquaintance, the railway thief, I'll be bound," said +Mr. Brindle suddenly, looking critically at Hal. "All the better, my +boy. Take my warning to heart, and beware of the Spaniard as you would +of the plague. He is a rogue, and is not to be trusted. If you should +chance to meet him, and see him put his hand in his pocket, cover him +with your revolver. And if Pedro, his accomplice, is with him, be doubly +cautious; for here, in Cuba, they are capable of any atrocity, knowing +well that, owing to the unsettled condition of the island, they can defy +the law. Indeed, I more than suspect that they are the head of a gang of +desperadoes who rob both insurgents and Spaniards, and care for one side +as little as they do for the other. But, dear me! this has been a very +long yarn, and I am tired. What do you all say to a short rest in our +bunks? Dawn will break in a couple of hours." + +He yawned loudly and rubbed his eyes, as if to drive the sleep out of +them. + +"Come," he continued, "we have done all that is possible for these poor +fellows from the man-o'-war. Let us sleep and prepare for to-morrow." + +Hal, Dora, and Gerald also were feeling tired and sleepy; therefore, +rising from their seats, they took another look at the wrecked and +half-submerged _Maine_, which was now burned at the for'ard part to the +water's edge, while sheets of flame still belched upwards from the +after-decks, and sent columns of dark smoke into the air. Then, with a +sigh for the poor lads who had met their fate that night, they shook +hands silently and descended to their cabins, where all four were soon +wrapped in sleep. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +A SUDDEN ATTACK + + +When Hal and his friends appeared on deck on the morning following the +disaster to the _Maine_, the city of Havana was in mourning. Shops, +exchanges, and public offices were closed, while flags hung half-mast +from the poles on all big buildings, and from the tops of the shipping +in the harbor. Projecting from the water a hundred yards away was the +half-submerged wreck, now blackened and unsightly, and covered with a +pall of dense smoke. + +Ashore the hospitals were crowded to overflowing, and surgeons were +still busily at work, amputating mangled limbs, and doing their utmost +for the sufferers; for more than half the ship's company had been either +killed or sadly injured. Even then the news had reached America, and +peaceful cities, opening their morning papers, read with a shock of the +terrible calamity. Away in the country districts, farmers and cowboys +learned the tidings some hours later. It was flashed east and west +across the wires. The dire event was discussed in every drawing room, in +hotels, restaurants, and cars. Men whispered the news to comrades as +they descended in the cages to the deep levels of coal-mines, while +others shouted it from the foot-plates of outgoing trains, as they +steamed through the stations. And everywhere there was but one thought. +Punishment must be meted out to the nation which had caused the +disaster. Oh, yes, it was a crime. Not a man but knew it, though the +bare facts had hardly reached him. There had been foul play, and the +villains who had been guilty of it must pay. + +On the part of the government, arrangements were at once made for a +Board of Inquiry to sit at Havana, and for the wreck to be examined by +divers. The report, which could not possibly be issued for many a day to +come, was awaited with feverish impatience, many of the hotter-blooded +people of the States demanding instant war with Spain, and an +examination and explanation afterwards. + +In Havana, nothing could have been more marked than the sorrow of the +Spanish. They grieved for the unfortunate seamen, but there was no +treachery, they vowed; and those who saw them on that day were confident +that if the explosion had been previously arranged, it was by some +miscreant who acted for himself, and against the wishes of the people. + +And in this position the two nations must be left while we follow our +friends to the hacienda. + +"The train departs at midday," said Mr. Brindle, when they were +collected at breakfast. "We will disembark in an hour's time, and make a +few purchases in the town. Then we will get on board the cars, and, with +luck, shall be at the hacienda in three days' time." + +Accordingly, they packed their baggage and embarked in the boat which +Hal and Mr. Brindle had helped to man on the previous night. By noon +they were comfortably in the train, the intervening hours having been +employed in buying provisions, and in obtaining revolvers and ammunition +for the three men of the party. + +"We shall want them more than ever now," said Mr. Brindle, slipping his +weapon into a hip pocket which had been specially contrived for the +purpose. "As soon as we reach Eldorado, I will get one of the negro +women to make similar receptacles for you two lads, for it is as well +to keep these toys out of sight till the critical moment arrives." + +Three days later they descended from the cars at a wayside station some +miles from Santiago, and in a beautiful part of the island. Mounting +mules, they left their baggage in charge of two of the plantation hands, +and before long reached the hacienda, of which Mr. Brindle had not +boasted when he declared that it was the most lovely in all Cuba. And +now Hal's duties commenced in earnest. + +"You are to be my right-hand man, remember that," exclaimed his kindly +employer a day or so later. "You will live with us, of course, and will +be considered as one of the family. Early in the morning I ride round +the place, which is some miles in extent; and I shall expect you to +accompany me. Then, during the day, you will be about the place, and +will look in here and there. The cane is now ripe for cutting, and we +shall have our hands full with it in a matter of two weeks. Then the +tobacco crop is unusually promising, and we shall have to harvest it +immediately after the cane. Now, as to workmen. The majority of my hands +are negroes, whom I imported from the estate in Florida. They are +reliable, honest men, who look to me as to a father. I treat them well, +and they reward me by being obedient and working hard. They are +re-enforced by a few local natives; but I have purposely employed very +few of the latter, for they are discontented, idle fellows, and since +the insurrection started, there is never any knowing when they may be +off with their brethren. Ah, here is Black Peter, my foreman, a faithful +fellow, who has spent many years in my service. Pete, this is my +overseer, and from to-day you will treat him as myself, and will take +your orders from him." + +The negro thus introduced was a white-haired man of over fifty. He +looked Hal critically up and down, and then doffed his ragged cap. + +"Sar, you my master from right away," he said simply. "What you say I +do, and de oders follow Pete." + +"That's good," Hal replied, smiling and stretching out his hand, an +offer which the negro at once responded to by shaking it heartily. + +"Now that you know each other, we will make a round," exclaimed Mr. +Brindle. "How has everything gone on in my absence, Pete?" + +"Velly fine, massa. Crops him big and plenty, and boys working, oh, so +hard! Dey say de weather fine, so do all we can. Come winter and de rain +and we take him easy, and sleep and smoke till de heart am full." + +"That's your way, is it?" answered Mr. Brindle, with a laugh. "Well, +work now is the motto, for when the winter comes there is little to be +done. One thing, though, tell all the men to keep their eyes open. +You'll remember the Spaniard? He may come our way again, and if he does, +it would be bad for us. Do you follow me, Pete?" + +The negro nodded his head vigorously, and went off promising to warn the +other hands. Mr. Brindle then took his overseer on a tour of the +plantations, returning by way of the machinery sheds, which occupied a +central position, and which were to be Hal's special care. + +Each one of the laborers as they came up to him dropped the implement he +was using, and, unslinging a rifle carried across his back, raised it to +his shoulder in salute. + +"That is a sign of the times," said Mr. Brindle. "I have been so often +threatened, particularly by that amiable fellow José d'Arousta, that I +have found it advisable to arm my negroes. They are all drilled and +instructed in the use of their weapons, and I fancy would fight +staunchly if it came to a struggle. Fortunately, however, we have been +left severely alone, though we must never relax our vigilance, +particularly now that war is imminent. But come along and see the sheds +in which we dry the tobacco leaf. If all goes well I shall make a +fortune this summer, for the ground has been fertile, and the crops are +of excellent quality." + +As the days passed, Hal found little cause to grumble at the position he +had taken. In the house he was at once at home, and, indeed, was just +like one of the family. In the plantations he found that the negroes +respected him, and did what he told them willingly. Over the mulattoes, +too, he seemed to have perfect command, and seldom had cause to find +fault with them. Once, however, he discovered a burly, impudent fellow +ill-treating a mule, and promptly dismissed him, Mr. Brindle heartily +approving of the course he had taken. The man left uttering threats, +saying that before long he would return with some of his comrades, and +burn the hacienda down. + +Meanwhile, little of the squabble between America and Spain was heard +of. + +Two months later, as Hal and Gerald were returning from a distant part +of the plantation, they were startled by a figure suddenly emerging on +to the track in front of them. The man darted from the trees which grew +thickly on either side, and waved his arms wildly. It was evening, and +the darkness was so great beneath the leaves that it was not easy to see +him; but Gerald called Hal's attention to him. + +"Hist, massa! Am dat Massa Hal?" a voice called softly through the +darkness. + +"Yes. What is it? What is the matter?" Hal asked eagerly. + +"Gently, boss; not speak so high. Me take Johnson, and come along to +tell you dat massa and de missie am troubled." + +"Mr. Brindle and Dora? Impossible!" exclaimed Hal. "Why, you must be +dreaming, for we left them in the hacienda having tea not two hours +ago." + +"Yes, sar, and bad men watch de boss and young massa ride away. Den, as +Jake work in field, he see first one and den twenty men ride across to +house. He see Black Pete run to call de boys, and hear de rifle go +crack, crack, crack! Pete, him lie over dere so quiet on his face, and +two ob de boys wid him. Oders make run into trees and hide, so not get +hit wid bullet." + +"Yes; and then, what occurred?" asked Hal eagerly, springing at the same +moment from his saddle. "What did these ruffians do next? Quick! The +safety of the boss and his daughter depend upon my hearing at once." + +"Dey laugh at Black Pete as he lie dere," continued the negro. "Den dey +fire again into de trees, and ride on to de house. Jake him lie in bush +and t'ink. Him say to himselb, 'De bad men am come to take all. Dey not +find de young boss, and dey wait to shoot him when him come along. Me +stop dat. Me go along right now and find de massa Hal, and tell him. +Den, p'raps, all come right.' Me run dis way, and when me see you and de +young massa riding along, me hop on to de path, and shout and wave de +arm. Oh, sar, get back quick and kill dem all! Jake willing to help and +do what him can." + +The good fellow lifted his hands as if beseeching, and looked +appealingly into Hal's face. + +"You have done very well, Jake, and I shall remember," said Hal. "These +men have evidently been here some time, and the trees on the plantation +must have prevented us from hearing the firing. But, in any case, I +don't suppose these ruffians, whoever they are, would care much who +heard, for we are right away from civilized parts, and have no +neighbors, while they are in force, and have driven the hands away. No +doubt they feel perfectly secure, for the hacienda is so far from +Santiago that they would have done all they wished and cleared away +before we could get help. No; we can expect no one to intervene, and +must act for ourselves." + +"But how? What can we do?" asked Gerald in dismay. + +"Do? That is a difficult question to answer on the spur of the moment, +old boy. But this is certain, we must make a move, and that at once, for +these fellows have already shown that they mean to stop at nothing. They +have fired at, and apparently killed, some of the hands. There is no +saying to what extent they might carry their bullying. We must stir up +the men, and turn them out as soon as possible. Let me think a moment. +Yes; there are thirty armed negroes. Some of them have probably never +seen the gang who fired at their friends, for they will have been on the +other side of the plantation, at work in the fields. But you may be sure +that they will now be on the _qui vive_; for though we failed to hear +the shots, the hands are too old, and have had too good a training to +make any mistake. Their hearing is far more acute than ours, and +everyone knows what wonders they are at tracking, and at following a +trail in the dark. Of the thirty, three are killed or wounded. That +leaves twenty-seven, and with such a number we ought to be able to +accomplish something. Listen, Jake. Run off as fast as you can, and tell +the boys to collect at the crushing shed. How long will it take you to +find all of them?" + +"P'raps quarter hour, p'raps longer, sar," the negro answered quickly. +"But Jake him know a little ting. Him make sounds dat all de boys know. +Dey hear and follow wid de same, so's oder boys know. Me be in hurry, +boss. You see how quick me hab dem all, ebery one." + +He turned, and, without another word, dived into the forest, leaving Hal +and Gerald listening to the crash of the underwood as he forced his way +through. + +"Of course, it is absolutely impossible to know what has happened, and +equally difficult to determine what to do," said Hal thoughtfully. "But +I think our best plan will be to creep towards the house, and see what +these men are doing. Then we may learn how matters stand, and can +arrange our plans accordingly. If they know the plantation, and all +about it, they will certainly be on the look-out for us on our return. I +fancy if we went forward without taking the precaution to remain silent +and in hiding, we should be greeted with a bullet, for they evidently +care little what murder they do. Walk softly, old fellow, and keep a +careful watch ahead, and your ears wide open. I am not anxious to get +shot again; and besides, I want to turn the tables on these marauding +rascals, and teach them a lesson which they will not be likely to forget +in a hurry." + +He looked calmly at Gerald, and then, motioning him to follow, led the +way along the track. Soon he came to a path which was almost invisible, +for it was so little used that the jungle which grew closely around the +hacienda had obliterated it, just as it would have overrun the tobacco +fields and the clearings meant for the cultivation of cane, if constant +and arduous labor with the machete did not keep it down and within +strict bounds. But Hal knew the path, for he was now well acquainted +with the ins and outs of the whole plantation. Pressing forward, and +closely followed by Gerald and by the two mules, he pushed the creepers +and vegetation to one side, and rapidly approached the neighborhood of +the hacienda. Soon the trees opened, and judging that he was near the +central clearing which surrounded Eldorado, he came to a halt, and +turned to his young friend. + +"You stay here and look after the mules, Gerald," he said, in a voice +that showed no trace of excitement. "I'll do a little prospecting. +Remember that your father's safety depends as much on your caution as +on anything I may do." + +"Right; you can trust me, old boy," answered Gerald, taking the reins +and seating himself at the feet of the mules. "I'll stay here as quiet +as a mouse, and will keep the animals beside me. They will be too busy +eating these green leaves to care to proclaim their presence by +whinnying to their friends." + +"Then I'll get off," and suiting the action to the word, Hal started +once more along the path. A hundred yards farther on it suddenly emerged +into the clearing, close beside a large outhouse used as a stable for +the many mules kept to work on the plantation. As Hal approached this +building, he heard voices, and at once turned into the forest, and crept +forward amongst the trees till he was close enough to hear all that was +said. Thirty mules were tethered in the shed, and some men were feeding +them. All were natives of the island save two, who seemed to be in +charge. They chatted volubly with one another, and seemed to be highly +pleased. But, though Hal strained his ears, he could make nothing of the +conversation, for the men were speaking in Spanish. Lying close to the +edge of the forest, he watched them for ten minutes or more, wondering +what to do. To attempt to reach the hacienda would have been foolhardy +and quite impossible, for it was sixty yards away, and several armed men +were marching up and down in the clearing, evidently having been told +off as a guard. + +"I shall have to wait till it is dark, that is all," he murmured. "To +try to get over to the hacienda just now would be simply to give myself +into the hands of these ruffians, and throw all chances of rescue away. +Of course, if we can get hold of the hands, we could shoot every one of +these fellows down, just like so many birds. But would that do any good +to our friends--to--er--Dora? I wonder who they are? The fact that +there are Spaniards with the gang makes it look as though they were not +insurgents. And yet there are natives too. Perhaps they are servants; +and I shall be greatly surprised if our old enemy, José d'Arousta, and +his rascally accomplice, Pedro, do not turn out to be the ringleaders. I +know that this is the kind of band they have been working with. +Irregulars they are called. Scoundrels every one of them, I should say. +Hallo! Who are these?" + +At this moment two men, whip in hand, and with rifles slung across their +shoulders, descended the stone steps from the balcony of the hacienda, +and sauntered across the clearing. They stopped in front of the first of +the Spanish sentries, and questioned him closely, allowing Hal at the +same moment a clear view of their faces, for they stood in the glare of +a fire of logs which burnt close at hand. + +One was the rascally captain of irregulars who had made good his escape +when attempting to steal the bag on board the train in Florida. Beside +him, as might have been guessed, was Pedro, smoking the inevitable +cigarette. Even then, as he conversed with the sentry, he was in the act +of rolling another, his nimble fingers twisting the paper with a +dexterity which showed how accustomed they were to the work. As Hal +looked, the two men laughed loudly, as if enjoying an excellent joke, +and walked towards the shed. + +"As I thought," exclaimed Hal, in a low voice. "It is those two +ruffians, and, I suppose plunder and revenge have brought them here. +What are they saying, I wonder?" + +José d'Arousta, now without a beard, and looking handsome and debonair +in a planter's suit and high riding-boots, conversed volubly with Pedro, +and was undoubtedly in the best of spirits. Then he turned and addressed +the natives, giving them some orders in a sharp voice. + +"It is just as well to let them know who is their master," he said, +suddenly using English. "In these times, when Spain seems to have more +and more trouble heaped upon her shoulders, these dogs get uppish and +want careful handling. No doubt they wonder what we are doing here. Of +course, they know that it is one of our usual expeditions; but do they +suspect anything more? Up to this they have been only lukewarm adherents +of their brethren in the island, and have not objected to a little +burning here and there, for they are making money out of it. But if they +were to suspect that you and I have our own private objects in view +there would be trouble. Remember, Pedro, we are Spanish irregulars. Now, +about this dog of an Englishman. What has been done to capture him?" + +"If he escapes us he will be clever," answered his companion. "We know +that he and the boy will return by a certain path. Thirty paces from the +clearing two of our men are posted. They are natives, and are armed with +the machete. The boy will be taken to the hacienda, and the other will +stay. Yes, Señor Capitan, your orders will be followed in that respect," +he added significantly. "That foolish young man who upset our well-laid +plans in Florida will disappear, for these black fellows are masters of +the art." + +"And what if the mice refuse to walk into your trap?" asked the other. +"How do you know that they have not already taken the alarm, and made +the best of their way to Santiago?" + +"The better for one if they have, Señor Capitan; but it will not be the +case. The young English fool will not desert his friends. See how he +supported them in Florida, when he might easily have lain in his bunk +and feigned sleep. But he must needs spring up, and come to the rescue, +only to receive a bullet. He will act in the same manner this time, and +he will suffer death. Madmen must be treated as madmen when they become +dangerous to one's safety. But we shall soon know. We will give them a +little time longer, and then, if the boy is not brought to the hacienda, +I myself will go down this small pathway till it cuts into the larger +one. There I will stay, and hide amongst the bushes. If in an hour I do +not come to tell you that I have seen them, you may be sure that they +have ridden for the town. That would be unfortunate, for we have a score +to pay to the Englishman, and it would mean more trouble on another +occasion. But, should they have escaped us, we need not fear surprise, +for Santiago is far away, and it will be to-morrow morning before they +could return with help." + +"Not even then," said José d'Arousta, with a sneer. "To whom are they to +apply for help? No one would listen to the beggarly Englishman, for are +not they the same as Americans? At any rate, their sympathies are with +these enemies of Spain. We will rest here, take all the money we can lay +our hands on, and then return leisurely, conscious that we have done a +piece of excellent work. If there should be trouble, we have hosts of +friends to prove that we were in Santiago when the attack was made upon +the hacienda. You may be sure that the matter would be dropped at once, +for the commandant in Santiago has sufficient on his hands already +without caring to be troubled about such a trumpery affair. Yes; I have +no fears. We will take our ease, and depart with all the gold we can +find." + +"Leaving the hacienda in flames, señor?" the half-caste asked eagerly. + +"No, certainly not. There you show yourself sadly wanting in thought, +Pedro," José d'Arousta replied, with a grim smile. "Our friends defied +us once before; they escaped us in Florida, and now we have them in our +toils. But, remember, the crops are just gathered and stored, and very +shortly money will be received in exchange. We will leave the hacienda +for another time, Pedro. Do you follow me? We will take the very last +dollar now by force, returning on a later occasion for a second haul. If +we are not satisfied then, it will be easy to set a torch to the +hacienda, which is the pride of Señor Brindle's heart." + +"Ha, ha, ha! That is good, Señor Capitan. It is fine!" Pedro answered, +with a snigger. "Of course, we will leave him for another day's sport." + +They walked away towards the hacienda, leaving Hal boiling with wrath +and indignation. + +"Rob him now and come again, will they!" he muttered angrily. "We will +see about that. The Brindles have been more than good to me, and I will +do my utmost for them in return. At any rate, I will put a spoke in José +d'Arousta's wheel this time. Now, how is it to be done? I'll slip back +and talk it over with Gerald, for he is sharp, and may very well be able +to help." + +He crept into the darkness of the forest, and, emerging at length upon +the path again, he crawled away from the clearing as rapidly as +possible. + +"Hallo! Is that you?" exclaimed Gerald, starting to his feet as Hal +suddenly rose by his side, having given absolutely no evidence of his +approach. "Bother you, old man, you made my heart jump into my mouth. +'Pon my word, you are a regular Red Indian, and I am sure that one of +our hands could not have done better. But what have you learned?" + +"A good deal, Gerald. Take a seat there on the ground and listen." + +Hal seated himself beside his young companion, and rapidly told him all +that had passed between José and Pedro. + +"There, you know all," he said at last. "Just stir your brains and tell +me what we are to do. We have a number of reckless men to deal with; +that you can plainly perceive, for they do not hesitate to arrange for +my murder. On our side we can count on twenty-seven negroes, who are +faithful, and who will fight if well led, but who, negro-like, may run +away if someone does not show them an example." + +"Then why not surround the hacienda and open fire?" said Gerald, +eagerly. + +"And lose control of our men at once. No; that would not do," Hal +answered quietly. "Besides, what would those villains do in such +circumstances? I tell you, Gerald, they are brutal enough to kill their +captives. Now, look here; our men will fight, if collected together so +as to feel one another's support. I have a little plan to propose which +I think will settle matters satisfactorily. We are in the minority, and +our men are on foot. If we push this gang of ruffians they will fight +hard, and we shall not gain our end, which is the rescue of your father +and Dora, and of the money in the hacienda. I suggest that we make it +impossible for them to take their mules. That will be a simple matter, +for we have only to post the negroes beside the shed. Then we will cover +the guards who are on watch in the clearing, and will order them to +decamp. After that we will deal with the ringleader. Now, old boy, will +you command the firing party?" + +"Rather! Of course! But what about you, Hal? What will you be doing?" +asked his companion. + +"I am going to set the ball rolling, if possible," answered Hal calmly. +"José d'Arousta's head man is bent upon searching for me. We will +capture the gentleman, and make so free as to undress him. Then I will +take his place, and while he fumes and rages, will march as bold as +brass into the hacienda." + +"What? You are joking, Hal!" exclaimed Gerald, aghast at the boldness of +the idea. "You would be shot for a certainty. You cannot mean it." + +"Oh, yes, I do," Hal replied quietly. "And I can assure you that the +risk is far more imaginary than real. Think it over. It is getting dusk +already, and, dressed exactly like Pedro, I walk into the hacienda. The +other ruffian will almost certainly be alone, and I shall have the +advantage of him, for I shall take him by surprise. Do you mean to tell +me that I shall not be a match for such a man?" + +Hal's eyes glinted strangely in the gloom, and, glancing at him, Gerald +was surprised to find that his usually smiling face had assumed a most +severe and determined look. + +"By Jove, you will, of course," he blurted out, extending his hand to +grasp Hal's and shake it. "A match for the fellow! Of course you will +be! But it's risky--awfully risky, and I don't like the thought of your +going alone." + +"And I don't care to think what may be happening meanwhile," said Hal +earnestly. "That brute will be insulting and ill-treating everyone. +Bully is written on his face as well as thief. Do you care to think that +Dora may be insulted by such a man?" Hal jumped to his feet, and asked +the question hotly. + +"Good Heavens, no!" Gerald answered. + +"Then don't try to dissuade me. If someone who is armed were not near at +hand when shooting commenced, José d'Arousta might do something +desperate; but with my revolver pointed at him he will be more cautious. +Now, look here. You cut over to the crushing-shed and bring the negroes +across. Take the mules with you in case their whinnying should be heard +and give the alarm. I'll stay here and look out for Pedro. Now, hurry +up, for I want some help to capture that fellow." + +Promptly grasping the reins, Gerald hurried away, and returned some +minutes later with the whole force of natives. + +"Now, Jake," said Hal, selecting the negro who had first brought the +alarm, "send twenty of the hands up this path to the clearing, and let +them lie down amongst the trees in sight of the shed. If they hear +anyone approaching, they are to slip aside and allow him to pass, +signaling down here to let us know. Let me think. Yes; there is a marsh +down in the hollow, so it shall be the croak of a frog. You understand? +We are to be warned whenever anyone approaches; and, by the way, see +that rifles are unloaded. Triggers get pulled too easily, and might give +the alarm." + +Jake hurriedly carried out the order, and disappeared down the pathway. + +"I want two more to cut into the forest and stalk a couple of ruffians +who are watching the other path," said Hal. "They must be careful how +they approach, for the men I speak of are in hiding. When they discover +the whereabouts of the sentries they must load and be ready for +emergencies, and when they hear the others moving off, must shout at the +two they are covering, and order them away. If the rascals show fight, +they are to be dropped instantly. + +"Now, you others," he continued, turning to the five who remained, "one +of the leaders of the gang which has attacked the hacienda will come +along this path. You will lie in wait for him, and capture him, for I +want his clothes. If he is troublesome, you must silence him, for any +sound now would ruin our plans. + +"That is all arranged, and we will step on one side," he went on, moving +away from the group, and drawing Gerald after him. "You see, it isn't +that I don't like the job of tackling this beggar--I owe him one, and +shall be glad to repay it; but the negroes will do it without a sound, +whereas we might bungle it, and bring the whole crew down upon us. Ah, +down on your knees! I heard the signal. Yes; there it is again." + +They hastily concealed themselves, and, crouching low in the forest, +heard first the hoarse croaking of a frog, and then the unmistakable +sound of footsteps approaching. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +A BOLD COURSE + + +Out from the dense maze of bushes and trees came Pedro, the half-breed +ally of José d'Arousta, picking his way gingerly along the narrow +footpath, and evidently listening acutely for any sounds that might +betray the position of an enemy, and the unwary approach of the +Englishman whom he hoped to kill. A moment before he had been shrouded +in gloom, for the sun was already fast setting, and the roof of leaves +overhead cast a deep shadow upon everything beneath. Suddenly, however, +he came into clear view, and Hal and Gerald, who were crouching within +five or six paces of him, saw him distinctly. + +Click! An excited negro pulled back his trigger in readiness, and Pedro, +hearing the sound, stood suddenly still, rooted to the spot, and +listening with all his ears. For more than a minute a death-like silence +reigned, while the half-caste peered into the forest, doubtful whether +to advance or retire. Prudence told him to hasten back to his friends, +for the young fellow he was in search of had already proved that he was +capable of looking well after himself. But fierce longing for revenge, +the feeling that this was an opportunity not to be missed--one, too, +that would enable him to attain his end without much danger to himself, +for he hoped for a complete surprise--egged him on, and helped him to +conquer his fears. He hesitated, and then, with a muttered "What a dolt +I am! it was only a twig snapping," he gave a stamp of impatience, and +walked on. + +Next instant a nimble form sprang, unheard and unseen, upon the path +behind him, and, crouching like a tiger collecting its limbs for a +spring, crept stealthily after him. Then, measuring the distance with a +practiced eye, the negro launched himself through the air, landing upon +Pedro's shoulders. A hand closed firmly over his mouth, and a moment +later the ruffian who came to destroy the beautiful hacienda, and to +exercise a private vengeance, was lying as helpless as a log, bound hand +and foot, while a hard and extremely uncomfortable gag was fastened +between his jaws by means of a handkerchief. Close beside him crouched a +peculiarly sinister-looking negro, prepared to silence him should he +attempt to give the alarm, and seeming, too, to hope for such an action, +for he brandished his weapon in the prisoner's face in a manner that was +sufficiently formidable to upset the equanimity of the boldest man. + +"That was well done--very neatly managed, indeed," said Hal, issuing +from his cover. "Now, Mr. Pedro, or whatever you are called, we are +going to turn the tables if we can. Take off his clothes, my lads, and +if he attempts to make a sound, or to get rid of his gag, you will know +how to act." + +But there was very little need for the caution, for Pedro a captive was +a very different individual indeed from the half-caste who sat in the +railway car away in Florida, plotting the theft of Mr. Brindle's bag. +His yellow eyes blinked nervously, and as the negroes crowded round him, +and hustled him with no gentle hands, he looked at Hal appealingly, as +if asking for his help. His limbs trembled, and a thick perspiration +broke out upon his forehead. + +"Not at all, my fine fellow," exclaimed Hal, as if he had read his +prisoner's thoughts. "You need not appeal to me, for I told you that I +was about to turn the tables. Well, I have commenced with you, and the +others have their turn to come. Remember that I bear a mark upon my +shoulder which you were good enough to give me. Is it likely that I +shall go out of my way now to save you any pain or inconvenience, +especially when I know that you came this way with the express intention +of killing me--murdering me in cold blood, I should have said? That's +right, boys, strip his coat and breeches off. I fancy I shall manage to +squeeze into them." + +Tumbling their captive without ceremony, it was not long before the +negro hands had dragged his fine clothes from him. Hal picked them up, +and carefully inspected them. Then he donned them calmly. Indeed, +looking at him there as he struggled into the coat, one would have +imagined that he was undertaking some very ordinary duty, one to which +he was accustomed every day of his life. He paid particular attention to +the set of the breeches, and seemed quite annoyed because the jacket of +the half-caste would not button across his expansive chest. + +"You see," he said, with something approaching a smile, "I want to be +accurate. This fellow usually has his coat fastened, but I'm too big to +allow of it. However, the resemblance will be good enough, particularly +as it will be quite dark. + +"Now, listen," he continued imperiously, turning to his prisoner. "I am +now going to meet that scoundrel who works with you; but first I want +you to answer a question, and be very careful how you do it. I have +already warned you against raising an alarm. Tell me an untruth, and I +will make it extremely warm for you, for pain is the only thing that +appeals to men of your class. Now, my men, take the gag from his mouth +and bring him to me." + +Delighted to have in their hands one of the gang who had injured some of +their comrades, the negroes rushed at the unhappy Pedro, and dragged him +to his knees. Then they carried him to Hal, and tearing the gag from his +mouth, placed him upon his feet, one of them standing close beside him +and holding the cold muzzle of a rifle at his neck. + +"Ah, señor, spare me! I will tell the truth," Pedro cried, his knees +knocking together, and his eyes turning in terror to the negroes who +held him. "Take these wolves away from me, and you shall hear all that +you wish to know." + +"Silence! Do you wish to let your friends hear you?" asked Hal sternly. +"Silence, man, and answer in a whisper as you value your life. Now, who +is in the hacienda beside your accomplice?" + +"No one, señor, save a guard who stands at the door that opens from the +top of the steps. El Capitan sits in the best room, drinking wine." + +"If you were returning now, how would you act?" + +"I should pass by the guard without a word, señor," Pedro answered, +flinching as the barrel of the rifle touched his neck. "Ah, señor, I +cannot reply while my life depends upon this man behind. Have the gun +removed, I beg of you." + +"In time, Pedro. You must really give us time," said Hal calmly. +"Remember that I was to have felt the edge of cold steel myself, for +your orders were that the machete was to be used to kill me. Listen to +this. I am going into the hacienda to see this friend of yours, and you +will be brought to the edge of the clearing. When you hear José +d'Arousta's voice, repeat his commands in loud tones, and warn your +comrades on guard and those who are looking to the mules, that if they +approach the house or attempt to take the animals from the shed, they +will be shot down without mercy. I need not tell you to obey me to the +letter, for these good fellows will have charge of you. Now, bring him +along, boys. The sun will be down in five minutes, and then it will be +time to start." + +Hal left his trembling captive in charge of the grinning negroes, and +grasping Gerald by the arm, led him along the path. Five minutes later +they were amongst the hands who were lying in the forest watching the +shed and the guerilla sentries paraded up and down before the hacienda. + +"All of you lie down here," said Hal. "Ah, there goes the sun, and very +soon we shall have the moon up in its place." + +He had scarcely finished speaking when the golden orb disappeared +suddenly, and without the slightest warning, as is the case in the +tropics, where night succeeds day with a rapidity that is astonishing. +Then up floated the moon, while stars glistened dull and faint in the +sky, rendered almost invisible by the bright silvery rays that now shot +over the trees and deluged everything. At once all around became silent, +and the clearing and house looked unreal and ghostly in the pale beams +which were so different from those that had lit up the place only a few +minutes before. + +Glancing into the clearing, Hal saw the Spanish irregulars sauntering +carelessly up and down, their hands thrust deep into their pockets, and +a cigarette gleaming red beneath the teeth of each. Those who were not +on duty had collected on the right beneath a group of palms, and were +listlessly watching one of their number who saw to the contents of a +kettle that was suspended over a big fire. They lay in all sorts of +negligent attitudes, and seemed to have forgotten the hacienda and the +leader who had brought them there. + +"Now is the time," Hal murmured in Gerald's ear. "Look here, old boy, I +am going to leave you in charge. You know as well as I do what is going +to happen and how to act. Wait till you hear voices from the hacienda. I +shall endeavor to make José d'Arousta order his men back to Santiago. +They will have to go without arms and without mules. That is your part +of the business, and you must see to it. I am going to look after the +chief scoundrel, but you must have those negroes ready in case of +accidents. Look over there. The rifles are piled in front of the fire, +so that you can prevent the Spaniards from touching them. Do you +understand?" + +"Yes, quite," Gerald answered hesitatingly. "But, I say, old boy, it's a +fearful risk that you are taking. Are you sure that it is wise?" + +"Do you understand?" Hal asked, repeating his question and ignoring +Gerald's. "Yes? Then take the utmost care, and when the time comes, make +Pedro add his order to José's. There, you will manage beautifully. +Good-by. If you hear a shot you may as well make a rush, for there will +be trouble in the hacienda." + +He nodded to Gerald, and waiting only to squeeze the hand which the lad +enthusiastically thrust towards him, he rose to his feet, and stepped +from the shrubs and trees on to the narrow path. A moment later he was +in the clearing, walking slowly across it with a swaggering gait, such +as he had seen Pedro adopting. And an extremely good substitute he made +in appearance for that evil gentleman, though, as a matter of fact, he +was some three inches taller. He was wearing riding-breeches, with +high-cut riding boots, a wide-open coat and colored waist-cloth, such as +is worn by many Spaniards. Upon his head was a broad-brimmed hat, with +feather and tassel. The better to preserve his incognito he had tipped +the brim well over his eyes, so as to throw a shadow upon his face. A +fine manly young fellow he looked as he stalked into the moon-lit +clearing, and he showed a determined face beneath the shadow of his hat. + +"By Jove, what a chap!" Gerald murmured eagerly, as he lay in the +forest. "I ought to be there, but he knows as well as I do that I +haven't the go in me to carry out such a cool piece of acting. Who would +have thought it of Hal--the fellow who never quarrels, and seems to be +liked by everyone? Good old Hal! But I ought to be taking all these +risks for the sake of father and Dora. Why should he? Why?" + +Apparently the question rather staggered Gerald, for he at once became +silent, as he reclined upon the ground watching Hal's every movement. +With the utmost nonchalance Hal walked towards the hacienda, ignoring +the presence of the sentries and of their comrades who were feasting +round the fire. Suddenly, however, someone called to him. + +"Señor Pedro," he heard a voice cry, while a man hurried towards him. + +To escape was impossible, and, therefore, Hal halted, and placed his +hand easily on the butt of his revolver, which rested in his waistband. +Next moment a swarthy Spaniard stood before him, and evidently described +something which he had done. Hal listened carefully, and was able from +his rough knowledge of the language to gather that he was being told +that all was well, when he promptly made up his mind how to act. + +"Pedro apes the pure Spaniard," he thought, "and, no doubt, as second in +command, he treats these fellows with more or less contempt. It is the +class of thing a man of his character would do. I'll say 'Good!' and +turn away." + +Thrusting his hand into his pocket, he turned abruptly upon his heel, +and said, "Buenos!" Then he walked on towards the hacienda, while the +man hurried towards his friends, having detected nothing unusual. Pedro +was a rough, ill-conditioned fellow, he knew, so that the answer was all +that he had expected. Still, it was galling to be treated like that, +especially by one not of pure Spanish birth, and he did not fail to +remark upon it. + +"One would think that we were dogs," he said angrily. "Here have I been +round the clearing to see that all is as it should be, and when I report +the same to him, he turns upon me as though I had done him an injury. At +least, it was as bad as that. Some day the half-breed cur will be sorry. +He has murdered many, and perhaps someone will try to find room for the +blade of a knife between his ribs. If so, I for one shall not weep. But +hand me my supper. There is one consolation in the fact that he cannot +cut me from my meals." + +Thankful to have escaped discovery, which would have meant failure at +the very commencement of his little plot, Hal swaggered to the steps, +and stood there a moment to roll one of the many cigarettes with which +the average Spaniard regales himself during the day. Taking care to keep +his back to the sentry, who stood upon the balcony above, he struck a +match and lit up, sending a cloud of smoke flying into the air. + +"Now for it," he murmured gently. "I don't want a scene, and I wish to +avoid bloodshed, but I mean to prevent this fellow D'Arousta from +robbing Mr. Brindle. He is my employer, and it is only my duty to do all +that I can." + +He ran lightly up the steps, and would have passed the sentry without a +word, but the man came forward, and held his rifle forward to bar the +path, as if he had noticed something strange. But, more probably he was +half asleep, or had been day-dreaming, for when Hal gave vent to an +exclamation of impatience and anger, the Spaniard sprang back, and at +once offered an apology. Hal took no notice of it, for to do so would +have been to betray himself. Instead, he pushed on, and, pausing just +for one moment to drag his hat still more over his eyes, entered the big +room of the hacienda, which lay on the left. + +A tall shaded lamp stood close to the wall, and some paces from it was a +table at which José d'Arousta sat, with a flood of light illuminating +his face. Opposite him, seated in a chair, to which his wrists and +ankles were lashed, was Mr. Brindle, while standing close beside him was +Dora, white and trembling, but for all that preserving an undaunted +mien. + +Hal took in the whole situation in an instant, and, clattering across +the room without ceremony, dragged a seat to that end of the table +farthest from the lamp, and sat down with the rays upon his back. + +Puff! A cloud of tobacco smoke came from his lips and enveloped him. + +"Ha, you are back, then, Pedro!" exclaimed José d'Arousta, turning to +him. "What luck, my partner? Has it been good?" + +At that moment Hal emitted another cloud of smoke, and at once commenced +to choke violently. He dragged a big red handkerchief from the pocket of +Pedro's coat, and held it to his face, nodding meanwhile as if to answer +the question. + +"Good! Better than ever! Things have gone well for us!" José exclaimed. +"Here, señora, get me another glass of this wine. This is stuff which +one does not find in Santiago, and it is well to make the most of one's +opportunities. Besides, I would drink to the health of my friend, for he +has just paid off a heavy score for me. Think what it is." + +As if determined to do all in her power to conciliate the coward before +her, Dora refilled his glass from a decanter that stood on the table, +and then returned to her father's side. As for José, he lifted the wine +to the light, and, having inspected it carefully, swallowed it with a +gulp. + +"Come," he said, with a sardonic smile, "you have not yet answered my +question, señora. Surely it is not because you are too timid a donzella +(maiden)? What score do you imagine the gallant Pedro has paid for me?" + +"If I heard that he had murdered every hand upon the plantation I should +not be surprised," exclaimed Mr. Brindle. "He is villain enough for +anything." + +"Do you hear that, my Pedro?" José cried, with a gay, bantering laugh. +"See what a high opinion the Señor Brindle has of you. My dear sir, +please remember that you are speaking of my friend. He is an amiable +fellow, I do assure you, and has a very tender heart. But, supposing +that score referred to the overseer, the brat of an Englishman who +thwarted me before? You will recollect the occasion of which I speak." + +"Pshaw! he was too clever for you," answered Mr. Brindle, with a +disdainful smile, "and I am sure he has outmatched you again." + +"Sure! Are you, my friend? Then we will soon let you know," said José +harshly. "But we will not discuss that matter now. The most important +business is to settle the debt you owe me. Let me see, you said, I +think, that the cash and what valuables you possess are in that safe in +the corner of the room. I want the key. Where is it?" + +"There it is, hanging on my watch-chain," Mr. Brindle said brokenly. +"You are too strong for me, and I must submit. If I did not know well +that you would shoot me like a dog, I would have defied you long ago, +and left you to make these discoveries for yourself. But you have the +upper hand. Wait till my turn comes; I will then hound you out of the +island." + +"Quite so; I believe you would if you could," answered the Spaniard, +with a satirical smile. "But you have unfortunately failed to take stock +of current events. For instance, war was declared between Spain and +America yesterday. That very naturally throws Santiago into a turmoil, +so that you might hunt the town and never find us. Again, you are an +American, and once you leave your estate you are spying. Remember that, +for I shall swear that it is the case, and you must know the reward you +would meet with." + +"War declared! Ah, I thought as much! But still, I repeat that I shall +repay you for this day's work, José d'Arousta," said Mr. Brindle +sternly. "Once before you attempted to rob me, and failed. You are +successful this time, but it is the last, for I will never rest till you +are punished." + +"Really you will put yourself to much unnecessary trouble," the Spaniard +replied. "But we are wasting time. Let me see what the safe contains. I +am far more interested in seeing to that than in listening to what a +beggarly American has to say." + +He started to his feet, and, striding up to Mr. Brindle, removed the key +from his watch-chain. Then he opened the safe, and pulling out the +drawers, emptied their contents upon the table. + +"A very pretty haul, Pedro!" he exclaimed, thrusting his fingers +greedily amongst the gold which lay piled up before him. "A good reward, +indeed, and one worthy of our labors. Stow it in your pocket, my +friend." + +Hal, who up to this had preserved a strict silence, gave vent to a +guttural laugh, and hastily transferred the gold and silver to his +capacious pockets. The Spaniard watched him eagerly, his attention being +so much occupied with the booty he was stealing that he did not give +more than a passing thought to his supposed accomplice. + +"Good! That is done; and now I fancy we can bid you adieu," he said at +last, turning to Mr. Brindle. "Pedro, go to the door, and give our men +the order to saddle up. Señor, forgive my rudeness in hurrying away, but +duty calls, for your countrymen will be exchanging shots with us very +soon, and it is well that I should be there to help read them the same +lesson as you have been taught. Señora, your pardon. In the absence of +our mutual friend, the handsome Señor Marchant, who, I fear, is dead, +permit me to proclaim myself your very devoted servant." + +He turned on his heel, after giving a flourishing bow, and stepped +towards the door. At that moment his eye fell upon Hal, and he stopped +abruptly; for, taking advantage of his satirical bobs, the latter had +drawn his revolver, and now held it presented at the Spaniard's head, +while at the same time, as if to mock José's manner, he leant one hand +easily upon the table as if it were almost too much trouble to stand. + +"By your leave, Señor Capitan," he said, with a short laugh. "You have +given us a lesson in politeness, and I will follow suit. Hands up, at +this instant!" + +To say that José d'Arousta was surprised was to express the situation +mildly. He staggered backwards, turned deathly pale, and then drove his +hand into his pocket. + +"Stop that!" said Hal, sternly, but in low tones, so that the sentry +should not hear, holding his weapon within an inch of the Spaniard's +head. "Hands up!" + +José lifted his arms slowly and grudgingly, while he glared at Hal as if +he would kill him. + +"That is well. Now, I warn you that I will shoot if you show even the +faintest suspicion of treachery. Dora, cut your father loose, if you +please." + +As if in a dream, for she was as yet unable to grasp the situation, Dora +took a knife from the table, and released Mr. Brindle. + +"Good," said Hal. "Now, Mr. Brindle, I will trouble you to lash this +rogue in front of me." + +"Delighted, I'm sure," exclaimed the latter; and at once set to work. + +Taking the ropes which had bound his own limbs only a moment or two +before, he wound them round the arms and feet of the Spanish brigand, +and knotted them firmly. + +"Now we will go on with the play," said Hal calmly. "Much depends upon +you, José d'Arousta. If you give the alarm now, you and your comrades +will suffer. First and foremost, you will run the danger of receiving a +bullet from my revolver, and then the negro hands, who lie close +outside, will fire upon your men. Pedro, too, whose clothes I was forced +to borrow, will come in for very rough handling, for he is not a +favorite with our good fellows. Now, you can prevent all this by doing +as I tell you." + +"What is it? What do you want?" the Spaniard asked crossly. + +"Go to the window and order all your ruffians to return to Santiago. +Tell them on no account to go for their mules, for they will be shot if +they attempt it, and we are anxious to avoid bloodshed where they are +concerned." + +"And after that?" + +"We will settle with you and your rascally accomplice." + +Hal looked the man in the face and spoke sternly. For an instant José +glowered at him, but realizing that he was beaten, he lowered his eyes, +and muttered angrily beneath his breath. + +"You've had your orders, so come along," said Mr. Brindle, grasping him +by the shoulders and hustling him unceremoniously to the window. "Now, +repeat them aloud, and be careful how you do it, for I have a strong +hand, and will pinch your neck till the life is out of you." + +Caught in a cleverly laid trap, there was nothing for José d'Arousta to +do but obey. In a crestfallen voice, therefore, he called loudly to his +comrades, begging them to leave the clearing and the neighborhood of the +hacienda, and return to Santiago at once. + +"Tell them that if they attempt to take their rifles or advance towards +the house, you will be shot," said Hal, rising to his feet to get a +clear view through the window. + +And now his plan to compel Pedro to add his voice to the Spaniard's +proved useful, for at first the remainder of the band were incredulous. +They could not believe their ears, and sat round the fire gesticulating +and asking questions of one another. Then the sentry descended the +hacienda steps, and, unmindful of the warning, walked towards the +piled-up arms. There was a crack from the fringe of trees, a flash +suddenly lit up the shadows, and he fell backwards with his hands wildly +clutching the air. + +"That will show them that business is meant," exclaimed Mr. Brindle. "It +is just as well, too, for when a band of cut-throats attack a peaceful +hacienda, they must be taught that punishment will follow. But, +evidently, they have had enough." + +And this was the case. Hearing their leader calling from the house, and +his second in command from the forest, and detecting a ring of entreaty +in the voices, the remainder of the rascally band hurried away from the +hacienda, and, once amidst the trees, took to their heels in the +direction of Santiago. + +"There they go," said Mr. Brindle, throwing the latticed shutters wide +open, and listening to the crash of men breaking their way through the +jungle. "Now we will deal with the others. Hal, you know what is +happening. Give your orders. I must confess that I am perfectly +bewildered." + +"It's all very simple," answered Hal, relaxing into a smile now that the +danger was past. "Gerald and I were warned that you were in trouble. +Then I happened to hear this man's accomplice declare his intention of +entering the forest in search of myself. I was to be put out of the way. +Happily I was able to turn the tables. Pedro was captured without a +sound, and I dressed up in his clothes, and came here in search of the +other fellow. I knew that if I could master him I could get rid of the +others, for all the hands are lying in the forest at the edge of the +clearing, and you saw for yourself how quickly they checked an attempt +to reach the arms. Now I will tell them what to do, and then you can +take matters into your own hands." + +Hal went to the window and called loudly. + +"Half of you follow those brigands to the edge of the plantation, and +see them well away," he cried. "Jake Johnson, you and four others can +bring your prisoner in here; the remainder had better stay in the +clearing and keep a good look-out." + +A moment later the bushes which lined the clearing opened, and Gerald +and the negro hands appeared, the former accompanying Jake Johnson and +the men in charge of the captive Pedro. They trudged across the open +space, looking weird and white in the pale moonbeams; then their feet +were heard as they ascended the steps outside, and within a minute the +two rascally Spaniards, who had dared to attack the hacienda, stood side +by side, bound hand and foot, and awaiting sentence. + +Hal looked at them searchingly, smiling at Pedro's appearance, for he +was now clad in a tattered blanket in place of the fine clothes he had +previously worn, and cut a very sorry figure; for this half-breed was +not quite the man that he would have had his fellows believe. With all +in his favor, and no fear for his own personal comfort and safety, he +was a martinet, an insufferably proud man, who would stop at very little +to support his position. Now, however, when any fate might be in store +for him, and when his conscience told him that he deserved the severest +punishment, he showed the stuff of which he was made. His knees trembled +and shook so that he could scarcely stand upright, his face was of an +ashen pallor, and big beads of perspiration trickled down his forehead. + +A very different being was his leader. Rogue though he was, and coward +enough to insult a lady when he had her in his power, he was yet a brave +man, with a brave man's detestation for one who could not look adversity +in the face. He stood there, his usually sallow face now flushed red +with excitement, his head thrown back, and an air of reckless defiance +about him. + +"You hound!" he hissed, turning upon his quaking accomplice. "Why do you +tremble? What do you fear? Have you not been the means of killing men? +Then why should you grumble when your own fate reaches you? Señor, do me +the favor of removing this fellow," he continued, turning to Hal. "He is +my servant, I tell you, and he has no right to stand by my side." + +"Servant or friend makes little difference to me, José d'Arousta," Hal +answered coldly. "He has been good enough to act as your comrade in this +deed of roguery, and therefore is good enough to take his sentence with +you. Now, Mr. Brindle, these two men came here unbidden and made a most +unwarranted attack upon you. I leave you to settle with them, and will +merely mention that three of the negro hands have been either killed or +wounded by their following. Deal with them as you think they deserve." + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +A RISKY UNDERTAKING + + +Called upon to pass judgment on the two Spanish irregulars who had +attacked the peaceful hacienda in search of plunder and revenge, it was +long before Mr. Brindle opened his lips or endeavored to speak. He drew +a chair before them, and, having seated himself with the utmost +deliberation, extracted a long cheroot from a case of woven grass, which +he always carried in his pocket. Turning it round and round in his +fingers, as if to satisfy himself that it was one of good flavor, he bit +off one end, and striking a match, lit the other very carefully. Even +then he did not address the prisoners. + +"Pull that lamp a little closer, Hal, old boy," he said. "That's it. Now +lift the shade, that I may get a better look at these two--these two +rascals." + +Hal did as he was asked, throwing a flood of light upon José d'Arousta +and his accomplice. + +"Señor, you are kind to us," said the former, in the calmest of calm +voices, and with more than a suspicion of irony in his tones. "A strong +light never did the gay d'Arousta harm. On the contrary, he has been +told that it improves him." + +He laughed, and, jerking his wide-brimmed hat backward, turned still +more to the light, showing a handsome face, which would have been quite +taking but for the color and vindictive flash of the eyes, and for the +involuntary twitch of his lips, which even he, calm though he had forced +himself to appear, could not entirely control. + +"It is a pity, a thousand pities, José d'Arousta, that all your deeds +cannot bear the light," said Mr. Brindle quietly. "I know them well, and +you are aware of it. Rogue, sir, is written on your face--rogue, +vagabond, and thief. What have you to say for yourself?" + +"To say, señor? Merely that ill fortune has befallen me. But for this +dolt here I should have succeeded, so that I have little more to say +than that I regret my failure greatly, and think myself a fool that I +did not burn the hacienda about your ears. But this young Englishman was +too clever for me. It is the second time, and the last, I can assure +you, señor, for José d'Arousta never forgets nor forgives, and never +neglects to repay his debts in full." + +"Exactly so," Mr. Brindle replied dryly. "It _is_ the last time. Now, +listen to me. A state of war has commenced in the island, and everything +is disorganized. If I send you into Santiago, you will be set at liberty +again, for your services will be required. Therefore I must take matters +into my own hands, for men who make an unwarranted attack, and who kill +my servants in cold blood, must take the consequences." + +"Señor, you are scarcely wise," José replied, with unruffled calmness. +"You mean, I understand, that you will shoot us. Ah, well! do so, and +what will happen? In these lawless times my countrymen will retaliate, +for the news is certain to reach their ears. That will be awkward, +señor. On the other hand, you might set us at liberty, and profit +yourself, for we will engage to leave you unmolested from this day +onwards." + +"You will engage? But what is the value of a promise from you?" asked +Mr. Brindle, with a disdainful shrug of his shoulders. + +"That you must decide for yourself," the Spaniard answered calmly. + +Once more there was silence, Mr. Bundle sinking his face into his +hands, as if in deep thought; while the captives stood in front of him, +José apparently unconcerned, but for all that narrowly watching; and +Pedro, with eyes that were full of fear, and knees that knocked together +in sheer terror. + +"Does anyone know which of my servants were hurt?" asked Mr. Brindle +suddenly. "Were any killed, or wounded so badly that they will die?" + +"I can answer that question, father," said Gerald, stepping forward. +"Black Pete is hit badly, though not mortally, and will certainly +recover: while the others have only trifling wounds." + +"Then so much the better. I am glad that a death on my plantation and +amongst my hands cannot be placed at the door of these men. Listen, you +two," he went on, sternly, looking José and Pedro in the face. "Do you +solemnly swear to leave me and mine alone in the future, and will you +promise never to molest my overseer? You have threatened all of us, and +we all know the nature of such men as you are. Revenge unfortunately +holds a high place with you, and you will do much to accomplish an end. +Put that aside. Forget that we exist, and declare to me on your solemn +word that you will never come near us; for otherwise I shall take the +law into my own hands, and hang you both to the trees in front of the +hacienda." + +"We will give you the promise on our honor, señor," said José. "See, I +look you in the face, and I swear to observe this bond between us. Señor +must know that a Spaniard never breaks his oath." + +"Hum, I have had too little to do with men of your country to be able to +vouch for the truth of that," Mr. Brindle answered dryly; "but I have +heard of the saying that there is honor among thieves. Perhaps this is +your case. However, lest you should forget this vow of yours, and come +this way again to trouble me, I will give you a warning. From this day +the man who approaches the hacienda with the intention of committing +violence will be shot at sight. At sight, José d'Arousta; remember that. +Now you may go, but carry my words with you, I pray. Outside in the +clearing lies one of your gang, killed through your action. Break your +plighted oath, and I will bring you to the same end, and this ruffian, +too, your accomplice. Now, be off, and never let me see your faces +again." + +He gave an impatient stamp, and turned to Hal. + +"Set them free," he said. "Let us be rid of them." + +Taking a knife from his pocket, Hal advanced to the prisoners, and cut +their lashings, keeping a close watch upon them the while, for it was +well to suspect treachery from such men. Perhaps from Pedro there was +little fear of foul play, for he had not the heart to attempt it; but +from the other anything might be expected, for not for a single moment +had his wonderful _sang-froid_ deserted him. Even now, great though the +relief must have been, he did not allow his feelings to betray him, or +show that he had just emerged from an ordeal sufficiently trying to any +man, and which might have ended in an order for his instant execution. + +"The señor is wise," he said, with a disdainful laugh. "He has realized +that it is risky and foolish to harm a Spaniard in these troublous days. +Ah, well! the times will change, let us hope; and meanwhile, who can say +what will happen? Now we will depart, as we have your permission, señor. +Señora, buenas noches (good night). I would fain have stayed to pass a +pleasant evening. Adios, señores (farewell, gentlemen). Had I the power, +I would drink to our next meeting." + +He swept his cap from his head, and bowed to the floor. Then, with one +look at Dora and a meaning flash from his eyes in Hal's direction, he +tramped out of the room with a swagger, and went down the steps, +followed closely by Pedro. + +"I am thankful he is gone," exclaimed Mr. Brindle. "The air seems +clearer already." + +"Yes; I too am glad to see the last of him for this time," said Hal. +"But we shall have to deal with him again, and that very soon. Listen. +What is that?" + +They rose to their feet, and went to the window to look across the +clearing. It was bathed in brilliant moonlight, which showed every +object distinctly, illuminating the group of negroes who stood outside +discussing the affairs of the past few hours in high-pitched voices, the +piled-up rifles, and the dead Spaniard who lay prone in the center, with +arms stretched out before him just as he had fallen. There, too, were +José and his accomplice, entering the fringe of trees. As they did so, +the former turned, and, seeing the faces in the window, and the figures +of the watchers showing darkly against the light, he stood there and +shook his fist in their direction. + +"Hi! you in the room yonder!" he cried. "Listen to José d'Arousta's +parting words. Remember this, Señor Brindle, that all is fair in love +and war, and a vow pledged to the enemy is not binding. I give you +solemn warning that I will visit this hacienda again, if it is only to +meet and chat with the adorable señora. Señor Marchant, you know what to +expect. I owe you a great debt, and will repay it." + +He shook his fist ominously, and, plunging into the trees, was lost to +view. + +"And I will take his warning to heart," said Hal quietly, turning to his +friends. "He says that he will repay, and I declare that if I meet him +again I will shoot him like a dog on the slightest suspicion of +treachery. He deserves anything, for he has broken his word and his +honor." + +"You will be fully justified in doing as you say, old boy," said Mr. +Brindle. "But let us hope that he will never come our way again. War is +said to have been declared, and, no doubt, Spain will go to the wall. +Then America will look to our interests, and this unfortunate island +will enter upon a new era of prosperity. Such an act of violence as has +been attempted this night will then be out of the question. Now, let us +go to supper; but, Hal, my dear lad, first we must shake you by the +hand. I am not going to sing your praises, but I must tell you how well +you have done, and what you have saved me. The money in your pockets +represents a year's savings and hard work, and the total return of the +plantation." + +And now, while the small family at the beautiful hacienda of Eldorado +discuss the evening meal, let us turn to America and to Spain, and +ascertain what had been happening in the meantime, and why it was that, +contrary to his previously expressed decision, Mr. Brindle had not sent +Gerald and Dora back to Florida. + +To say that the terrible tidings from Havana, detailing how the _Maine_ +and her unfortunate crew were blown into the air, produced a storm of +passion in the United States is to tell only the meager truth. For years +Cuba and the insurrection there had rankled in the hearts of all in this +big country. Many a time had private sympathizers given men and money to +aid the cause of the insurgents, and more than once had representations +been made to Spain in order to persuade her to end the condition of +misery which clouded the island, and ruined the Americans there. + +The story of the _Virginius_, though now many years old, was still fresh +in the memory of the American nation, and the wretched condition of the +unfortunate natives herded together in the concentration camps, and +other evils, did not tend to let the sore close. No love was felt for +the Spaniard, but only hatred and contempt. Matters, however, seemed to +be mending, and a gallant ship, with a fine crew of officers and men, +above whom floated the Stars and Stripes, was paying a friendly visit to +Cuba. What wonder, then, that the news of its destruction filled +Americans with anger! Treachery was suspected at once, and a searching +investigation insisted on. Divers were dispatched to the wreck, who +reported that a mine had been fired beneath the keel. They were not +absolutely certain, but everything pointed to the truth of what they +said, for the bottom plates of the _Maine_, as well as the keel, were +driven upwards at an angle, while the mud which formed the bed of the +harbor beneath her was excavated to the depth of many feet--all going to +prove that the explosions were the result of external force. + +But, even now, war was not certain, though the nation clamored for it. +Nothing definite could be decided upon until Congress met; and +meanwhile, America commenced warlike preparations, while Spain, +following her example, beat up recruits and war vessels for the struggle +which was now imminent. In addition, she began to bestir herself to +alleviate the sufferings of the people in the concentration camps in +Cuba, and at this, the eleventh hour, did her utmost to conciliate the +people of the States. But the attempt was made too late. Former Spanish +promises had resulted in no improvement in the condition of the island. +America, remembering this, called upon Spain to withdraw from Cuba and +leave it to the natives. + +A decided refusal was given, and on April the 26th a state of war +commenced between the two nations, Spain at once assembling her fleet in +home waters, and making all preparations in Cuba to resist the +Americans; while, at the same time, she held the insurgents in check. +This was José d'Arousta's opportunity; and we have seen how, accompanied +by Pedro and his irregulars, he rode into the country and attacked Mr. +Brindle's house. + +Matters, indeed, looked anything but bright for those left in the +island; and as the family sat at supper, Mr. Brindle discussed the +situation earnestly with Hal. + +"You see we are placed in a very uncomfortable position," he said +thoughtfully. "Living out here in the country, we must look to ourselves +alone to defend the place. I do not suppose that the Spaniards will +trouble us unless they suspect us of trying to aid America; but when the +island is infested with such scoundrels as José and his friends, our +lives and property will never be safe. What is to prevent that rascal +from returning as he threatened? He failed to succeed this time by the +merest chance--a chance, my lad, which you made good use of, though I do +not forget that some allowance of pluck was required to bring your plan +to a favorable issue. He failed, but on the next occasion he will not be +taken in so easily. It really is a troublesome matter to decide upon. Am +I to stay here, or shall I leave until the war is over? That is the +question which I continue to ask myself. Supposing I get away from the +island as soon as possible, the estate will be overrun, and I shall +return to find it a blackened wilderness from end to end, and the +hacienda, of which I am so proud, a heap of ashes. If I stay, as I am +inclined to do, the place may be burnt over our heads at any moment, and +our lives may be seriously threatened. Now, Hal, you have proved so +thoughtful and cute before; let me know what you think about the matter? +How would you act in the circumstances?" + +"It is more or less of a puzzle," said Hal slowly, "but I think you +will do well to stay. When your wounded negroes have recovered, you will +have thirty-three rifles with which to defend the place--that is, of +course, counting ourselves." + +"I beg your pardon--thirty-four!" exclaimed Dora sharply. "You have +forgotten to include me, sir." + +"Quite right! Quite as it should be! Ha, ha, Hal! You have caught it +this time, and let it be a warning to you in future. The girl is a +regular Amazon. She can shoot and ride with the best of us." + +Mr. Brindle shouted the words across the table, and chuckled to see Hal +flush red. As for Dora, her pretty lips parted in a smile. + +"I'm sure I hadn't thought of it like that," said Hal apologetically. +"But let us put it at thirty-four. Now, I should advise that all the +mulattoes be dismissed. You do not require them any longer, for the +winter is at hand; and, besides, what help have they been on this +occasion? None at all. We have not seen a single one since the row +began, and in all probability they were with the gang of brigands. Then +I should at once take steps to replace them from the plantation in +Florida. You could spare them, I should think; and if not, it would not +be difficult to hire more labor over there. The next and most important +question to think of is how to defend the hacienda and plantation. In +the first place, I should cut back the forest so as to obtain a wider +clearing round the house. By doing this you will at the same time be +providing material with which to build fortifications. To my mind, a +sand-bag barricade on the roof would be the most useful defense, and I +should run up a watch-tower above it. When the hacienda is seen to, I +should erect small forts at intervals round the edge of the clearing, +digging a ditch behind them. Our men could lie in them, and fire on the +enemies approaching from the direction of Santiago, or from the other +side; while, should anyone manage to evade them, he must still cross the +clearing to get at the house, and would still be exposed to the rifles +lying in the ditch." + +"Hum! then you think that more men are necessary, Hal?" said Mr. +Brindle. + +"I do most certainly, and will fetch them for you if you wish. As far as +I can see, you have only one thing to think about. You are an American +by choice, and if your country were in real danger, no doubt you would +volunteer your services. But this is not a struggle for supremacy +between two nations, and you will, therefore need only to care for your +property. If you make your preparations at once there is no reason why +you should fear José d'Arousta or any of his kidney. If you fail to take +all precautions, you will certainly meet with serious trouble, for that +man will not forget his threat, and he will return here some day and +wreck the place, besides doing injury to yourself." + +Mr. Brindle did not answer for some minutes. Resting his head on his +hand, he stared thoughtfully out of the window, seeming to have fixed +his attention upon the long, dark shadows cast by the trees across the +clearing. + +"I believe your advice is good," he said at length, "and I will set +about the matter to-morrow morning. We will make out a plan of the +surroundings of the hacienda, putting in all paths and approaches. Then +we will sketch in the positions most likely to be suitable for defenses. +I fancy by using a little care we shall be able to design them to cross +their fire, or rather, to allow the defenders to do so, without danger +of hitting one another. As to extra hands, if you will do me the +service, I will send a note by you to my overseer at Tampa, leaving it +to you to make the arrangements for the transfer of ten men here. But I +expect it will be a more difficult undertaking than you imagine. No +doubt you will slip from the island without discovery, but it will be +another affair to return, for the coast-line will be carefully watched. +That, again, is a question which you alone can settle; and as it will +certainly have a spice of danger about it, I am sure you will manage +beautifully, for when have you failed to pull yourself and others out of +a difficulty? Still, you must consider the probable risk, and tell me +whether you are prepared to take it." + +"I have done so, and I repeat my offer," Hal replied, without +hesitation. "So long as the dangers and difficulties are not +insurmountable, I shall enjoy the fun, for it will make the journey +quite interesting." + +"Then it is arranged; and as you may fall into trouble, Gerald shall go +with you to help you out. He speaks Spanish and Cuban like a native, and +may very well be of use." + +"By Jove, that is ripping, father!" exclaimed Gerald delightedly. "When +will we start, old boy?" + +"The sooner the better, I should say. To-morrow will not be too early." + +"Then all shall be ready for you by daylight," said Mr. Brindle. "Now, +Hal, if you will come outside we will go round the place, and discuss +the measures to be taken for defense." + +On the following morning the sun had scarcely climbed out of the sea +when Hal and Gerald were about, booted and spurred, and ready for the +road. Each carried his revolver and a flask, while two thick rugs were +rolled into bundles, ready to be strapped to the saddles one in front of +each rider. A few minutes later Dora appeared, looking extremely pretty +and picturesque, but with a scarcely discernible cloud about her +usually smiling face. + +"There," she said, with a toss of her head, "here are two parcels of +food for you. Boys are always hungry, and no doubt you will be glad of +something to eat upon the road." + +"That we shall," Hal answered heartily. "Now, Gerald, up you get." + +The mules were led forward at this moment, and the two sprang into their +saddles, Hal gaining his seat with an easy vault which was by no means +as simple to execute as it appeared. But he was a strong and active +young fellow, and made little of such a feat. A minute later he had +secured his stirrups, and had the reins in his hand. + +"Good-by, and good luck to you!" cried Mr. Brindle, appearing with a +letter in his hand. "Here is the note for the overseer, Hal; I ask him +to send me ten extra hands. If need be he will advance you more money, +though I believe I have given you sufficient to cover all expenses. One +thing more. Remember that while in Cuba you are in the enemy's country, +and that the less you come into contact with Spaniards the better. Now, +adieu, and let us hope for a speedy return." + +"Good-by, and take care of yourselves," cried Dora earnestly, coming +forward to shake them by the hand. "Hal, I give Gerald into your care. +Bring him and yourself back safely, and I will thank you." + +"I will, never fear," answered Hal. Then he lifted his reins, and taking +his hat from his head, turned from the hacienda. "Come along, Gerald," +he cried, and next second was cantering across the clearing. + +A minute later both were swallowed up in the forest, leaving Mr. Brindle +and Dora standing on the balcony, arm in arm, looking longingly after +them. + +"I do hope that they will come to no harm," said Dora, as if to herself. + +"Harm! And so do I. But why should they?" answered her father +reassuringly. "One of them has a head on his shoulders and a heart +beneath his jacket which will take him through anything. There, come in, +Dora, and let us have some breakfast. Afterwards we will go round the +plantation, for during the overseer's unavoidable absence you will have +to act in his stead." + +Hal and his companion with hearts as light and happy as the morning, and +filled to overflowing with high spirits, cantered along, side by side, +in the direction of Santiago. Nothing disturbed their feeling of +security, and they chatted gayly, going once more over the exciting +events of the previous day. At length they emerged from the forest, and +Santiago lay exposed to full view, some five miles away. + +"One gets a splendid look-out from this level," remarked Hal. "The town +is laid out like a map beneath us; and just look at the shipping! That +harbor with its narrow entrance, is like a bottle, and the fleets of +Spain might lie in there and never be seen, and never fear attack from +hostile ships. Hallo! what are those outside?" + +He shaded his eyes, and looked at two dots floating on the water just +off the harbor mouth. A moment later they showed up clearly, even at +that distance, and it was easy to distinguish that they were two long, +low torpedo boats, which were steaming parallel to the shore, with a +trail of blue smoke blowing out behind them. + +"Spanish sleuthhounds," said Hal. "Gerald, we shall have some trouble in +getting away, for those boats are patrolling the harbor mouth, and, no +doubt, have strict orders to stop any craft attempting to enter or +leave. But we'll manage it somehow." + +"Why not get aboard some merchant vessel?" asked Gerald. + +"At any other time, that might do," Hal replied thoughtfully; "but now I +fancy that all ships will be compelled to lay up in the harbor. Besides, +the American fleet will be blockading Cuba, and to attempt to leave just +now would be to run the danger of capture. Still, I've no doubt that +some neutral vessels are down there, and they will be allowed to sail, +for there is a clause in international law that makes it possible. We +must look out for one, and I propose that we ride a little closer, and +leave our mules where they can be cared for. As soon as it gets dark we +will make for the town, and enter boldly. We shall be like hundreds of +others, for all the people hereabouts are dressed in these plantation +clothes. I'll keep my tongue quiet, while you can do all the +questioning. What do you say to that, old boy?" + +"That it will be the best way out of the difficulty, and, as we have +still some hours to wait before the sun goes down, I vote for some grub. +I'm as hungry as a hunter and as empty as a drum. An early start on a +light breakfast makes one simply ravenous." + +"Just the thing! I'm like you, and awfully peckish," answered Hal +cheerily. "Here, what's this? The very spot for a camp and a short +siesta. There is no fear of interruption, and a sleep during the heat of +the day will do us good. We had precious little yesterday, and, for all +we know, may have none at all to-night. Whoa! Stand, boy. There, now you +can see for yourself. I dare say you are as ready for a feed and a rest +as I am." + +They dismounted, and removing the bits from the mouths of their mules, +and loosening the girths, allowed the animals to graze. Then they sat +down upon a fallen tree, and discussed the contents of the packets +which the thoughtful Dora had provided. At six o'clock it was time to +start, and, saddling up, they went forward at a smart canter. + +"Do you see that hut over there?" said Gerald, pointing to a tumble-down +erection of palm leaves and stakes which suddenly came into view some +hundreds of yards in front of them. "That will be the very place to +leave our mules, for a trusty native, whom I have known for years will +willingly look after them till we return, even though weeks may pass." + +Shaking their reins, they galloped up to the tiny hut, and called loudly +for the owner. + +"We are going into the town," said Gerald in Spanish, when the native +appeared. "We shall be absent a week or more, and we want you to look +after the mules. Can you do it for us? We will pay you well." + +The man, who was old and crippled, and dressed in rags, willingly +assented. + +"For a week or more!" he cried, in a squeaky voice, shaking his head the +while. "My advice to you, my masters, is to leave the town alone; for if +you are rash enough to go there, it will be a month at least before you +return--perhaps, even, I may never see you again. But I doubt whether +you will be able to enter, for all the gates are closed, and the +approaches guarded." + +"But there are other ways in, are there not?" asked Gerald. + +"Yes; you might be able to slip in by the side streets," the native +agreed hesitatingly; "but take the advice of one old enough to give it, +and leave the place alone altogether." + +He shook his head again, and hobbled away with the mules, leaving Gerald +to interpret what had passed between them. + +"Perhaps it would be the wiser course not to enter Santiago," said Hal; +"but we have no choice in the matter, for we want to get away from the +island, and that is the only manner in which we can arrange it. Come +along, Gerald. We'll decide how we are to act as we go towards the +town." + +Five minutes later they were walking towards the rows of lights which +now twinkled from the houses in Santiago. On arriving close beside the +first, they halted at a drinking-fountain, which splashed musically, +inviting the thirsty traveler to stop and satisfy his wants. + +"We want to get in there undetected," said Hal; "and, what is more, +we're going to have a good shot at it. The question is, How are we to +set about the matter? Now, my idea is to face the thing boldly, and act +as if we had as much right to enter as the general himself. If we are +seen skulking, suspicion will be aroused, and we shall probably have a +few bullets flying about our ears. War has only just been declared, and +no doubt the people are very much excited. They will be expecting +something to happen, but not from this side. The Americans will come +from over the sea, and therefore it is from the coast-line that danger +and attack will be apprehended. What is there suspicious about us? +Simply nothing! I never saw a more innocent-looking couple; and as for +being different in appearance from the ordinary citizens, I am sure we +should pass all but the closest scrutiny. Come along! We'll strike for +the main entrance." + +Gerald jumped to his feet and followed willingly, for he had already had +experience of the soundness of Hal's judgment, and trusted him +implicitly. + +A few minutes later the road which they were traversing narrowed, and, +passing through a thick grove of orange trees, ran between two rows of +houses. At the end of the street a barricade was erected, and a sentry, +who stood behind it in the shadow, challenged them loudly. + +"Halt!" he cried harshly. "Who goes there?" + +"Friends," answered Gerald, in his finest Spanish. + +"Then advance, and show yourselves." + +Hal and his comrade promptly stepped forward in obedience to the order, +for it was too late to turn back now, even if they had wished; and, +moreover, the sight of the sentry as he stood out from the shadow of the +barricade, with rifle pointed in their direction, was sufficient to show +them that even to hesitate would mean a report, and the whistle and +shriek of a bullet in their direction. + +Accordingly they moved forward till close beside him, when they stopped +as the bayonet was dropped to the level of their chests. + +"Here are two who wish to enter. Bring a light, one of you," the sentry +cried. + +"A lantern? Wait, and I will come with one," a second voice answered; +and steps were heard as another of the Spanish soldiers approached. + +He carried an unlighted lantern in his hand, and, when close beside the +lads, placed it upon the top of the barricade, while he fumbled in his +pocket for a match. At length he produced a solitary one, and, lifting +his foot, struck it sharply across the sole. But the flash was instantly +extinguished by a puff of wind that came whistling through the trees at +that moment. + +"Ah, caramba!" he exclaimed, with an angry stamp of his foot. "It is the +very last that I have, and to get another I must go back to the +guard-room. Have you a box about you, comrade?" + +The sentry placed his rifle between his knees, and searched in every +pocket, but without success. + +"I cannot help you," he said crossly. "Get back and fetch a light. I am +tired of waiting." + +"I cannot be bothered," the other replied. "Who are these fellows?" + +"We are friends," Gerald promptly responded. + +"Then pass them in, comrade," said the one who had declined to fetch a +light. "They are brothers-in-arms most certainly." + +Gerald pulled Hal by the sleeve, and, without waiting for more, the two +hurried through the barricade and on into the street. Fifty paces away +the road was dimly lighted by a lamp hanging from a pole. They were just +passing beneath it, and were in the act of congratulating themselves on +their success, when a company of soldiers marched up, and the officer in +charge, happening to catch sight of the two youths, called loudly to +them to approach and declare who they were. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +IN DANGER AND DISTRESS + + +"Who are you two over there? What are you doing out in the streets at +this time of night. Come nearer and let me see you," cried the officer, +who had just marched in with a detachment of troops as Hal and Gerald +entered the town and were moving away from the barricade. "Come, I say, +or we will make it uncomfortable for you, my fine fellows." + +"By Jove! What are we to do?" asked Gerald, in a low and anxious voice. +"He orders us to come near so that he may inspect us." + +"The deuce he does! Then we must make the best of a bad matter and go, +for it cannot be helped," Hal answered quickly. "If we attempt to bolt +now they would simple riddle us with bullets. Let us brazen the matter +out, and should our luck fail us, just keep your eye on me, old boy, and +when you see me move make a bolt for the houses." + +"Right. Come along; he's in a hurry." + +Indeed, the Spaniard was accustomed to be obeyed on the instant, and +noticing at once that the two suspicious characters who had caught his +eye hesitated, and stood talking in low voices, he reiterated his order +in a loud and commanding tone. + +"Now, who are you?" he demanded fiercely, when they had approached. +"Turn your faces to the light that I may see you. Fellows of your sort +love the darkness, it seems to me, and slink along in the shadows." + +"We are two of the people of Santiago who work in the stores," Gerald +replied quietly. "We have been a short way out into the country to see a +friend." + +"Indeed, and who may he be?" was the haughty answer. "I do not like the +ring of your words, my fine fellow. Ha! What is this? You are both too +fair for men of our race. Here, sentry, bring along a lantern. There is +no seeing with this smoky affair that hangs to the pole. Wait, though. +My men, march these two birds beneath the lamp yonder. Then we shall be +able to make sure of them." + +Hal listened to the conversation with his eye fixed upon the Spaniard's +face, and though he did not understand what passed between him and +Gerald, yet the tones of suspicion and the commanding, bullying voice +told him that all was not well. + +"What is the trouble?" he whispered in Gerald's ear as they stood facing +the officer. + +"We are to be marched beneath the lamp," replied his friend rapidly. "He +suspects us, and is certain to discover that we are not Spaniards." + +"Then we'll settle the matter for him by making a bolt," Hal answered +quietly. "There is a house directly opposite, and the door is ajar. Now, +are you ready, old boy? Then, rush for it." + +At that moment the Spaniard approached still closer, and, grasping Hal +by the arm, called upon his men to close up and surround the strangers. +Our hero did not hesitate. Stepping back a pace, he drove his fist with +all his force in the officer's face, and sent him sprawling to the +ground. Then he dashed forward, and, gripping the nearest soldier by the +waist, flung him against his comrades with a jar that scattered them, +and threw them into confusion. Next moment he was rushing towards the +house, and though the Spaniards raised their rifles, and pulled the +triggers recklessly, nothing happened, for they had not expected +trouble when they marched down to the barricade, and had, therefore, +neglected to place cartridges in the breeches. The omission probably +saved Hal's life, for, though taken by surprise, and staggered by the +force with which their comrade had been flung against them, the soldiers +would have picked him off with the greatest ease had their weapons been +loaded, for the range was not more than twenty yards, and a moving +figure is an easy target at such a distance. However, fortune was +favoring Hal, for he escaped injury, though for a moment it was very +doubtful whether it was possible. A few seconds later he had darted into +the house, and had flung the door to with a bang. + +"Quick! We must get out of this at once," he cried, catching Gerald by +the sleeve. "To the back door for your life!" + +Hastening through the rooms, they searched for an exit at the back, but +failed to find one. Then they turned their attention to the windows, +and, forcing one of them open, leapt out without hesitation. There was a +narrow yard behind the house, which was inclosed by a high wall, but the +two lads made nothing of it. With a spring they grasped the top, and +hoisted themselves up. Then they dropped to the ground on the farther +side, and took to their heels, stumbling blindly across gardens and +bamboo fences, till at last they emerged once more upon the road. + +"This will do for us," gasped Hal. "Listen! Those fellows are at work on +the house, and isn't the officer angry! By George! I am not surprised, +for I gave him a tremendous crack." + +They stood still for a moment, crouching close beneath a hedge, and +distinctly heard a crash as the door, which they had bolted behind them, +was broken in. Then the voice of the Spaniard was heard shouting angry +orders to his men. + +"He is telling them to search every corner," said Gerald, with a laugh. +"A pity he did not send them round to the back." + +"Perhaps," agreed Hal. "But I can tell you, old man, that it was lucky +for us. I don't know what these beggars would do if they captured us; +but we must recollect that, though we may not have any part in this +quarrel between the two nations, yet we are enemies to them, and those +who belong to the nationality of their opponents, and who attempt to +enter Santiago without a pass, are nothing more nor less than spies in +the eyes of the garrison." + +"For whom death is the reward," interposed Gerald serenely. "Yes, old +chap, you need not tell me about it. I am well aware of the ugly +position into which we have fallen." + +"Then let us move on at once," said Hal. "As soon as they find that the +house is deserted, and that the birds have flown, there will be a +tremendous outcry, and a hot search will be made. I propose that we make +straight away for the wharves alongside which the shipping is to be +found." + +Accordingly, they took to their heels, and ran down the road. Then they +turned into another, and were hurrying along it, when they heard a +whistle behind them. It was shrill and piercing, and was at once taken +up and repeated on either side of them and in front. Then, to their +astonishment and dismay, a bright spot suddenly rose up and flashed from +the edge of the harbor, and a broad electric beam swept rapidly and +silently on its way towards them. + +"The searchlight!" exclaimed Hal. "Down into the shade at once, or we +shall be discovered. These fellows are proving far more wide awake than +I had imagined them to be. I should say that they have telephones from +all the outlying stations and barricades, which enable them to +communicate with the people in charge of the light." + +And, indeed, this was the case. Balked in his endeavor to trace the two +suspicious characters who had disappeared into the house after violently +assaulting him, the Spanish officer had at once rushed to the barricade, +and had sent messages along the wires to other parts. Then, too, the +outlying pickets had been warned by the blowing of whistles, which was +evidently a previously arranged signal in case of trouble occurring. +Before even the searchlight had burst into the night or commenced to +revolve, Hal and Gerald were entirely surrounded by a cordon of vigilant +men, few of whom knew exactly what was happening, though all could guess +that someone was near at hand whom it was desirable to capture. And the +electric light would help them. Meanwhile, they would stay in some dark +spot, and follow the rays, hoping to catch sight of the fugitives as +they darted from side to side in the endeavor to escape them. A dark +figure crouching beneath a tree or hedge would satisfy them, and on the +instant, up would fly the rifle to the shoulder, there would be just a +second's pause to correct the aim, and then--bang!--the hapless fellow +would spring into the air with hands outstretched, to fall next second +doubled into an inert heap. Oh, yes! it was simple, and an extremely +diverting sport to those who had themselves no danger to fear. + +As for Hal and Gerald, their desperate position filled them with +consternation, for as they ran hither and thither in the vain endeavor +to fly from the sweeping beams, the snap of twigs and the rustle of +leaves brushed on one side were followed by the sharp crack of rifles +fired at random in that direction. Perhaps there was no great danger to +them in that; but still, the bullets flew unpleasantly near, and sent +them running again, hunting them like hares from point to point. +Suddenly, as they crossed an open space, the searchlight fell full upon +them, and instantly the surrounding darkness was lit up by the flash of +many rifles. Ping! ping! ping! The shots rang out with startling +loudness, and the bullets hummed and pelted through the air overhead. + +"Halt there, and surrender!" a voice cried from the trees. "If you move +a step farther away I will shoot you." + +"We are caught, and must make the best of it," said Hal to Gerald, with +a groan. "Tell them that we give in, old fellow." + +Holding his hands above his head, Gerald did as he was asked. Then they +stood still in a patch of brilliant light, which was made all the more +glaring by the contrast of thick darkness all around. A few minutes +later some Spanish soldiers advanced towards them, rifle in hand, and, +forming a ring round the lads, marched them away, their path lit up all +the while by the electric light which followed every movement. Passing +down the street, they at length came to a large building, into which the +prisoners were at once taken. + +"Sit down there, and do not stir a finger, or you will be shot," said +the sergeant who was in charge of the party, indicating a rough bench +with a curt nod of his head. "I will go inside and ask his excellency +the colonel to interview you. By the time he is ready, those who warned +us from the barricade will have arrived to give their evidence; and +then, my friends, it will be a case of a rope, a friendly branch, and +plenty of air to dance on." + +He glanced at his captives, favoring them with a malicious grin as he +outlined their probable end. Then he went to a door close at hand, and, +having knocked upon it, entered, and closed it behind him. + +"I suppose he has gone to explain matters," said Hal coolly. "Keep up +your pecker, Gerald. The case looks precious bad, but we'll pull +through, depend upon it." + +"Right. I hope we may. But things look ugly. That pleasant gentleman who +has just done talking to me is good enough to tell me that we shall soon +be hanged. If it comes to that, Hal, why, we must face it out, and die +as those at the hacienda would have us do." + +He looked into his companion's face and smiled bravely, for Gerald was +determined to show his friend that he, too, possessed a fund of pluck +which would carry him through an unpleasant difficulty. + +"We will, old boy," Hal answered cheerily; "but let us hope that it will +not come to that. Hallo! Who's this?" + +At this moment an officer, who was dressed in the usual Spanish uniform, +emerged from the inner room, and was walking hurriedly across to the +door, being bent evidently upon the performance of some special duty, +when his eye fell upon Hal and Gerald. Almost instantly a startled cry +escaped him, and he sprang backwards in astonishment. + +"What! You!" he exclaimed, in tones of surprise, surveying them with an +air of delight. "You two from the hacienda! Idiots! You have played into +my hands. Men, close round your prisoners, and take the best care of +them, for I can vouch for it that they are Americans. They are spies, +and have come here to find out our secrets." + +He strode towards them, and grasping Hal's hat, tore it from his head. +Then he laughed sardonically in his face, and, with a triumphant glance +at the two prisoners, turned upon his heel, and re-entered the room from +which he had emerged a minute before. + +"What bad luck! What hard lines!" exclaimed Hal, with something +approaching a groan. "That fellow José d'Arousta again!" + +It was, indeed, an unfortunate meeting, and one fraught with the +greatest peril for Hal and his friend. They were prisoners, and +practically under a charge of spying upon the enemy; but for all that, a +minute or more before, the aspect of affairs had not been altogether +hopeless. How changed it was now! The very man of all others in Santiago +whom it was most desirable that they should not meet had run up against +them, had recognized them, and now, burning to avenge a private +grievance, had promptly denounced them as spies. No wonder that Hal +shuddered. Across his mind flitted the recollection of Mr. Brindle's +tale of the _Virginius_, and of the fate meted out to her hapless +crew--captured at night, condemned, and promptly shot at dawn. That was +the sequence of events; and what was to prevent a similar fate from +befalling them? + +"The letter! Of course, the letter which Mr. Brindle gave me," exclaimed +Hal, aloud, as if Gerald had been following the train of thoughts which +had been running through his mind. + +"Why that letter?" asked the latter, looking at him in astonishment. +"What are you talking about, old fellow?" + +"I was wondering what we could do to prove our identity, and the +innocent intention we had in coming here. José d'Arousta, you may be +sure, will not let such a golden opportunity of revenge slip by without +making the utmost use of it. He will proclaim us as spies, and if you +will only take the trouble to look at matters as they appear to others, +you will admit that that is the most natural conclusion for any Spaniard +to arrive at. War is declared, and, indeed, exists, between Spain and +America; and no doubt the whole of the island of Cuba, including the +towns, is under martial law. You are the son of a naturalized American, +and I his overseer. We are discovered at night in Santiago, and when +called upon to surrender, we fly from the soldiers. Naturally, we shall +be put down as spies who have come to see what defensive arrangements +have been made, so as to be able to communicate them to our friends. But +the letter which your father gave me will exonerate us. It states in +clear terms that we are endeavoring to leave for Tampa, and tells for +what purpose. Do you see, old boy? We put a spoke in D'Arousta's wheel +which I fancy will upset the whole apple-cart, so far as he is +concerned." + +"Splendid! I am relieved to hear it," cried Gerald. "I'll be honest, and +tell you that I was beginning to feel in a blue funk; but now, of +course, it will be all right, and we have nothing to fear." + +"Ye-e-s, perhaps," Hal answered doubtfully. "But someone will have to +pay for that officer's broken nose. I hit him heavily, I can assure you, +and fairly laid him out. Hush! The door is opening." + +At this moment José d'Arousta pushed his head into the outer room, and +signaled to the sergeant. + +"Bring in the prisoners," he said in triumphant tones, "and see that you +surround them, for these foreigners are capable of playing the maddest +tricks, and might throw themselves upon his excellency if you were to +relax your watchfulness." + +Shouldering their rifles, two of the soldiers grasped Hal and Gerald by +the arm; then the others took up their positions in front and behind, +and, at an order from the sergeant, the party marched into the room. It +was a large, bare compartment, dimly lighted by a single oil lamp +standing upon a table in the center. The atmosphere was thick with the +fumes of burning oil and stale tobacco smoke, and even a widely opened +window failed to clear it and make it more pleasant for those who were +there. + +Seated behind the table was a middle-aged officer, with stern but not +unkindly features. A clerk in military attire stood at the desk beside +him, and was taking down a letter at his dictation. + +"These are the prisoners, then--the very first we have taken, I +understand," said the officer, suddenly looking up and closely +scrutinizing Hal and Gerald. "Who are they? Why have they been taken? +Where is the evidence?" + +"Captain Volaga is the chief witness against these spies," answered José +d'Arousta, stepping forward from the shadow, "and I am the next, your +excellency. They are known to me as Americans. But it would be better, +perhaps, if my brother-in-arms told his tale first." + +"Americans! Ah, they look it! Then we will employ their language. We who +have lived in these parts soon pick up English, and, if we use it, all +will be able to understand. Come, what are their names, and where do +they hail from?" + +The colonel turned to the lads, and asked them the question in tones +which betrayed little accent. + +At this moment the door of the room opened, and the officer whom Hal had +struck entered with his face bound up, and scarcely more than his eyes +showing. + +"Who is this?" demanded the colonel. + +"I am Captain Volaga, excellency," was the answer, in a voice which +trembled with suppressed rage. "I have come to give my evidence against +these men." + +"Then step forward, and tell me first of all whether you identify them." + +"Yes, excellency, they are the same," the officer replied, looking at +the two prisoners with no friendly eyes, "and this young ruffian is the +one who struck me and injured one of my men. I will tell you how it +happened, Señor. The dolt at the barricade passed them through without +question; but I was sharper. Seeing them stealing beneath a lamp, and +being suspicious of them, I called to the rogues, and ordered them to +come to me so that I might find out who they were. Then, without +provocation, this one"--and he pointed at Hal with the end of his sword, +favoring him at the same time with an angry glare--"struck me violently +in the face, and followed up the attack by hurling one of my men against +his comrades. Both then ran from us into a house standing near at hand, +and when we searched it they were gone." + +"Indeed! I trust that you are not greatly hurt, Señor Capitan," the +colonel answered. "But, surely, your men were armed? How, then, did +these prisoners escape? One is only a boy, and the other cannot be +twenty yet. It is strange to hear that an officer and several of his +Majesty's soldiers were insufficient to capture them." + +It was, indeed, a peculiar tale, real though it was, and it scarcely +redounded to the credit of the officer. He had no answer to give to his +chief's questions, but stood there, a look of bitter hatred upon his +face. + +"Well, now for your story, Señor José d'Arousta," said the colonel. +"What do you know of these lads?" + +"They come from the hacienda Eldorado, and are Americans, and therefore +spies, your excellency. Search them, and I am sure that you will find +that they are armed." + +He turned to the men who were holding the prisoners, and gave them an +order. Instantly they ran their hands over them, and produced the +revolvers which both lads carried. + +"You see," continue José, with a sneer, "they meant to look after their +own safety. Spying is a dangerous game to play!" + +"And now, what have you to say?" asked the colonel courteously, turning +to Hal. "A very serious charge is made against you. First of all, you +are Americans, it seems. Then you are discovered slinking into the +town, and when called upon to surrender and give an account of +yourselves, you attack an officer, and contrive to escape from him in +spite of his escort of armed men. You are captured finally, and are +found to be carrying arms. An explanation is needed." + +"And I shall be glad to give it," said Hal quietly. "We come, as this +man beside me has stated, from the hacienda Eldorado; but we are not +spies. The war is nothing to us, but our safety, and that of our +friends, is another matter. Only yesterday, your excellency, we were +attacked by a band of cut-throats, who nearly relieved us of all we +possessed. Our mission now is to go to Tampa, and return with negroes +from Mr. Brindle's other estate, who will help to defend the hacienda. +We entered this town for one reason, and only one, namely, to get a +passage on a steamer sailing to Tampa." + +"The hacienda attacked!" exclaimed the colonel doubtfully; while the +face of Captain Volaga showed a smile of insolent incredulity. + +"Yes, señor," Hal answered calmly. "Attacked late in the afternoon, and +under the leadership of this man." He pointed to José d'Arousta, and +looked him sternly in the face. + +"Ha, ha, ha! He will accuse me of being an American spy next, Señor +Colonel!" cried José. "You can see that he is fabricating a tale. It is +a splendid cock-and-bull story from end to end." + +"So it would appear," the colonel replied. "Accuse one of my officers of +brigandage! It is monstrous--ridiculous! Young sir, you do your cause no +good by speaking in this wild manner. Confess at once that you and the +boy are spying, for it may very well make your sentence lighter in the +end." + +He looked at Hal sternly and yet kindly, for in his heart the colonel +was an easy-going fellow, and given to mercy if it were possible. + +"Come," he said again, in a persuasive voice; "I have sons of your age +who play pranks at times, though never one so dangerous and foolhardy as +this. Declare to me that you came to the town out of curiosity, and to +see what preparations we were making for the Americans." + +"Your excellency, we cannot do as you ask," Hal answered firmly. "What I +have stated is absolutely true, and if only you will favor me by reading +the letter which I have in my pocket, you will be assured of it." + +"Give it to me. One of you take it from his coat," said the colonel +shortly. + +The order was obeyed by José, and the letter handed to the colonel. +Instantly he tore the envelope open, and scanned the contents. + +"Yes, it is as you stated," he said. "I am more inclined to believe +you." + +"Pshaw! And you will allow two dangerous spies to escape because they +are of the same age as your sons!" exclaimed José d'Arousta. "It is +madness! It is folly!" + +He had been standing close beside the table, following the interview +between Hal and the colonel with the greatest attention; and now, seeing +that it had turned in favor of the prisoners, he started forward, and +interposed in a way which soon brought him a reprimand. + +"Señor, you forget yourself, and in whose presence you stand!" the +colonel cried angrily, turning upon him. "Have a care, Señor Capitan, +for I am your superior, and should you see fit to address me again in +such an unbecoming manner, I will place you under arrest. Perhaps it +might meet your deserts," he added significantly, "for there are tales +told in Santiago of the doings of José d'Arousta and his irregulars. I +have even heard it said that they are brigands. Have a care, I tell you, +for I might even go so far as to look into this strange accusation as +to an attack upon Eldorado." + +José had met his match. He turned pale at the colonel's words, and +retired from the table looking downcast. But his assurance quickly +returned. + +"Excellency," he exclaimed, "your pardon if I was too outspoken; but I +wish our country all that is well, and therefore I say again that these +two men are known to me. They are spies. Everything points to it, señor. +If not, then why should they attempt to escape, particularly when one of +them carries a letter, the contents of which will clear them? Depend +upon it, that note was there for a set purpose, and to be used only as a +last resource. Think of their revolvers, too. Pah! Were I in your place +I should give them till dawn, when they should face a corporal's picket, +and meet the fate of all who take to the calling of a spy." + +He ended an impassioned speech with a glare of hatred at Hal, and then +stood closely scrutinizing the colonel's features, to see, if possible, +what effect he had made, turning, however, every other moment to look +again at Hal, with eyes which even now were beginning to light up with +triumph. + +As for our hero and his friend, they stood there amongst the soldiers, +watching every movement and expression, and wondering vaguely what would +be the end of the interview. + +"I fear very much that you are right, Señor José," said the colonel at +length. "The evidence is too strong, and shows without a shadow of doubt +that the prisoners entered Santiago for one purpose only. It is sad that +we should commence the war with an execution; but it cannot be avoided. +We must protect ourselves, for if we were to allow these two lads to +leave unpunished, others would be encouraged. For spying, death is the +penalty. But I will not take the responsibility upon my own shoulders +for an act which in my heart I consider to be harsh and unjust. Men +should be treated as men; but to apply the same penalties to +irresponsible, impetuous lads is cruel in the extreme. Captain Volaga, +you will escort the prisoners to the cells in Morro Castle, and arrange +for their refreshment. See also that blankets are given them, for the +nights are getting cold. Here is a note to the officer in command. +Deliver it to him personally. I will now cable to Havana and ask for +instructions, but I fear that I can give no hope. Spies, whether men or +boys, must meet the same fate." + +He rose from his seat, and, with a wave of the hand, signified that the +interview was over. + +The soldiers at once closed round Hal and Gerald, and, at the officer's +order, marched out of the room. Then they halted outside, while José +d'Arousta and the injured captain conversed in low tones. Evidently some +satisfactory arrangement was come to, for they nodded and smiled in the +most pleasant manner, and when parting treated each other to an +elaborate salute. Then José approached the prisoners, and, halting in +front of them, addressed them in low tones which could not be overheard. + +"Señores, who could have guessed that in such a short space of time the +tables would turn so completely!" he said, with a triumphant smile. "But +yesterday I was a prisoner in your hands, under a threat of death; and +now you are in a similar condition, with this one difference: I escaped +to avenge the insult, while you will live only till to-morrow's sun is +up. Think of it! Dream of it! When the dawn comes, and you are led out +into the cold, your end will await you. Consideration will be shown, I +promise you, for some minutes shall be granted for quiet reflection. And +then, Señor Marchant, if you will but raise your eyes, you will find +that the ever-faithful José attends you, and will be ready, should you +desire it, to carry your adieus to the fair Señora Dora. Believe me, we +will weep together for your loss." + +He smiled a cruel, vindictive smile, and looked hard at Hal to see what +effect the words had had, but only to be disappointed. Not a muscle of +the young fellow's face moved as he returned the stare of the Spaniard +with one that was as proud and disdainful as it was possible to be. Then +his features relaxed, and he smiled. + +"The man is a bold villain," he said, with a laugh, turning to Gerald. +"When we are surrounded and held by the soldiers, so that he need fear +no punishment, he does his utmost to goad us into fury. Come along, old +boy; we have better things to do than to listen to such a fellow." + +Taking Gerald by the arm, he signified to the sergeant that he was +ready, and the order being given to the soldiers, they marched out of +the building, leaving José d'Arousta biting his lips with vexation. + +A large crowd was waiting outside, hoping to catch sight of the first +captives of the war. The news that they were spies, who had entered +Santiago in search of information, had been conveyed to them, so that +the appearance of the two lads was greeted with a storm of shrill cries. + +"Kill them! Shoot them!" the mob shouted, rushing towards the party of +soldiers who surrounded Hal and Gerald. But a line of troops drawn up +outside the house interposed, and thrust them back. Then, forming up on +either side, the Spaniards marched them off to the fortress which stands +perched high up on one side of the long entrance to the harbor, and +which goes by the name of the Morro Castle. Half an hour later the gates +were reached, and they marched in, leaving the crowd outside. Hal and +Gerald were led up a long flight of stone steps, through a dark +corridor, and afterwards up more stairs. Finally, they came to a +gallery, and were halted in front of an iron-studded door, at the +keyhole of which a soldier fumbled. + +A minute later they were thrust inside and the door was closed upon them +with a clang that sent an echo ringing through the old castle. + +"And so ends our little adventure," said Hal, seating himself upon a +bench. "We came to Santiago with only friendly thoughts in our hearts. +We were captured and accused of spying. The population jeered at us, and +showed so much hatred that it took a whole regiment to put us in prison. +And we are in reality two harmless young fellows. Well, it just settles +the matter. Gerald, if we are here to-morrow we shall die. We must +escape, and as the Spaniards have declared themselves our enemies, we +will do our utmost to thwart them." + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +A DASH FOR LIBERTY + + +Desperate indeed was the position in which Hal and Gerald found +themselves, and well might their usually exuberant spirits be damped, +and their stock of courage ooze away at the dark prospect before them. +Even as they sat there in their cell, the Spanish colonel who had +interviewed them was probably dispatching his telegram to Havana; and +how would it read? "We have captured two Americans, who are probably +spies. They entered the town undetected, and when discovered and called +upon to surrender, showed resistance, injuring an officer. They finally +fell into our hands, and were found to be bearing arms. What shall we do +with them?" + +That in all probability would be the message, and it wanted little +imagination to sketch the answer. Across the wires would flash the +words, "Shoot them." + +Hal sat down upon a stone bench beneath a grated window, and thought the +matter out. Then he rose to his feet, and thrusting his hands into his +pockets, stared out into the night. It was as black as ink, and at first +only myriads of stars shone through the iron bars. But on casting his +eyes downward, he saw other and bigger spots of light, while the +reflection from them trailed towards him across a sheet of water that +rippled slightly. + +"The harbor!" he exclaimed. "The entrance to the shipping basin of +Santiago. Never before did I feel so much like a bird in a cage. Look at +those vessels, Gerald! They are just what we were in search of, and now +they lie so close below our feet, and yet, for all that, so hopelessly +far away. But we will not be beaten. I said that we must escape, and we +will! I tell you that we will, however great the difficulty. Come here, +old boy, and see what you can from the window; then we'll sit down and +discuss the matter." + +Gerald promptly stepped beside his friend, and, clasping the iron bars, +thrust his head as far through them as possible. + +"Hallo! What's this?" he cried. "Hal, they've turned the old searchlight +on again." + +He moved to one side to make room for Hal, who at once resumed his place +at the window and gazed out. Away to the left a bright beam of light was +stabbing the darkness from the far inland edge of the harbor. It swept +steadily to the right, illuminating the sphere upon which it fell so +clearly that everything within it was visible for a moment, then +disappeared, while a fresh scene flashed into view, only in its turn to +give place to another. They followed the broad beam as it fell upon +harbor and town, and then upon the open country. In a few minutes it had +reached the entrance to the harbor, and, shooting like a bar of silver +beneath the Morro Castle, and under the very feet of the prisoners, lit +up the swelling ocean beyond, by chance falling upon one of the ugly +torpedo boats which Hal had seen that morning. + +"That just shows what kind of a chance we should have had," said Gerald, +nodding towards the craft. + +"I don't know that I agree with you," Hal answered thoughtfully. "We +know that she is there, and with all lights dowsed we might easily slip +by her." + +"But you speak as though we were already on a ship," exclaimed Gerald. +"Of course, it is out of the question." + +Hal did not reply, but followed the searchlight with the closest +attention. It moved from the harbor mouth, searching every corner and +crevice of the rocks as it swept inland again. Soon it passed over a +landing jetty and illuminated a small launch which was lying moored +alongside. + +"See that?" exclaimed Hal, seizing Gerald by the shoulder to attract his +attention. + +"What? The launch?" + +"Yes, old chap; it will do for us." + +"But hold on! Look here, Hal, what the dickens are you talking about?" +Gerald asked, as if in some doubt as to Hal's condition of mind. "Man +alive, we are prisoners--jailbirds in the Morro Castle!" + +"Quite so; and to-morrow, if we are still here, we shall be prisoners +who are about to die. Listen to me, Gerald. We have but one life +apiece, and may as well make a fight for it. If we are worsted, where +will be the difference? It can mean nothing worse in the end, for what +sentence can be more severe than that of death? I am determined to get +out of this, for life is very dear, and I mean to cling to mine. Sit +down while I talk to you. There, don't interrupt me till I have +finished, then you can tell me exactly what you think. Now, the position +is plain and straightforward. We must escape if we wish to live. Look +round the cell and say if it is possible to break these bars, or knock a +hole through walls, ceiling, or floor. It is out of the question, and so +also is the door. Then we must turn to the jailer. I had my eyes well +open when we came in here, and I noticed that the man was new at the +work. He could not find the key, and fumbled at the lock. If he is +strange to prison life, he may well be less suspicious of his charges, +and less expectant of danger. Now, we will do our best to collar him, +and I've an idea how it is to be done. You will lie there and pretend +to be ill. Just groan and kick up a fuss to your heart's content, while +I knock and kick at the door, and shout for the jailer. Then, when he +comes in, and, as will be natural, goes across the cell to look at you, +I'll jump on him, and with your help we'll tie him up and gag him. +Follow, old chap?" + +"By Jove! Follow? Ra-a-ather! Of course I do; and, what's more, I'm +ready for the game. After all, as you said, capture for the second time +can bring no worse penalty." + +"That done," continued Hal calmly, "we must use our wits to get out of +the castle. We've blankets to make into ropes, and I suggest that we +begin to tear them into strips at once, for we shall want something for +the jailer. Once away from the castle, we'll sneak down to the launch, +and get up steam. Probably she is deserted at night, but, in any case, +it is scarcely likely that more than one man will be aboard. He would +have to be dealt with of course, and then we'd just slip our moorings +and make a dash for the sea. There, now, what have you to say?" + +"Say? Why, that I am with you through thick and thin," exclaimed Gerald, +in tones of enthusiasm. "If we only manage to get through we shall have +had an adventure to remember and talk about to the end of our lives." + +"That's so," Hal agreed. "But now for the blankets." + +Sitting side by side on the stone seat, they soon tore them into long +strips, which they twisted and knotted together, and afterwards wound in +lengths round their waists. Then they set apart a few pieces as lashings +for their prospective prisoner, and fashioned a rough gag. + +"That's finished," remarked Hal with satisfaction. "And now for the +other part." + +"Hush! Someone is coming along the passage," whispered Gerald. "There, I +can hear footsteps plainly." + +Hal darted to the door, and, listening eagerly, distinguished a distant +step, evidently of some heavily shod foot which was slowly coming +nearer. + +"Quick! Onto the bench and sham that you are ill," he cried, turning to +Gerald. "I believe the jailer is going to pay us a visit." + +This, in fact, was the case, for scarcely had Gerald thrown himself upon +the low bench of stone, and commenced to give vent to the most +heartrending groans, when heavy boots came to a halt outside the cell, +and a key was heard grating in the lock. Then the door swung open, and +the soldier who had admitted them when they first arrived at the castle +entered, bearing on his arm a basket which contained a bottle of native +wine and some bread and meat. He stopped in the middle of the cell, and +looked wonderingly at Gerald. + +"What's amiss? What ails the lad?" he asked in Spanish. + +"Oh, I've such pain. Help me," groaned Gerald, in quavering tones. + +Curious to learn what was the matter, the jailer placed his basket on +the floor, and, crossing the bench, bent over Gerald. In an instant the +prisoner, who had been in seeming agony before, had thrown his arms +round the man's neck, drawing his face so tightly against his chest that +he could not utter a sound, and was almost stifled. Then Hal sprang +across the cell, and, with a hasty hitch, secured the jailer's arms +behind his back. To bind his legs was a different matter, however, for +he fought like a wild cat, and, wrenching his head free, gave vent to a +loud shout. But he did not repeat it, for, conscious that their lives +depended on the man's silence, Hal grasped him by the hair, and brought +his head against the stonework with a bang. + +"That should keep him quiet," he said, with a gasp. "Now for the gag." + +Gerald had it ready, and before very long their prisoner lay on the +floor, bound hand and foot, and incapable of speech. + +"The first scene is ended satisfactorily," said Hal, eying him with no +little pleasure; "and now for the second. Get hold of that basket, old +man; grub will be welcome later on. I'll make free with the bundle of +keys which the fellow carried. Now, out we go." + +They gave another backward glance to see that the man was securely +bound, and then stepped into the corridor, closing the door gently after +them. + +"Where now?" whispered Gerald. + +"Follow me. We'll take the road that we know," was Hal's answer, "Keep +close, and whatever you do, don't make a sound. If anyone runs up +against us, go for him like the wind, and hammer him into silence. We +have a chance before us that must not be lost." + +He at once stepped forward, and gaining the stairs, descended +cautiously. No one was in the lower gallery, nor on the second flight of +steps, and the two escaping prisoners reached the door of the castle +without hearing so much as a sound. It was locked, and many anxious +moments were expended ere the right key could be found. Then the +ponderous door swung open slowly, and they emerged into the castle yard, +round which many lights were flashing from the windows of the soldiers' +quarters. Taking Gerald by the hand, Hal led him to the darkest corner, +where they crouched, listening for any noise, and wondering whether the +jailer's cry had been heard, and the alarm given. But not a sound +disturbed the silence, save the stamp of a distant sentry plodding up +and down upon his lonely beat, and coughing occasionally as the cool +night air entered his lungs. + +"All seems well," whispered Hal; "and no one heard the cry, or we should +have had the soldiers after us already. Let us get out of this yard, and +down to the harbor." + +It was easier to propose than to accomplish, for no doubt, sentries were +stationed on the walls. The yard itself was situated on the steep side +of a hill, leading upward from the town to the castle, and, crouching +where they were, Hal and Gerald could look along the roofs of many of +the tiny houses which stood inside the walls, into the streets of +Santiago. Suddenly the revolving searchlight turned once more in their +direction, and in rushing behind a projecting buttress to escape it, Hal +tripped over a bucket, and fell headlong, sending it clattering over the +stones. + +Instantly there was a loud challenge from the sentry, to which no answer +was given. Then, as they crouched in the shadow, they heard first one +and then some twenty soldiers clatter from the house close to which they +were lying, and run into the square. + +"What was that noise?" the sentry demanded in Spanish. "Who caused the +racket over in yonder corner?" + +"Where? In what part?" asked one of the men. + +"Close beside your quarters. The searchlight swept round, and suddenly a +bucket or something of the sort was kicked. Go and look for me, one of +you." + +"They are coming to search here," said Gerald. "What shall we do?" + +"Make a bolt into their own quarters," Hal answered promptly. "We +escaped in that way before, and may well do so again." + +He started to his feet, and, creeping along beside the wall, peeped in +at an open window. The room was empty, and only faintly illuminated by a +flickering tallow candle. Hal at once climbed in, and assisted Gerald to +follow. Then they crept to the door, and, seeing no one, ran upstairs to +the rooms above, which were also vacant. + +"We shall have to clear from here," said Hal, looking round at the row +of rough pallets which evidently served the soldiers for beds. "What +about the roof? Perhaps we can reach it this way." + +He ran into a room at the back of the building, and, climbing on to a +window-sill, stretched his arm above his head. It was too short by a +couple of feet, and the gutter looked hopelessly out of reach. Suddenly, +however, he thought of the latticed shutter, and grasping the battens, +and digging his feet in between those below, hoisted himself up. A +moment later he had one hand on the iron gutter, and after that had no +difficulty in clambering on the roof, which ascended at an easy slope. + +"Hand up the grub, Gerald," he said, leaning over the edge and lowering +his voice to a gentle whisper. "That's it. Let go; I've got hold of the +handle. Now, up you come." + +Gerald was as active as a monkey, and quickly climbed to Hal's side, +when the two scrambled along the roof till they arrived at a part where +the coping formed with the sloping tiles a deep angle; and here they lay +full length, settling themselves into the narrow space, and taking +particular pains to make sure that no part of their dress was projecting +over the top. Down below in the yard there was the clatter of many feet +as the soldiers ran round the building. Then the same voice that had +answered the questions of the sentry was heard again, calling loudly. + +"There is a bucket lying over here," the man cried, "but we can see no +trace of anyone. Are you sure you are not mistaken?" + +"I distinctly heard someone fall," was the answer. "Idiot! Do you think +that I could make an error when it occurred so close at hand? Am I not +on duty? One would think that I was a log by the way in which you talk. +Mistaken, indeed! How do you know that it is not those beggarly +prisoners whom we are to waste powder upon to-morrow morning? Perhaps it +is they, and while you chatter and tell your comrade that he does not do +his duty, they may be escaping." + +The sentry bellowed out his words, and snorted with indignation, for his +feelings were evidently hurt at such an accusation. But the other man +was not to be subdued. + +"Escaping? Ridiculous, Santo!" he cried. "They were locked in the cell. +I was one of the guard, and saw it with my own eyes. Perhaps you will +tell me next that these American spies are capable of flying through a +locked door!" + +"I tell you that I am sure that someone is attempting to get away from +the castle, and I believe it to be the two prisoners who came here this +evening," the sentry answered angrily. "Give the alarm, comrade, and +hurry off to make sure of the matter. Do not let the cause of our +country suffer because we cannot agree." + +The soldier in the yard below grumbled; but, urged on by his comrades, +who seemed to agree with the sentry, he hastened to the castle, and Hal +and his companion heard him running up the flight of stone steps. + +"Now there will be a fine hullabaloo," said the former quietly. "I vote +we stick closely in this hiding-place, and do not allow ourselves to be +scared by all the noise and fuss which they are bound to kick up. Once +the escape is discovered the alarm will fly all over the town, and +search-parties will be about. We are their first prisoners, and you may +be sure they will not allow us to slip through their fingers without a +struggle. But no one will think of looking for us here, and we have the +great advantage of lying in a hollow to which the searchlight cannot +penetrate. Half a minute, though. I'll just take a look over the side, +and see where we are." + +He raised his head cautiously, and, carefully keeping well away from the +stone coping, took a good look over the side. + +"Good luck!" he exclaimed, with some show of excitement, suddenly +sinking to his place again. "If only we can find some means of fastening +our ropes, we can drop directly over the wall. Keep where you are, +Gerald, while I see what can be done." + +He rose to his knees, and crept up the sloping roof to something which +looked in the darkness like a chimney-stack. It proved to be what he +thought, and in a twinkling he produced the end of the rope, made from +torn-up blankets, which he had wound round his waist. Making a big loop +in it, he slipped it over the brick-work and descended again. + +"There," he said, with an excited chuckle, "I've fixed the rope, so that +if our presence here is suspected we shall have a chance for freedom. +Hush! What is that fellow saying?" + +It was the soldier again, who, emerging from the castle at this moment, +ran down the steps in such a hurry as to lose his balance and roll over +and over into the yard. He picked himself up with an oath, and rushed +towards the sentry. + +"The prisoners have escaped!" he shouted, in high falsetto. "When I came +to the cell the door was not locked, and inside Alberto lay insensible, +and bound hand and foot. Quick! Ring the alarm bell, one of you." + +A few moments later the deep notes were booming out over the town and +castle, ringing the alarm so that all in Santiago should be on the +look-out. That notice of it was taken was at once evident, for the +change was wonderful. Shouts suddenly rang out from all quarters; and, +as if thrown into a state of uncontrollable excitement by the commotion, +the searchlight fluttered here and there, now flashing into the sky, and +next moment burying its broad shaft of dazzling light in the deep waters +of the harbor. + +Then an officer ran hastily from his quarters in the castle, and called +upon the soldiers to fall in. + +"Get to your ranks at once," he cried, "and let each sergeant take his +section and search a portion of the castle. Quick! There will be trouble +if these prisoners get clear away." + +Crouching in their hiding-place, Hal and Gerald listened eagerly, and +heard the search-parties hurrying to and fro. One actually came into the +very house on the roof of which they were lying. + +"What is the use of searching here?" they heard one of the men grumble. +"It is folly to expect to find them in our own quarters, for we only +descended a few seconds before the alarm was given. Take us somewhere +else, sergeant, for we shall be wasting our time and breath here." + +They went away at once, and the two prisoners breathed more freely. + +"We are safe now," said Hal, with a sigh of relief; "but we shall have +to lie here as quiet as mice till the din dies down. Can you swim, +Gerald?" + +"Yes, rather! But why?" + +"Because the best and safest way to reach the launch will be to slip +down from here into the water, and strike straight for the jetty +alongside which she is moored. We shall have to keep to the harbor, too; +for to get on the landing-stage or to attempt to walk along it would +result in certain capture. It's going to be a most trying undertaking, I +can tell you, old man." + +They lapsed into silence, and for two hours lay in the gutter listening +to the noises which came from every side. But, little by little, the +sounds of shouting in the distance and the hubbub in the courtyard of +the castle died down, and finally the town regained its accustomed +quietness. Even the searchlight seemed to have recovered its equanimity, +for it now revolved smoothly, occasionally, however, darting to some +particular spot as some fresh alarm was sounded. + +"All is clear beneath us, and I fancy we had better be starting," said +Hal at length. "We have a great deal before us, and we must not forget +that before many hours have passed dawn will be breaking. But a fellow +can't do much on an empty stomach, so I vote that we tuck in at the +grub. Then we shall feel more inclined for the job, and can set out for +the launch with courage raised to the highest." + +It was a good suggestion, and Gerald, who was nothing loath, and, +indeed, longing for something to eat, dragged the basket forward and +placed it between them, while Hal searched for his knife. There was a +mug lying beside the bottle, and he at once made preparations to quench +his thirst. Placing his hat upon the roof, he put the bottle in it, and +with a sharp blow knocked the neck in two, the glass making no sound as +it fell upon the cloth. Then they divided the meat, and set to work to +devour it eagerly, for both were famishing. + +"There's just one thing to discuss before we start," said Hal. "Shall we +stick to the plan we have prepared, or shall we make back to the +hacienda? For my part, I say no. Decidedly no! In the first place, we +should run a far greater risk of discovery, for we should have to pass +through the town, and get through the pickets who patrol the side that +faces the open country. You may be sure that they are wide awake; and, +indeed, that is the side on which they will be looking out, for who +would expect escaping prisoners to make out to sea? The idea would +appear ridiculous to the average man, and it is the very improbability +that will help us most. Then we have to remember another very important +point. It is known that we hail from the hacienda, and what will be more +natural after our escape than for Eldorado to be favored by a visit from +Spanish troops? If we were foolish enough to return, we should certainly +be captured and hauled back to Santiago, when little chance would be +allowed us to make a second attempt to escape." + +"You're like a lawyer, old boy," Gerald whispered in reply. "I quite see +your point, and I say too, go for the launch tooth and nail, and clear +from the harbor. It is our only chance, and with luck, such as we have +already had to-night, we shall manage it beautifully." + +"Then we stick to the old plan. Shall I go over the side first, or will +you? Perhaps I'd better, for I am the heavier." + +He crawled to the rope and, taking the coiled-up end in his hand, flung +it over the coping. Then, having very cautiously raised his head, and +inspected his surroundings as well as the darkness would permit, he +squeezed Gerald's hand and lowered himself over the wall. It was an +uncanny sensation to be swinging there in the open, uncertain of the +drop beneath, and ignorant as to whether the rope was long enough to +reach to the bottom. But Hal scarcely gave the matter more than a +thought, for his attention was riveted upon the searchlight which had +passed a few moments before. If only it kept steadily upon its course, +they would both be down by the water's edge and in hiding from it before +it came round again. But supposing it commenced its vagaries, and began +to flit to and fro, as if suspecting the presence of the fugitives, and +eager to atone for its previous defeat by discovering them? Well, there +was no ordering its movements, and they must just take their chance and +hope for the best; but in any case they had already gone so far towards +the liberty which they loved, and which meant life to them, that they +would not give in without a struggle. + +Suddenly Hal's feet struck the ground, and he at once relinquished his +hold of the rope and lay down upon the grass, listening for Gerald's +descent. Almost before he expected him he was down by his side. They +shook hands heartily, and then stole down the steep face of the hill +which led to the harbor. + +"Come in here; this will do for us," said Hal in a whisper, drawing his +companion into the shadow of a boat which suddenly barred their way, and +which was propped up on its side. + +They crept right into it, and lay there, full length, waiting with +fluttering hearts for the searchlight to pass. At last it came, seeming +to the lads, in their highly strung condition, to pause inquiringly, as +it lit upon the boat. + +Did the man who worked it suspect that they were there? Would he give +another alarm at once and would the tolling of that castle bell, which +sounded so dismally like a funeral knell, boom out over the town and set +hundreds of eager trackers after the spies? Where could they fly then? +The harbor? No, that would not do. Then where? + +The thoughts buzzed through their heads, and the questions remained +unanswered. But each crept still closer into his shelter, pressing +against the planks as though that would add to his safety. And all the +while their hearts beat a rapid tattoo against their ribs, for they were +conscious that discovery at this moment would blight all their hopes of +escape. But they were frightening themselves unnecessarily, for the beam +sped on its way without an instant's halt, flashing across the water, +and resting for the space of a few seconds upon the launch towards which +they were about to swim. + +"Now for it, Gerald," said Hal shortly. "Off with your coat and boots." + +They kicked the latter off, and, rapidly divesting themselves of the +former, stole down to the water's edge. Fifty yards away the beam of +light was sweeping across the surface of the water, and steadily +increasing the distance between them, leaving all but that part upon +which it fell obscured in dense and impenetrable darkness. Nothing, in +fact, could have been more opportune for Hal and his friend. They slid +gently into the harbor, to find themselves in deep water at once. Then +they threw themselves forward, and struck out boldly for the distant +quay, in the wake of the revolving light. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +WITH THE AMERICAN FLEET + + +It was a long swim that Hal and Gerald had started upon, but +circumstances were in their favor, and they made light of it. The summer +was scarcely at an end, and the water, therefore, was beautifully warm, +so that there was no reason to fear an attack of cramp; and the farther +they moved from the shore, the more they were helped on their course by +a current which, sweeping in from the sea through the long, narrow, +neck-like opening, struck a projecting bluff below the Morro Castle, and +was deflected to the center of the harbor, carrying the swimmers with +it. Halfway across, Hal's hand struck gently against a large iron buoy, +to which life-lines were attached, and which was anchored in mid stream. +He at once turned to Gerald, laying one hand on his shoulder to attract +his attention, while with the other he obtained a firm grasp of one of +the ropes. + +"We'll rest and get our wind here," he said. "Come round to this side, +old boy. It is the farthest from the searchlight, and we shall be hidden +in the shadow. Next time it has safely passed us, we'll make tracks +straight for the launch, and do our best to get on board before the +light revolves in our direction again." + +It was a wise course to pursue, for the beam cast by the electric +lantern had long ago won the race, and was already sweeping the streets +of Santiago, _en route_ for the Morro Castle and the harbor again. Soon +it reached the buoy, appearing to hover over it, just as it had done +five minutes before in the case of the upturned boat. But it only did +so in the imagination of the fugitives, for, in reality, it swept on +without a pause, and went trailing its silent, inquisitive way across +the lonely water. + +"Now is the time," whispered Hal. "When we reach the launch swim to the +after-end, and crawl on board. The cabin is right up in the bows, for I +took particular note of that when watching from the cell." + +Gerald nodded, for floating with one's mouth just clear of the water is +not conducive to much conversation. Then he let go his hold of the +life-line, and closed up to his friend. With steady and powerful +strokes, and without the least sign of haste, they swam through the +water, their eyes fixed upon the opposite shore of the harbor, and on +the shipping as it flashed into sight. Soon a big object rose up black +before them in the darkness, and Hal's hand came in contact with the +stone pier. A few strokes farther on he touched the side of a vessel, +and, stretching high above his head, was able to grasp the gunwale. A +thrill of pleasure at once ran through his frame as he realized that +this must be the launch in which they hoped to escape from the harbor. +To slide along to the rudder was the work of only a few seconds, when +his fingers touched the blades of a screw. He at once obtained a firm +grip of the side, and hoisted himself slowly and gently to the deck, +where he was joined by Gerald directly afterwards. + +"We want a breather. I'm puffed," the latter whispered. + +"Yes, but we cannot take it here," was the answer. "Let us get into the +stoke-hole. Here it is. Come down gently." + +There was a tiny iron ladder leading into a small engine-room and +stoke-hole combined, and both at once slid down this, and sat upon the +floor. + +"Now we can talk," said Hal in a whisper. "But first of all let us +settle the question whether anyone is aboard. Sit where you are, Gerald. +You're a bit blown, and want rest. I'm as fresh as a daisy, and will +just go along to the cabin to see if anyone is there." + +He went to the end of the boiler, and, discovering a piece of oily +waste, carefully lifted the furnace door. A dull glow immediately +escaped, lighting the stoke-hole dimly, and showing at once that it +contained only themselves. + +"Fires banked to last till morning," said Hal in satisfied tones, which +he reduced to little more than a whisper. "That shows that no one +intends to look at them during the night. Let me see. Yes, the boiler is +full, and the pressure gauge shows just a few pounds of steam. No good +to us, though; but we'll soon raise it to bursting-point. Now I'm off." + +He stirred the fire, and silently closed the door. Then he ascended the +tiny ladder, and crawled along the deck till he came to the cabin, which +was roofed with a skylight. Feeling in the darkness for the opening, he +soon discovered a catch, and pulling the door open, descended without +hesitation, but using the utmost caution all the while. It was even +darker down below than on deck, and he therefore stood still, for, if he +had moved forward, he might well have stumbled blindly across someone +sleeping there. But his doubts were quickly set at rest, for the +searchlight again came to the rescue, falling upon the launch, and +sending a flood of brilliant rays through the skylight. + +"Good! It's empty," murmured Hal; "and as it runs right forward into the +bows, and right aft to the engine-room, it is clear that we have the +boat to ourselves. All the better, say I, for every time we have to +silence some fellow we add to our risks; besides, I don't like to be +hammering everyone who comes in our way. But now for steam, and a +glorious run to the sea. Ah, we'll feed the fires till the plates are +red-hot and the funnel melts. Then, when she's trembling with the +pressure of the steam in her boiler, we'll set her for the harbor +mouth." + +He almost clapped his hands in the exuberance of his spirits, for even +the least sanguine would have had to admit that now, indeed, success was +near at hand. But there was plenty of work to be done, and he returned +to the stoke-hole to complete it. + +"We've got to make a move soon," he said. "It must be some while after +midnight, and daylight will be with us about three o'clock. We'll lift +the furnace door again so as to get a good look round. I shall want +plenty of fuel close at hand, but it will not do to move more than can +possibly be helped till we are out of the harbor; for, on a quiet and +still night, sounds, however faint, can be heard a very great distance." + +"And when we are out, what then?" asked Gerald. + +"Just this, old boy. You'll have to be skipper, and get to the wheel. +There is one good point about it, I notice. They've placed it so close +to the entrance above that it will be possible to stand on one of the +lower rungs of the ladder, and steer without showing much more than your +head. No doubt this launch is usually run by one man, who works her +engines and wheel alone. That's why they are placed in such handy +positions. If we are not discovered, all will be as simple as eating a +dinner; but, if we are, then it will be a trifle exciting, and you will +have to look out for the bullets. My job is the engine and the furnace. +I've played the game before, and know something about it. Now, lend a +hand, and go easy, whatever you do. We don't want all those dogs on our +track again, if we can avoid it." + +Lifting pieces of coal in his hands, Hal cast them one by one into the +flames, for to have employed a shovel would have been to run the risk of +discovery. It was slower work, but safer by far, and after all, with two +hard at it, was soon ended. Now and again Hal went to the ladder, and, +standing on one of the lower rungs, put his head up through the opening, +and looked at the funnel. + +"She'll do," he said at last, in tones of satisfaction. "The fuel is +dry, and at present the smoke is scarcely noticeable. Wait till we get +away, and put the steam-blast on. Then there'll be flames spouting into +the sky, and a regular firework display." + +"Yes, and a few shells flying after us," said Gerald, with something +remarkably like an excited chuckle. "That's about what it will be, for I +cannot see how we can hope to slip out without discovery. If the funnel +does not give us away, the searchlight certainly will. But we'll dodge +that if we've any luck. Anyway, we will get out of this, whatever +happens." + +"That's so; we will, old boy, and I fancy it's high time now to be +setting about it. I've never before walked off with property belonging +to somebody else, but this time it's a case of our lives, and, besides, +all's fair, you know." + +"Yes, in love and war, Hal. Hillo! I can hear a shindy somewhere. What's +it all about?" + +Hal darted to the ladder, and, thrusting his head through the opening +above, hung there listening. + +"There are men coming along the quay," he said. "What can they want? +This is the only boat moored over in this direction." + +They looked into each other's faces in the dim light given by the fire, +and each noticed that the other had turned deathly pale. + +"They must be coming here," gasped Gerald. + +"Then we must disappoint them," answered Hal. "Quick! throw off the +for'ard mooring, Gerald. No, not that way; you will get at it sooner by +hopping ashore. Then do the same aft, and jump on board. Quick! hop, I +say; for we have very little time to lose." + +He turned at once to the furnace, and commenced to shovel coal into it +at a rapid pace, keeping his eye all the time fixed on the pressure +gauge. + +"One hundred and fifteen pounds," he said. "Good! That will help us +finely. Now we'll get the bearings warmed." + +He turned the steam cock slightly, and sent a cloud of hot vapor rushing +into the cylinders. + +"Below there! she's loose. I've cast off the moorings," whispered Gerald +at this moment, thrusting his head down into the stoke-hole. + +"Then give her a good push off, and go to the wheel," answered Hal. + +Gently, and without a sound, save the low drone of the fire, and the +roar of flames rushing through the funnel, the launch left the quay, +and, propelled by a thrust of Gerald's foot, glided some yards into the +harbor. She was away only just in time, for, a minute or two later, some +twenty soldiers marched up, and voices were heard. + +"Halt, men, and see that you keep in your places," someone was heard to +exclaim, in far from pleasant tones. "Now, señor, what is it? These +beggarly Americans seem to have disturbed the whole town. First, my +comrade is so upset by a blow in the face that I have to take his duty; +and then you must needs turn me out at this uncomfortable hour to follow +some wild-goose chase. Why could you not use your own ruffians?" + +"Grumbling will not mend matters," was the suave answer, in a voice +which Hal and his comrade recognized as José d'Arousta's. "These two +Americans escaped from a fool of a jailer, and are still about. We have +reason to believe that they are in the harbor, for their boots were +found not an hour ago, beneath the Morro Castle. I received orders to +call you and your men, and to instruct you to come here, so that you +might get on board the launch. Caramba, but it is dark! It is like the +bottom of a pit. Where can the boat be?" + +"Alongside, you said, señor," the other answered sourly. "Where is it, +then?" + +Footsteps were heard on the paving as José d'Arousta and some of the +soldiers hunted along the quay. Meanwhile the launch lay off at a +distance of a few yards, her passengers crouching in the stoke-hole, and +hoping to remain undiscovered. + +"Look, Señor Capitan, there is the boat!" one of the men suddenly cried, +"I can see flames and smoke coming from the funnel." + +"What? The furnaces in full blast!" José shouted. "The fires were banked +for the night, and no one was aboard her." + +"Perhaps the engineer in charge has got here before us," the officer +remarked. "Why not hail him?" + +"Hi! Aboard there! Put in alongside the quay," José promptly sang out. + +The only answer was a shower of sparks from the funnel, and the splash +and noise of churning water, for Gerald had been listening to all that +passed, and had rapidly interpreted to Hal. + +"Sing out that you are coming," said the latter, "and then steer her for +the harbor mouth. I'll give her steam." + +He turned to the throttle and opened it wide, at the same time allowing +the steam-blast to come into action. + +"She's moving now," he cried. "Keep her well away, Gerald, and dodge the +searchlight, whatever you do." + +[Illustration: HAL AND HIS COMPANION ESCAPE FROM SANTIAGO.] + +"Hi there! Where are you going? Where are you steering to?" a voice +cried from the quay; and then, as the launch sped on into the harbor +basin, José d'Arousta was heard calling to the soldiers to open fire. + +"Ah, treachery!" he shouted. "Something is wrong; for see, she is +running away. I have it; those rascally spies are aboard. Let your men +open fire at once, señor." + +A single rifle cracked immediately, no doubt fired in order to give the +alarm, and almost instantly the searchlight went through the same +strange antics as before. Finally it settled on the harbor, and, +sweeping slowly across it, lit full upon the launch. In a minute there +was a roll of musketry, and a shower of bullets hurtled about her, some +piercing her woodwork as if it had been merely paper, but none, +fortunately, hitting Hal or Gerald, or any part of the machinery. A +minute later they had run into the shadow cast by a long line of +shipping, behind which the light failed to reach them. Hal at once +thrust his head up through the opening, and then cut off steam. + +"They'll expect us to pop out at the other end," he said quietly, "but +we'll disappoint them by going about and cutting back by way of the +quay. Ready? Then shove the wheel over. There's enough row going on all +round to drown any we may make." + +And this was the case, for the gyrations of the searchlight and the +rattle of musketry had effectually awakened the shipping world. The +crews of vessels lying in the harbor came tumbling up on deck, while +many of the ships rang their bells, as though a general attack by the +enemy in force were imminent. A few who had news of the runaways put +off in their boats, and pulled into the open water, their hands shouting +loudly for information as to the whereabouts of the escaping prisoners. + +"Just keep these ships in line with the searchlight," said Hal, a few +moments later, thrusting his head up again. "That will give us a dark +patch in which to run, and will carry us almost as far as the exit. +That's it. Steady so. I'm going to pile the coal till she's fit to +burst." + +He dived below again, and, seizing the shovel which had already proved +so useful, threw the fuel into the open door of the furnace. By now the +dial showed a greater head of steam, but he was not yet satisfied, and +kept at the work, even going to the length of tossing an open can of oil +into the flames. + +As for Gerald, with eyes shifting from right to left, and returning ever +and anon to the searchlight, he gripped the wheel and steered the launch +in a dead line ahead. Once, a boat suddenly sprang out of the dense +darkness directly in front, and he caught sight of the water flashing +faintly at the tips of the oars. But he would not alter his course, and +went rushing on, only missing the other craft by a foot or two, and +leaving it behind in a trice, rocking so violently that it was a wonder +that it did not fill and sink at once. + +"Where are they? What is all this bother about?" someone cried. + +Gerald did not trouble to answer. He kept grimly on till a flash of the +broad beam overhead showed him that he was approaching the edge of the +harbor. Then, hesitating how to act, he looked down at Hal as if to ask +his advice, and saw him stripped to the waist, and standing in the glare +of the furnace, into which he was throwing coal as if life itself +depended on his exertions--as, indeed, it did. + +Round spun the wheel, and the launch swayed to the left, rolling heavily +as she did so. + +"This is my job," murmured Gerald, unconsciously repeating the words Hal +had used when giving him the post of steersman. "I'll see the show +through. Now for the channel that leads to the sea." + +"Will the searchlight fall upon it just as we enter? Yes--no--perhaps it +will not. Ah! it must. It is all up with us!" + +The thoughts flashed through his mind, one moment high hope surging +through his heart, and the next some movement of the electric beam +shattering all thoughts of escape. The light fluttered onto the thin +band of water leading out between the steep cliffs to the sea, to safety +and friends, and then whisked back to the harbor, flying across every +foot of its surface that it was possible to reach, and searching every +nook and corner. + +Round spun the wheel again. + +"In the channel, and now bang straight ahead," murmured Gerald. "If the +Dons who man the castle batteries do not spot us we shall be lucky. But +how can they fail, when flames like that are pouring from the funnel? +They're bound to let fly at us." + +He cast an upward glance at the smoke-stack, and longed to be able to +smother the flaring streak which poured from it into the night, lighting +up the surroundings like a torch. Luck, however, seemed to have followed +the runaways, for if anyone noticed them, he made no sign, not thinking +that this tiny vessel, rushing so boldly out to sea, could contain any +but friends. Perhaps, even, he may have thought it was the officer who +had been told off to conduct the search; though then it was strange that +he should feed his fires till the funnel was on the point of melting, +while the escape steam whistled through the valve with a deafening +noise. + +Fortunate indeed was it for the fugitives that another part attracted +the attention of the Spaniards. From Morro Castle, and from all the +defenses, the eyes of the garrison were fixed upon the searchlight. +Breathless with excitement, and too occupied to utter as much as a +sound, they followed the revolving beam, till at last it fell full upon +a launch steaming across the harbor. No doubt it contained José +d'Arousta and his men; but the watchers were ignorant of that, and set +up a shout of exultation that awoke the echoes. They rushed to their +guns and rifles, and would have opened fire had not the workers of the +light known more than they, and flashed it elsewhere in search of the +escaping prisoners. And all the while Hal and Gerald were speeding, with +their most eager efforts, along the narrow track that led to the sea. + +"Another half-mile and we shall be away," screamed the latter, looking +down at his friend. But the escaping steam smothered his voice, and only +the click and scrape of the busy shovel answered him. + +Bang! A huge column of water blew up into the night some hundred paces +behind, sending a heavy swell rolling along, which caught the launch and +caused it to bob sharply. + +"A mine!" shouted Hal, who had heard the roar. "I should say that it is +about their last. Keep her over to one side, for those infernal machines +are usually laid in the center, so as to catch the large ships. A miss +is as good as a mile, old boy!" + +"We're out now," shouted Gerald, taking a hasty look round, and noticing +that the reflection of the flames upon the wet rock on either side had +just vanished. "Now where away?" + +"Bang straight for the deep blue sea, old chap, and the farther out the +better. If we could put a hundred miles between us and the Dons within +the next few minutes I should feel all the happier." + +To steer directly out was, indeed, the best course they could follow, +and neither of the lads relaxed his energies till the tiny launch had +plowed a way ten miles out to sea. All was in their favor, for the +night, though intensely dark, was beautifully calm, and the surface of +the water undisturbed by even a ripple. An hour later, when they had +obtained a good offing, Hal left the door of the furnace wide open, and +stopped the engines. + +"I'm peckish again," he said, climbing to the deck, and wiping the +perspiration from his forehead with a piece of oily waste. "Skip along, +old man, and see whether you can manage to find some grub and something +to drink." + +Gerald at once left the wheel, and going to the forward part of the +launch, descended into the cabin. He had little difficulty in discerning +his surroundings, for by this time the sky had lightened considerably, +and dawn was close at hand. But he was unsuccessful, and returned with a +very long face. + +"Not a crust to be seen," he said dismally. "I say, Hal, what shall we +do if there is no food aboard, for we shall starve if we do not fall in +with a ship pretty soon?" + +"Then that is just exactly what we must do," cried Hal cheerfully, "and +we'll have to be precious careful that she is not a Spaniard. Yes, it's +rough having nothing to eat, but we must not grumble. Just think of what +we have escaped. We have left prison and that fellow José d'Arousta +behind, and are safe for the present. I'd rather starve for a week than +take my place before a file of soldiers at this hour of the morning." + +He shuddered when he thought of what a narrow escape they had had, and +what fate would have been theirs, had they still occupied their cell in +the Morro Castle. + +Then away flew his thoughts to the hacienda. Why? Did they dwell for the +space of more than a moment upon Mr. Brindle and any of the hands he +knew? No, certainly not! Hal would have flushed very red had you +suddenly asked him the question; for, in truth, he was thinking of +someone else--of Dora, picturing her as he had seen her many a morning, +standing at the top of the steps leading from the veranda, a vision of +loveliness in white, with a welcoming smile that showed two rows of +dainty pearls, and a glance from a pair of dancing blue eyes that always +made him feel happy. That was how he had seen her every morning as he +rode in from his work, and those were the happy thoughts which +invariably filled his mind during the morning meal. + +But the scene suddenly changed, José d'Arousta and the rascally Pedro +appearing in his mind's eye in place of his employer's daughter, and +they were again threatening the hacienda. At the thought, Hal sprang to +his feet, his hands clenched, and a look of excitement spreading over +his handsome face. + +"Yes," he cried, "it is good indeed to live; for I have work to do. I +have escaped from the island, but I must return again at the very first +opportunity." + +"Why should you? It would be madness!" exclaimed his comrade. + +"Why, Gerald? Think of the hacienda, and of José d'Arousta's threat. +That is my reason, for real danger threatens your father and Dora." + +"Phew! I hadn't thought of that," Gerald answered, and then suddenly +lapsed into silence, while a queer and sly little smile stole over his +face. + +"Oh, it's like that, is it?" he murmured a moment later. "But, I say, +what about falling in with a ship? What do you propose?" + +"As there is no food on board, and we are both famishing, I vote we turn +the steam on again, and get as far away from the island as we possibly +can. The chances are that it is blockaded by the American fleet, and, as +Santiago is a most important harbor, some of the vessels are bound to be +down this way. Naturally they would steam up and down within sight of +the coast, running in closer at night. We must keep a bright look-out +for them, and must hope for their appearance soon. I fancy that we are +safe from the Spanish torpedo boats, for they would scarcely dare to run +out so far." + +"What's that over there, then?" asked Gerald, suddenly pointing to the +west. + +A big black cloud was floating on the horizon, and Hal looked at it long +and earnestly. + +"I believe it's the smoke of a fleet," he said at length. "If it is, I +am for chancing the Spaniards, and running down towards that cloud." + +Gerald hastily agreed, whereupon Hal dived below again, and having seen +to the lubricating of his engine, opened the throttle-valve. Every +minute as they ran to the west the cloud became more certainly one of +smoke, and within an hour they had made out that six large battleships +were bearing down upon them at an easy pace. Then a breeze got up and +blew the smoke away, the masts and funnels of the on-coming fleet +becoming at once visible, sharply silhouetted against the clear morning +sky. + +"They're wagging their signals," said Hal, poking his head up above the +deck, and taking a long look. "No doubt they have spotted us, and will +send at once to find out who we are." + +He had scarcely finished speaking, when a long, low hull shot out from +behind one of the bigger ships, and came steaming at a great pace +towards them. + +"A torpedo boat," said Hal. "We'll lie to, and wait for her." + +Turning off the steam, he mounted to the deck, and sat down by Gerald's +side. A quarter of an hour later the torpedo boat was close at hand, +and, surging up beside the launch, rounded to, and circled completely +about her, setting the tiny vessel dancing to the swell. + +"Hooray! She's flying the Stars and Stripes," shouted Gerald, flinging +his cap into the air. "We're safe at last, old boy, and there is a good +square meal in sight." + +"Aboard there! Who are you?" came the hail across the water. "Where on +earth do you come from? and what port are you bound for?" + +"We're from Santiago. We left there this morning," Hal shouted back, +making a funnel of his hands. + +The boat, with its murderous-looking quick-firers, ranged up alongside, +and a sailor flung a rope to them. + +"Hang on there, and make her fast," shouted an officer standing on a +diminutive bridge. "We'll tow you home. You're a prize to the navy of +the United States of America." + +"Prize indeed!" Hal exclaimed. Then he laughed loudly. "We'll let it +rest like that till we get alongside the flagship," he said to Gerald. +"Then I fancy there will be some fun, and we shall score off our friend +aboard the torpedo boat." + +By this time the fleet of warships was only a mile distant, and it took +very little time for the powerful destroyer to reach them with the +launch in tow. Then, once more, the semaphore wagged confusingly. + +"Cast off that rope, and smartly with it," shouted the officer who had +hailed Hal before. "Now then, we'll take every one of you aboard to see +the admiral. Prize party, make ready to hop on to her, and just knock +the fight out of any that are playin' games." + +He backed his vessel alongside again, and the launch was rapidly lashed +in position, a few fenders being placed between to protect the brittle +plates of the torpedo craft. + +"Now, who are you anyway?" asked the officer brusquely, boarding the +launch with a party of sailors. "One of you looks so black that he might +pass for a nigger; and the other,--why,--what's this? It's a boy, a +perfect child, and astoundingly like the lads who are to be found right +over in the States. Say, who, in the name of all that's curious, are +you, youngster?" + +"Not your prisoner, at any rate," answered Gerald, with a laugh. "We're +Americans. At least, I am; and my friend is a Britisher." + +"Britisher! American! That is hard to believe. And what is all this +about?" He looked at the decks of the launch, and then at the empty +engine-room. "Two lads of our own blood aboard a Spanish craft, and not +another soul with them! It is particularly queer!" + +"It is, we admit," Hal answered, with a smile; "but you must understand +that we had no choice, for we were captured in the town of Santiago in +suspicious circumstances, and were thus placed in a cell in Morro +Castle, with the cheerful prospect of being shot as spies early this +morning. We bolted, and as this launch was lying idle beside one of the +wharfs, we just borrowed her, and steamed out to sea. So I fancy that +she really belongs to us." + +"Borrowed her! I should fancy that was a piece of amizin' cheek," the +officer laughed. "And you young fellows got through without so much as a +shell whistling loudly in your ears?" + +"Not quite. By the merest chance we escaped a mine, which was exploded +behind us; and I fancy you will find a few bullet-holes if you care to +look round," Hal answered coolly. "But there's one thing very wrong. +We're awfully hungry. Have you anything like a meal aboard?" + +The officer clapped him on the back. "Come along out of this tub at +once," he said. "It's Spanish, and isn't fit for gentlemen. Grub? +George, sir! but I've something below in my cabin that will fairly make +your mouths water. Leave her there, bo'sun, and signal over to the +skipper that all's well, and that the prisoners are busy putting their +teeth into the best food we've got, for they are simply famishing." + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +THE BEGINNING OF HOSTILITIES + + +"Now, you fellows can just sit right down there and let me have every +bit of the tale," said the American officer cheerfully, motioning Hal +and Gerald to two seats which were fixed against the side of the tiny +cabin of the torpedo boat. "I'm dying to hear all about your adventure, +and let me ask you to be particularly slippy, for as soon as the admiral +is informed that you've dropped in with the fleet, he'll be wanting you, +so as to get all possible information. Come now; the grub will be along +in a very few minutes, so you may as well fill in the time. I can tell +you, sirs, that I'm right glad to meet you." + +He stretched across the narrow swinging table, and shook both heartily +by the hand; then he shouted to a steward, and himself helped to place +food before the lads. + +"Beg pardon, sir, but the admiral aer a-waggin' ter yer ter send 'em +aboard," said someone at this moment, calling down the companion. + +"The dickens! Signal right back that they're famishing, and will be all +the better for a square meal," the officer exclaimed. "It's the truth, +after all," he added, with a smile. "I should be uncomfortably hungry if +I had taken nothing but thin air since the sun came up." + +Some pressed beef, bread and butter, and hot tea were placed upon the +table, and Hal and Gerald needed no second bidding to fall to. The keen +night air had indeed given them an appetite, to which long hours of +suspense and excitement had only added zest. They fell upon the viands, +therefore, with a will, and made the food disappear with great rapidity. + +"My! There's no doubt that you were hungry," remarked the officer, with +a smile. "Don't stop. Go right on, for there is plenty more if you need +it." + +At last they managed to satisfy their hunger, and then they gave a rough +outline of their adventures. They were in the act of completing the +story when the same voice called to them again. + +"Them signals aer a-waggin' fit ter split theirselves," the man cried. +"Reckon it erd be jist right ter send 'em aboard." + +"So; then we'll get under way. Get to your post." + +The torpedo boat quivered and throbbed from stem to stern as the screws +revolved in the water. + +"Say," said the officer, "there's steam and plenty of it in that old tub +of yours. Suppose we go aboard the flagship in it; it'll be the +handier." + +Hal and Gerald acquiesced, and at once stepped into the launch. A man +was left in charge of the wheel of the torpedo boat. Then two were sent +aboard the launch, one of whom dived into the engine-room; the lashings +were cast off, and they steamed alongside the huge vessel which flew the +admiral's flag. + +A monster she looked, too, for the _New York_ was one of the largest of +armored cruisers afloat. + +"Down below there! Hook on, and we'll bring you flyin' up," someone +shouted, and the tackle of the two falls began to descend, a sailor +clinging to the lower block of each. Hal was no seaman, and it was a +revelation to him to see the way in which the hooks were made fast, and +the launch, engines, and all, whisked aloft. A minute later he and +Gerald, together with the officer, were standing on the white decks of +the magnificent flagship _New York_. + +"Admiral's compliments, and will ye sthep below?" an Irish marine said, +saluting. + +"To be sure I will! Stay here till I come up again," replied the +officer, turning to the lads. + +As he left them for his interview with the admiral, another officer +approached. + +"Should say that this was irregular," he said, looking keenly at Hal and +Gerald. "Two prisoners left unguarded! But you'd be amazin' clever, I +reckon, to do us much harm. Hallo! What's this? I've a kind of +recollection of one of you. Now, where have we met?" + +"And I remember you; I saw you aboard the _Maine_," replied Hal quietly. + +"Why, the _Maine_! That you did, certainly. Are you not the Britisher? +You are, of course, but what are you doin' with this young fellow aboard +a Spanish craft?" + +This needed another explanation, which was barely completed when Admiral +Sampson, the commodore of the squadron of American ships, came up. + +"Congratulations, young gentlemen," he said, extending his hand in +welcome. "I have heard part of the story, and shall be glad to learn +more. Meanwhile, I fancy that a bath and some clean clothes will be more +in your line than anything else. Mr. Perkins, I'll be obliged if you +will hurry next time something turns up. This time it's different, for +they're excellent young fellows." + +The officer saluted, and at once descended the gangway, and entered a +boat which had been lowered, bestowing a wink on Hal and Gerald as he +did so. + +"Mr. Billing, you'll do me the favor of looking after our guests," +proceeded the admiral. "Fix them up, and bring them along to dinner +to-night." + +"Thankee, sir, I will," was the reply; then he turned to Hal and Gerald, +and led them below. + +"You've had a good square meal, I understand," he said, "so we'll see +right away what's to be done about togs. Come along here." + +He led them into a cabin, and began to ransack various drawers, +producing, after a long hunt, undergarments and a spare suit for each. + +"Perhaps you won't mind telling us what's going on?" said Hal. "We know +no more than that war was declared a few days ago." + +"Then I fancy that you are as well primed with information as we are. I +can tell you that this is a very queer war--in fact, quite the strangest +I have ever heard of. The truth is, that neither the Dons nor my country +are prepared for fighting; for, you see, ships are not sufficient to +enable a nation to carry on hostilities. An army to invade is wanted, +and where is ours to come from? Mind you, sir, I've not a morsel of +doubt that we shall raise all the troops we want, and that very quickly +too, for all America is buzzin' with enthusiasm at this very moment. But +you must understand that men who have not been trained to work together +stand a very poor chance when confronted with regulars. Then, again, +where would our supply department be? I can inform you right now that +there would be terrible confusion when it was found that a hastily +raised arm of the service was called upon to feed, say, twenty thousand +men, perhaps in Cuba, or elsewhere. + +"So it comes to this, that we must wait till all is ready ashore. +Meanwhile, the navy will have to do all the fighting, and, if only the +Dons show the spirit for which their ancestors were famous, we shall +have some very ticklish brushes with them. + +"After our forces are ready to move, and the various departments have +got into thorough working order, we shall want ships to carry them to +Cuba, or even to Spain, for all I know; and then I have a notion that +there'll be a heap of fun, and a mighty lot for all of us to do." + +"Then there is no chance of an invasion taking place yet a while?" Hal +asked. + +"No, that's just how it stands. But how does it interest you, +Mr.--er--er--oh, I can't remember your name. Anyhow, you're a Britisher. +How do you come into the quarrel?" + +"It did not interest me greatly till a few days ago," said Hal. "Now it +does. You see, these Spaniards have given us a very bad time. I must +admit that the greater part of the trouble has arisen through one Don in +particular, who is a very bad specimen of humanity. He attacked our +hacienda, and the next day did his utmost to have us shot as spies. In +fact, if matters had not turned out otherwise, you may take it that he +would be gloating over our deaths at this very moment." + +"George! That is most uncomfortable to think of!" + +"We had a precious near squeak for it," continued Hal; "and now you ask +how it concerns me. I am going back to the island, and, if I find that +all is secure at the hacienda, I shall join the invading forces." + +"Just to make matters even, I suppose?" laughed the officer. "I can +easily follow you. These Dons have given you and the youngster a warmish +time, and have roused you into a temper. You Britishers have the +reputation of being as easy-going as possible, and of being able to put +up with a heap; that is, up to a certain point. After that, we all know +that the old bull-dog nature comes to the fore, and then there's going +to be trouble. And so you've got to that point? Well, I am not a morsel +surprised, for there are few who would stand what you have gone through, +and forget in a hurry. In fact, I reckon that the majority would have +failed to come through at all. There's no doubt that you youngsters were +in an almighty mess. Say, sir, what was the name you mentioned?" + +"Hal Marchant." + +"Ah! So that is it. Well, sir, I'm pleased to meet you. I'm Billing; +Lieutenant aboard the _New York_. Lieutenant Samuel K. Billing." + +He held out his hand, which Hal took and shook with enthusiasm. + +"And so you have decided to join the boys?" continued the officer. "It's +the kind of thing that a lad of your sort would do, and I don't suppose +that you'll have much difficulty about the matter. But in case you have, +apply to me. I haven't forgotten how you came to the fore and helped to +dowse the magazines aboard the poor old _Maine_, and, if I can, I'll do +something to repay you. Come, think the matter over right now." + +He motioned both the lads to seats, and threw himself into another +opposite. + +"There," he said pleasantly. "Now, fire away." + +"You have asked me how you can help us," said Hal, after some moments of +silence. "It is very kind of you, and if you will arrange to have us +landed somewhere near Santiago, we shall be most grateful to you." + +"Can't be done. It is out of the question altogether," replied the +officer, leaning back in his chair, and shaking his head emphatically. +"See here, Mr. Marchant, you'll admit that we Amurricans have a +reputation for smartness. Well, whatever the Dons may be in ordinary +circumstances, they are fully alive to the situation just now, and have +their eyes very wide open. Christopher, man! the coast is bristling with +guns and men, and it is no exaggeration to state that you could hardly +float a piece of bread ashore without its being discovered. That will +give you an idea of the vigilant watch that is being maintained." + +"But we must return to the hacienda. The safety of our friends demands +it!" exclaimed Hal hotly. + +"Is that so? What friends, may I ask, sir? Relatives, by any chance?" + +"Well, not exactly in my case," Hal answered, in some confusion. +"Gerald's father and sister live at the hacienda." + +"You don't say so!" the officer answered quizzingly. "You don't fear +that your pa's in danger, do you, Mr. Gerald?" + +"Yes, I fancy he is," replied Gerald. "You see, we are anxious about him +with those rascally irregulars about. Besides, there's Dora." + +"Oh, ho; there's Dora!" repeated the officer, smiling at Hal. "And so +you have determined to rush into all sorts of dangers, Mr. Marchant, +just on the chance of rescuing your friends from some scoundrels who, +after all, may never have been near the hacienda of which you speak. +Well, it's a fix, for you can't exactly fly ashore, and you'll be shot +so sure as you attempt to get there in a boat." + +"Then I'll swim," said Hal quietly. "I'll go overboard some day when you +are close inshore." + +"Yes, and what about the sharks? Those loathsome brutes are just +jostlin' one another round here." + +"I'll swim for Cuba all the same," replied Hal steadily. "I'll chance +the sharks, for I am convinced that real danger threatens our friends." + +"So bad as that, is it?" the officer exclaimed, lifting his eyebrows. +"Well, if you are set upon it, I'll do a trifle for you, but it won't be +yet a while. We're bound elsewhere, and will be cruising up the other +side of the island. But when the chance comes you shall go, and you can +trust Samuel K. Billing to help you." + +The young American officer, whom Hal had first met beside the magazines +on board the ill-fated _Maine_, and who had so miraculously escaped the +disastrous results of the explosion, had not exaggerated matters when +he declared that America was not ready for war. + +True, her people, the nation as a whole, and the newspapers for the most +part, had asked for war--nay, demanded it. Sympathy for the miserable +people in the concentration camps had first stirred them into action, +but the awful calamity on board the _Maine_, and the particular +circumstances in which the explosion had occurred, had roused their +anger and indignation. At their very door thousands of poor helpless +people were dying of sheer starvation, and of the hundred and one +diseases which follow inevitably where want and destitution have +undermined the constitution. That in itself was an offense against their +feelings of humanity. And there was no error in this case, for no lying +tales had reached their ears, but only the truth. They had not been told +stories innumerable of awful misery existing in Cuba when such was not +the case. No. There was no doubt that there was reason for intervention +between oppressor and oppressed, and America had espoused the cause of +the latter with great earnestness. + +She had insisted on war, and had embarked upon it, as the reader knows. +But under what conditions? Her navy was one of which she was justly +proud; her army, on the other hand, was far too small to undertake the +task which America had set herself--namely, the expulsion of Spain from +the Island of Cuba. Twenty-seven thousand officers and men were, +roughly, the army of this great country; but, though few in numbers, +they were, indeed, men to be proud of, for all were picked, and many +were accomplished in that most important branch of war--scouting. + +In addition, America possessed militia, though few of the battalions +were in an efficient state; and the reason of this was that a reaction +had followed the fierce civil war between North and South. There was no +longer need for soldiering, and trade occupied the attention of the +people instead. Had it been otherwise, the lads of the States are too +much like our own to have done otherwise than throw their hearts and +energy into the army, and fight for their country. And in this emergency +they came to the fore with a zeal and impetuosity which warranted the +statement of Hal's naval friend, to wit, that the whole of the American +nation was roused to enthusiasm. + +The sons of the States came forward in their thousands. Those of the +militia battalions who were still of the right age, and medically fit, +volunteered for active service almost to a man, and within a very short +space of time America found herself with a hundred thousand men added to +her regular army. The latter was sent down to the department of the +South, to Tampa in Florida, and the remaining volunteers were +transferred from the various departments into which the States are +divided, to certain training camps, from which they were to be sent to +Chickamauga in Tennessee, and from there, when efficient, to Tampa. + +And now, having hinted at the manner in which the army of invasion was +raised, we will turn to the navy, and to events in and around Cuba. + +"There, sir, that's just about where we are," said the American +lieutenant, who had introduced himself as Samuel K. Billing, throwing +himself back in his chair. "As I've hinted to you, the boys ashore are +drilling their boots off, and up to this it has been a naval war. On +April the 21st hostilities commenced, and America made a haul, for we +captured the _Cataluna_, with a cargo of mules, about to sail from New +Orleans to Cuba. Then Admiral Sampson--that's the commodore, you'll +understand--flew his signals, and out the fleet sailed from Key West. We +steamed to sea with orders to blockade the coast of Cuba from Cardenas +to Cienfuegos, that is right along east of Havana. Next day we fell in +with the _Buenaventura_, and captured her, sending her along home with a +prize crew aboard. That, sir, is all the news. Here we are, and here we +shall stay till the troops are ready. Lucky for you both that we +happened to put in an appearance! It was by the merest chance that we +came cruising down this way." + +No doubt it was remarkably fortunate for Hal and Gerald; but, though +Santiago with the neighboring coast was, from this day, efficiently +blockaded, the failure to carry the movement out before had allowed the +_Montserrat_, a Spanish liner, to approach the southern part of the +island, and land troops, ammunition, and stores at Cienfuegos, whence +they were conveyed to Havana. Beyond this nothing of importance had +occurred in the neighborhood, while thousands of miles away, in the +Pacific Ocean, an American fleet lay at anchor in Mirs Bay, on the +Chinese coast, ready to make an attack upon the Philippines, Spain's +stronghold in those waters. The fleet of which Spain boasted had gone to +St. Vincent in the Cape Verde Islands, and awaited events there. + +"And what will happen now?" asked Hal. "Are you likely to be sailing in +close to Santiago? If you are, I shall take my chance and hop overboard. +Besides, I'd forgotten, there's the launch. The commodore would allow us +that." + +"So he would, Marchant, and what would happen to you? Why, sir, that +little tub would be sucked up by a Spanish gunboat before you could +wink. And then----Phit! man, it would be all over with you! It is out of +the question, and you'll have to get the idea out of your mind for a +time. In the first place, we're not for cruisin' close in. We're bound +for Havana, and when we get there you will see some fun. There's a talk +of bombarding Matanzas, a coast town that comes next in size to +Havana." + +"Then you will have some fighting," said Hal. "I should like to be +there." + +"And so you shall, sir. You're guests aboard this ship, and if you want +to stay, say the word. The commodore is not the man to stop you." + +"Thanks, very much," answered Hal. "Until I can see a chance of being +landed near Santiago, I should certainly like to remain on this ship. +But why not attack Havana? It is the chief Spanish port." + +"And get badly knocked about!" exclaimed the lieutenant. "George, man! +There are mines to be thought of, and, besides, where should we be if we +got into the harbor? Fifty thousand Spanish troops would be confronting +us. No, Marchant, it is not to be thought of." + +No one could quarrel with this decision. Had America possessed the +necessary land forces, an attack might have been attempted; but, even +then, to try to enter a harbor over live mines would have been hazardous +in the extreme. + +Admiral Sampson, however, had decided to attack Matanzas, for it was +necessary to do something to calm the clamor of the American public. +Almost two weeks had already passed since the declaration of war, and no +success had been achieved, save the capture of a few merchant vessels. +In consequence, the people of the States were roused to anger, for they +had expected great things on the outbreak of war. + +But, meanwhile, the ship upon which Hal and Gerald were receiving +hospitality was steaming along the coast. + +"It'll be two days before we get right round," said Lieutenant Billing, +"so I propose that you young fellows get some sort of togs. The tailor +aboard will measure you for coats and things, and if we chaps weren't +able to dig out the unders, why, we wouldn't be any good. As you stand +you'll do for the commodore to-night, for on active service there is no +dressing for dinner. Come along with me, and I'll see what the tailor +man has to say." + +Hal and Gerald did as they were asked, and were very glad that their +naval friend had thought of it, for they were absolutely destitute of +belongings when they escaped from Santiago. Naturally, their flight from +prison, and their subsequent adventures, had not helped to improve their +clothes, so that, when they stepped aboard the _New York_, it was +coatless and bootless, and with only the remains of very dirty +plantation suits. Indeed, Hal was more like a coal-heaver than anything, +and the heat of the little stoke-hole had been so great that he had even +discarded his shirt, and kept on only trousers and vest. + +"New suit for two Britishers?" exclaimed the ship's tailor, who was a +typical Yankee. "Say, where on airth did yer get hold of them ere togs? +Oh, from the lieutenant? Wall, I'll fix yer up as good. That aer the +way. Hold yer arm out, so, and I'll take yer measure." + +He soon obtained all the necessary particulars, after which the +lieutenant led Hal and Gerald to the _New York's_ gunroom, where they +were introduced to the other officers. + +"Say, Mr. Marchant, sir," said one of them, "our friend here, the +lieutenant, has got the better of us. How was it that you came to be +aboard that old tank of a launch? Spin the yarn, like a good fellow, and +we'll feel obliged." + +There was nothing for it but to recount again how they had escaped from +the Morro Castle; and that same evening the commodore also insisted upon +hearing all the particulars of their adventures, and probed Hal so +astutely with questions that he drew from him the tale of José +d'Arousta's attack upon the hacienda, and the manner in which it had +been foiled. + +"You never let on about that, sir," said Samuel K. Billing +reproachfully, "and the admiral has scored one. Say, Mr. Marchant, you +seem unusually concerned about that Spaniard, and I don't wonder at all, +for he's a low-down sort of beggar; but how did it happen that you first +knocked up against him? Now, no hanging back, if you please, for if you +don't feel inclined to oblige me, there's Admiral Sampson, who won't let +you off." + +"Indeed, no. Come, Mr. Marchant, I trust you will give us the story," +chimed in the commodore. "This Spaniard seems to have some special spite +against you. If I remember rightly, he and his rascally accomplice would +have shot you in cold blood when the hacienda was taken. What was the +quarrel between you?" + +Nothing loath, for the officers seemed genuinely interested, Hal told +how José d'Arousta had first come across his path, and how, on three +successive occasions, he had been able to thwart him. + +"There's luck, they say, in the number three," remarked the admiral. +"Young, sir, I consider that you have done very well, and that you have +been ably helped by your friend. But luck may pull you through danger on +one occasion, while on another it leaves you in the lurch. Pluck and +strength of purpose are of far more use in difficulties, and when +combined with luck make the issue less doubtful. So, you see, I take it +that you both have a very good allowance of what we in the States call +'grit.' But for that I reckon you would have been shot this very +morning, for how else could you have succeeded in escaping from the +Morro Castle? As for that fellow of a Spaniard, I am not in the least +surprised that you feel uneasy about him. Beware of the man, is the +caution I would impress upon you. Three, I have said, is considered a +lucky number. Take care when you run up against him for the fourth time, +that he does not shoot you at sight. No amount of good fortune will +preserve a man when a revolver is fired at point-blank range. But there, +what am I doing? Giving advice to a youngster who, in spite of his few +years, has seen more adventures than many a man of forty. You've been +almighty spry, my lad, and will pull through, whatever the danger." + +"You may put it at that," exclaimed the lieutenant, who seemed to have +taken a particular fancy to Hal. "I can tell you, sir, that this young +guest of ours is as smart and as full of pluck as they make them." + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +A BAPTISM OF FIRE + + +"This young guest of ours is as smart and as full of pluck as they make +them." + +These were the lieutenant's words, and those who had the fortune to be +acquainted with our hero could not deny their truth; for Hal looked a +particularly capable and sturdy young fellow two days after boarding the +_New York_. + +"You look a regular sailor," said Gerald, with a laugh. "When I saw you +walking the deck with our friend of yesterday, I took you for one of the +officers." + +"And that is what I should like to be," Hal answered briskly. "Have you +given a thought to our position, old man?" + +"No, I can't say that I have. Everything seems very jolly, though." + +"Yes, exactly; but we are guests aboard, doing nothing for our living." + +"That's the fortune of war. We could not help it," answered Gerald. + +"No, but I have made up my mind to do something to repay this kindness. +The Spaniards began the quarrel, and three days ago I threw in my lot +for good and all with America. Now, I said that I wanted to get to the +hacienda, for my idea is to see that all is right there, and then to +join the invading Yankees. Of course, if there is likely to be trouble +near Eldorado, I shall stay; but, otherwise, I shall do all that I can +for America. One who knows the country about Santiago should be +useful." + +"That I can quite understand," Gerald answered; "but how will you get +ashore?" + +"I do not know, but something may turn up shortly," Hal replied +hopefully. + +"Matanzas, for instance," said a voice at his elbow, with such +suddenness that both lads sprang round, to find themselves face to face +with Samuel K. Billing. "Say, boys," the latter continued, rubbing his +hands together with pleasure, "Matanzas has turned up. It's over there, +on the port bow. I tell you it's nearing a stiff naval action. The +commodore has decided to attack the place." + +Both lads turned their eyes to the shore, and, with the aid of glasses, +saw a low-lying town on the fringe of a bay, the entrance to which was +crossed by rocky reefs, through which, however, a wide and very deep +channel was left. To right and left forts could be seen, while on a +slope farther inland a host of men were busily erecting a sand-bag +battery. It was a fine morning, and the unruffled surface of the sea +showed the wind had dropped. + +"Look, there's Morillo Battery pointing out right clear between the +headlands!" exclaimed the lieutenant, jerking his thumb in the direction +of a stone-faced fort far on the inland slope. "That promontory on the +right has a powerful erection known as Fort Maya, while on the left +there is another of just about equal strength, called Rubal Caya. All +are armed with modern quick-firing guns, so we may expect a peppering. +Say, boys, have you ever heard the sing of a shell?" + +"Never. What is it like?" Hal asked. + +"Poom! A burst of smoke from the distant gun, if black powder is used, +and then a faint kind of whisper, getting bigger every second till it's +just shrieking overhead. If she don't it's a dib, dib, dib in the water, +a bit of a splash here and there as the shell ricochets, and then plump +she goes to the bottom. Hallo! there's the signal flying to the +_Puritan_ and _Cincinnati_. We're steaming in. So long, till next time." + +He hurried off, leaving Hal and Gerald in possession of a pair of +glasses. For the moment they were occupied in looking at the other ships +in company with the _New York_, and at the latter herself. No one took +the least notice of them, and in consequence they walked the length of +the decks. What a fine cruiser the _New York_ was! From amidships three +mighty funnels poured forth volumes of smoke, while the steam sizzled +and roared into the air. From her masts bristled many quick-firers, +pointing from the tiers of batteries which are known as "fighting tops," +and which are slung at various elevations. And from the decks six long +cannon of eight inches' caliber grinned through the ports, the breeches +surrounded by eager gunners. Others stood at hand by the ammunition +lifts, prepared to supply more cartridges. On the bridge walked the +admiral and his officers, smart, cool, and collected, and with eyes +fixed upon the distant shore. + +Poom! A flash and a billow of smoke burst from Point Maya, and out flew +a shell, singing merrily, till it plunged into the sea some distance +from the _New York_. + +"The ball opens," said Hal quietly. "Wait till we are closer in. Then it +will be warm work. I reckon we are about six thousand yards from the +shore, and the Dons judged the distance badly." + +His words were cut short by a series of rapidly repeated reports from +the guns of the _Puritan_. Her quick-firers were at work, and found the +range almost immediately. Then followed two roaring explosions, so great +in volume that they smothered all the others, and deafened everyone +within hearing. + +"By Jove! the turret guns!" exclaimed Gerald, putting his fingers to his +ears. + +The _Puritan_ had, in fact, slewed her turret round, and discharged two +of her biggest shells, weighing a thousand pounds apiece. Instantly, up +went every glass on the ship, and all eyes gazed eagerly shorewards to +see what result would follow. + +"Hit! Hit! Right up against the battery! There, there, away to the +right!" cried Hal. "I saw the dust and bits fly sixty feet into the +air." + +In the direction in which he pointed, a dark brown column suddenly +spurted up into the air, and floated for some moments like a cloud in +front of the battery. Then, as the onlookers from the ships kept their +gaze fixed upon the shore, the column suddenly subsided, and when they +looked again there were the batteries, surrounded by trees and green +fields, while there was no sign of damage produced by the shells. + +"Hallo! They are opening on us, and here come the shells!" shouted +Gerald, a moment later. + +As he spoke, all the Spanish forts fired, and though none of the +missiles actually hit the _New York_, they hurtled unpleasantly close +overhead. + +"This is hot!" cried Gerald, wiping the perspiration from his forehead. +"Every time I hear that screech I want to bob badly, and my heart goes +down into my boots." + +"Yes, it's precious unpleasant," Hal agreed reassuringly; "but the Dons +are making bad practice, so we can feel pretty secure. Still, that +shriek is horrid. It knocks the courage out of a fellow, for, long +before one expects it, you can hear a gentle whistle in the distance, +gradually increasing till you'd think that the shell was close beside +your ear. Then, while you are still crouching and wondering where it is +going to land, you hear a dull poom! in the distance, a sharp report +sounds ahead or astern of the ship, and up goes a column of water. You +know that you are safe then, but it takes some time to get rid of the +feeling of funk that settles upon you when the guns begin to open. But +take a look through the glasses. Our shells seem to be plumping into the +batteries every time." + +The American ships were, indeed, making excellent practice, and within +fifteen minutes had silenced the batteries ashore, each mighty shell +blowing showers of débris into the air. Then they steamed away, their +guns being too hot to be pleasant, and now emitting only thin wreaths of +smoke. Rubal Caya, undaunted, threw one last missile, which missed, and +to it the _Monitor_ replied with a twelve-inch shell, which seemed to +wreck the battery. + +The losses of the Spaniards must indeed have been heavy, though they +were never accurately known. In any case the earthworks were +considerably battered. But this bombardment opened the eyes of many +people, for it proved that fortifications do not suffer very severely +under heavy fire. The heaps of débris flying into the air make it appear +as if havoc were being wrought, whereas the destruction brought about at +such very long ranges is nothing compared with that produced in the old +days of muzzle-loaders, round shot, and a point-blank range. + +"Wall, young sirs, we've had one day at it, and a precious hot one it's +been," remarked Lieutenant Samuel K. Billing, "and I reckon we've wiped +the eyes of the Dons. There's information to hand that one of our +gunboats got mauled a few days ago. So, you see, it's only right that we +should have the best of it to-day, and get some luck to make up for the +other. Say, Mr. Marchant, sir, how'd you and your chum care for a little +excursion? Just a game that's goin' to be started along the coast." + +"I am sure we should like it very much," Hal answered. "What exactly is +it?" + +"That's tellin', sir. You'd like to join, you say, and so you shall; but +keep it a dead secret. If the commodore knew that I had let the cat out +of the bag, it would be a case of an explosion bigger than those over +there." + +Hal and Gerald wondered what particular excursion they were to take part +in, but four days passed without anything happening. On the fourth +night, however, they were turned out of their bunks by their naval +friend again. + +"Say, boys," he said in a whisper, "the time's come along. Get on deck +right away, and make for the after gangway. There's a kettle alongside +that's smokin' like a kitchen. It's the _Hudson_, an armed revenue +cutter. Come, shake the sleep out of your eyes, or I withdraw my +promise." + +They needed no second bidding, but, jumping hastily into their clothes, +ran on deck. A rope ladder was hanging overboard, and they descended by +this means to the cutter, which was, in reality, a small gunboat. + +"Sheer off there!" someone cried, showing a light, and at once the +little vessel quivered as her screw revolved. Hal and his friend turned, +to find the lieutenant of the _New York_ standing beside them. + +"Naval instruction," he said, as if to explain his presence there. +"That's what I am flying after; trying to get hold of the games these +kettles play." + +"Humbug!" exclaimed another officer, approaching at the moment. "You +know as well as anyone that it is a lark, a bit of extra excitement that +you're wantin'. But you're forgetting, Samuel. Introduce me." + +"Right away, Lieutenant Ben Carson." + +They shook hands, and Hal inquired of the newcomer their destination. + +"We're bound for Cardenas," was the answer. "It's a bit of a warm place +to walk into. Reefs and that sort outside. There are three Spanish +boats, the same as this, in the harbor, and they are a nuisance. I'll +allow that they've proved too much for us up to this, but we'll do for +them this time. Say, Mr. Marchant, have you ever been under fire?" + +"Once or twice," Hal answered, "and I cannot admit that it was +particularly enjoyable." + +"That's so; I judge that there are few who revel in the experience," was +the answer. "But you must get used to it, and will have another chance, +for we're goin' into that harbor right now." + +That this was the intention of the _Hudson_ was soon made clear. Joined +by the gunboats _Wilmington_ and _Machias_, and by the torpedo boat +_Winslow_, she lay off the harbor of Cardenas till morning dawned. Then, +the men and officers having breakfasted, the little fleet steamed in, +piloted through a side channel in the reefs by a Cuban who was well +acquainted with them. + +"It's queer sort of work, this," remarked Lieutenant Billing, as the +little cutter rushed into the bay. "For instance, the main channel's +mined, and you'd get blown sky-high if you sailed that way. Then this +place is full of rocks, so the fellow who is commandin' has to keep his +eyes mighty wide open. But we're in the bay safe enough, and I guess the +fun will commence right away." + +At this moment the _Machias_ parted company, and steamed to the east, +towards Diana Key, where Spanish barracks had been erected. Very soon +her guns were heard in action, though not till hours after was it +learned that she had put the Spanish garrison to flight, and had sent +ashore an armed boat's crew, who hoisted the Stars and Stripes over +Cuban soil for the first time in the war. + +"Now the band will play," cried the lieutenant excitedly, as the +_Hudson_ steamed onward with her consorts. "Say, boys, we're after those +gunboats, and I expect the shells will be flyin' about our heads before +very long. But we've got to find them first; they'll be about this way +somewhere, but exactly where is the particular question. Now, where can +they have hidden themselves?" + +"What are those over there, then?" said Hal suddenly, lifting a pair of +glasses to his eyes, and directing them across the bay to a long, narrow +quay, constructed of stone, which projected far out into the water from +the coast-line. "I can see something lying behind there. Perhaps it is a +gunboat, for that is a likely place behind which to hide." + +"Perhaps it is--there is no saying; but I can't make it look like a +gunboat," was the answer. "Whatever it is, I reckon the _Winslow_ will +soon rout it out. If it's one of those craft, her quick-firers will get +to work precious soon, and I think that we shall have a rough time of +it; for she's behind the breakwater, while we are stuck out in the open. +That won't beat us, though, and if she's there we're goin' to have her." + +By this time the three vessels were well in the bay, and while the +_Wilmington_ lay to off the town, the _Hudson_ and _Winslow_ rushed in +towards the wharves in search of the Spanish gunboats. + +These were a constant menace to the Americans, for while they lay under +the guns of the forts it was difficult to get at them. And what splendid +opportunities of producing havoc amongst the ships of the enemy were in +the hands of their commanders! To bold, undaunted men, with plenty of +spirit about them, there was practically no limit to the damage they +might do. Themselves acquainted with the bay, and with every inch of the +formidable reefs that formed a barrier round it, knowing well every turn +and twist of the narrow and dangerous inlets and exits so much at their +finger-tips that the darkest night was no bar to their traversing them, +it was possible for them to keep Admiral Sampson's fleet in a state of +perpetual alarm. For who could guess when those long sleuthhounds of the +sea would leave their kennels beside the wharves, and slip out into the +open? And who could hope to follow those long black hulls racing through +the water? It was almost impossible to do so, and it is not to be +wondered at that many a look-out man, when staring into the darkness, +sent an alarm ringing through the American fleet when he had only +imagined that he had sighted a Spanish gunboat. Then guns would begin to +go off, and a perfect pandemonium would take the place of the silence +that had reigned before. On one occasion, too, owing to mistakes in +showing signals, the Americans almost fired on their own gunboats, which +were patrolling the seas around them. + +Meanwhile, the _Hudson_ and the _Winslow_ had been steaming closer to +the low stone quay which jutted into the water, and had separated so as +to form a smaller mark for the enemy, when there was a roar of exploding +artillery, and a hail of shells burst on and around the _Winslow_. + +"Hillo, these fellows are where you said!" shouted Lieutenant Billing; +"and what's more, the _Winslow's_ got badly hit, I fancy. Hooroo! we're +bearing down to her assistance." + +Slewing the helm round, the commander of the _Hudson_ rushed towards the +quay from which the guns were firing, using his own batteries meanwhile. +Hal, with a pair of glasses raised, watched the conflict, and distinctly +saw the Spanish gunboats firing over the top of the quay, while they +themselves were more or less protected by the stonework. + +"The _Winslow_ is disabled," he shouted, seeing the gunboat suddenly +swerve from her course, while a hail of shells burst about her decks. +"She's got her steering gear smashed. See, she's drifting nearer to the +quay." + +"Then we'll have her out of it," shouted the lieutenant. "Say, boys, get +to one of those guns, and lend a hand." + +He rushed forward, Hal and Gerald running to the after gun. Meanwhile, +the _Hudson_ bore down rapidly upon the disabled _Winslow_, and at once +found that she, too, had become a mark for the enemy. But, nothing +daunted, her commander kept her straight ahead, in spite of the bursting +shells, until quite close to his damaged consort. + +[Illustration: "HAL AND GERALD RAN TO THE AFTER GUN."] + +"Stand ready there to heave them a line," he shouted from the bridge. +"Now, I am going across her bows." + +He placed his mouth to the speaking-tube and called to his engineer to +cut off steam, while, with a wave of his arm, he directed his +quartermaster to steer the gunboat close beside the _Winslow_. As he did +so, a storm of shot and shell came spluttering around, churning the +water up as if huge hailstones were falling into it. It was a most +exciting moment, and to those who were watching from the deck of the +_Wilmington_ it appeared that all aboard the two boats must be doomed, +so close was the range at which the Spaniards were firing, and so heavy +the bombardment to which both the Americans were subjected. + +More than once was the line thrown, but it failed to reach. Then, as the +_Hudson_ struggled manfully to get nearer, she, too, became almost +unmanageable in the shallow water, rocking violently, and churning the +sea into foam with the frantic revolutions of her propeller. + +Bang! Boom! Smash! The sounds seemed to swallow her up, while the patter +of bullets beat a loud and unceasing tattoo on her deck and sides. +Crash! A shell had struck the rail close beside the gun at which Hal +and Gerald were helping, and, exploding with a violent concussion, +threw them to the deck. But they were uninjured, and at once sprang to +their feet again. + +At this moment a more fortunate throw of the line reached the stranded +_Winslow_, and a cable was rapidly passed from the _Hudson_ to her +consort, and made fast. Then, putting up her helm, she steamed away at +full speed, towing the wrecked gunboat after her till both were out of +range. And all the while the stern gun on the deck of the _Hudson_ +growled a reply in sharp and angry snaps, while the shells from the +_Wilmington's_ big pieces roared and screeched overhead, in many cases +to fall upon the stone quay, and injure it and the gunboats flying the +Spanish flag. + +"Guess that that is a bad business," said Lieutenant Billing. "Those +fellows have just pitched into us and knocked us about sadly. Jove, sir, +but we'll give it to them next time!" + +It was, indeed, a reverse for the American navy, but a very slight one, +for which the distinguished gallantry of the _Hudson_ and _Winslow_ more +than compensated. + +"I never thought it possible for men to live through such a storm of +shell," said Hal. "At any other time I should have been in a blue funk, +but there was so much to do that I had not time to think." + +"That's it," agreed Gerald. "When we ran to the gun, the crew, or part +of it, had gone farther aft to heave the line, so that our help was +badly wanted. Then, what with handing shell, and watching to see what +luck we had in hitting the Dons, I hadn't time for anything else. But it +was warm! I say, Hal, old boy, fetch me a glass of water. I feel rather +done." + +To Hal's astonishment, Gerald suddenly sat down upon a twisted rope +fender, and turned deathly pale. + +"What's the matter? What has happened?" demanded Hal anxiously. "Are +you hit, or are you simply shaken by the excitement?" + +"I'm hit--in here." Gerald bit his lips to suppress a groan, and pointed +to his side. Then, to his friend's consternation, he fainted dead away. + +"What is this? The youngster gone off! Been upset by the fighting and +noise?" asked Lieutenant Billing, hurrying up. + +"No, I fear he's wounded," Hal exclaimed. "Somewhere in the side, I +fancy." + +They ran to Gerald's help, and while Hal held his head on his arm, the +lieutenant tore his coat open. + +"A bit of shell struck him," he said quietly. "No wonder he feels queer. +Say, one of you men, drop below and bring up a basin of warm water and +some dressings. Another of you hop along to the steward and get some +spirits." + +He seemed to know exactly what to do, and, as soon as the things were +brought, poured some brandy into a tumbler, and, adding a little water, +emptied the contents in small quantities at a time down Gerald's throat. +Then he ripped the shirt open, and exposed an ugly gash over the ribs. + +"Guess one or more are broken," he said. "I don't profess to be a +doctor, but I should say that it's nothing out of the way. The loss of +blood has caused him to faint. Now, then, along with the basin." + +He took a piece of lint, and utilizing it as a sponge, bathed the wound. +Then he applied dressings and a bandage. By this time Gerald was showing +signs of regaining consciousness; he was promptly carried to a bunk, Hal +remaining by his side. + +Meanwhile the _Hudson_ and her consorts were running out of the bay, +through the narrow and dangerous channel. They left the town of Cardenas +in disorder, fires having broken out in some of the buildings. Outside +the barrier they hove to, and the wounded and killed, numbering six in +all, were then transferred from the _Winslow_ to the _Hudson_. + +"We're off to Key West, in Florida," said the lieutenant, coming down to +speak to Hal. "How's the youngster?" + +"Better, I'm thankful to say," was the answer. "He is conscious, and can +speak, but I've ordered him to be silent." + +"That is the best way, I reckon. Keep him so till we can get him to +hospital. That'll be by daybreak to-morrow." + +Running at full steam, the _Hudson_ made light of the journey to +Florida, and early on the following morning Gerald was slung into a +launch and conveyed ashore. Hal accompanied him, and having handed him +over to the tender care of a nurse, sauntered into the town. Flags were +flying everywhere, and the streets were thronged with townspeople and +shipping folk, all of them wearing miniature American flags in their +buttonholes. + +"What has occurred to cause all the excitement?" Hal asked of a man who +was seated outside a restaurant. + +"And don't yer know?" was the astonished answer. "Reckon America has +knocked spots off the Dons. Why, it aer more'n a week old. Here, look +thur, and you'll allow as there's reason to get a small piece uppish." + +He tossed a paper across to Hal, and began to sip his coffee. Hal opened +the sheets of closely printed matter, and found a complete page given up +to one subject. Across the top, in big, bold type, was printed, +"Glorious Victory! Dewey annihilates the Spanish fleet at the +Philippines! The battle of Manila! Full details! Wonderful gallantry +displayed by the enemy! Small American losses!" + +Instantly his attention was riveted, and he read the article from +beginning to end. + +That there should have been fighting at such a distance from America he +fully expected, for Spain possessed the Philippine Islands, which lie in +the neighborhood of Hong-Kong, and indeed had held them for not less +than three centuries, during which period she had made a rich harvest +out of them. When war commenced, an American fleet under Admiral Dewey +had been lying in Mirs Bay, close to Hong-Kong; while Montojo, the +Spanish commodore, was cruising close to the islands. Evidently they had +met, and the newspaper had a description of the battle. Hal ran his eye +rapidly down the columns of print. + +"A glorious victory has been won for our nation this day, the 1st of +May," he read. "Admiral Dewey, who, with his fleet of four cruisers, two +gunboats, a dispatch boat, and store ships, has been lying snugly in +Mirs Bay, awaiting events, sailed from his anchorage on Wednesday, April +27th, and arrived off Manila Bay on the 30th. + +"The Spanish admiral had barely entered, having cruised up to Subic Bay +to examine its defenses. Following in his wake, Dewey boldly steamed +into Manila Bay, which, as our readers will doubtless know, is some +thirty miles wide. It was a night of intense excitement. Not an +unnecessary sound was made, the engines worked at their slowest, and +every light was masked. Breathless with longing to be up and doing, and +yet held quiet and still by love for their country, the crews, grouped +round their guns, waited for something to occur. + +"Like a column of ghosts the mighty battleships, cruisers, and gunboats +forged ahead, a line of a mile and a half in length, at least. Led by +the _Olympia_, the flagship, they entered the deep channel and steamed +steadily past Corregidor Island. Not a sound broke the stillness; not a +light was to be seen. One, two, three fine ships stole by, and yet there +was no alarm. Were the Spaniards dozing? Hark! What was that? + +"Another and yet another of Dewey's ships passed the forts. The sixth, +the _Boston_, was abreast, when suddenly the darkness was cleft in twain +by a mighty flash, while a loud report echoed from the island. + +"'Ah, that aer more like it!' exclaimed the lads. 'That'll relieve the +suspense. Swish! Aint that a shell?'" + +"It was indeed a big shell, but it whizzed harmlessly overhead, to be +answered next moment by the guns of the _Raleigh_, _Concord_, and +_Boston_. Unscathed, with not so much as a rope shot away, the fleet +pushed into the bay, and, turning northeast, steamed at a pace only just +sufficient to maintain steerage way. Hour succeeded hour, and, instead +of lessening, the excitement became even more intense. The men were +ordered to sleep beside their guns, but who of them could be expected to +obey? It was a physical impossibility. They lay on the hard decks, +perspiring in the heat, and maintaining for the most part a grim +silence. + +"At last, when a weary age seemed to have passed, the east suddenly +flushed rosy red in the light of another dawn, the last that many a poor +Spaniard was to see. As the daylight grew, the distant coast-line, rocky +headlands, and gorgeous patches of fresh green rose up out of the mist. +Then, away in front, the town of Manila came into view, and a gasp of +astonished delight burst from the American crews, for there was the +enemy's fleet, part drawn up across the entrance of Cavité Bay, and +under easy steam, while the remainder were moored farther in. + +"Still, not a sound broke the silence, save the gentle, half-mournful +throb, throb of the engines. Grimly, steadily, and with earnest purpose, +the fleet, led by Admiral Dewey, bore down upon the enemy--the spangled +banner that we love floating slowly in the tropical breeze. + +"Clinkety-clink! the engine dials rang out eight knots ahead, and away +steamed our vessels straight for the Spaniards. Boom! boom! Splash! The +water of the harbor boiled in foam, and rose in an enormous pinnacle +dead ahead of the _Olympia_, and then subsided as the ship rode proudly +on, for the Dons had exploded their only mines unsuccessfully. Still not +a sound, save that monotonous throb, throb. At last a gun report was +heard, then another, and within a minute the Spanish ships were all +engaging our fleet, their shells hurtling and buzzing everywhere. And +from the Americans as yet not so much as a shout. But there is a limit +to human patience. A burly giant, stripped to the waist, climbed on to +the mounting of the big gun in the stern of the admiral's ship, and, +waving his cap, shouted, 'Boys, remember the _Maine_!' It acted like +magic. The shout was taken up from end to end of the fleet, and seemed +to spur the admiral on to action, for a minute later the big turret guns +thundered, and were very quickly followed by a perfect hurricane of +shell. Shifting his course, the commodore turned, and, followed by his +consorts, moved down the whole length of the Spanish line. Then he +steamed back again, using his other guns. + +"Five times did he traverse the line, drawing nearer every time. Two +hours had passed like so many minutes, and by that time every Spanish +ship was ablaze, and sinking or deserted by her crew. Then the fleet +drew away, and, it is reported, steamed to Cavité, where the arsenals +and shipping were destroyed. + +"The Spaniards are said to have fought with heroic courage, and to have +manned old and obsolete ships armed with useless guns. This would appear +to be correct, for our losses amount to eight wounded, while one man +died of heat-stroke. The Spaniards are said to have suffered very +severely. + +"Further particulars are expected every moment, but what has already +reached us across the wires is sufficient to show that Dewey has crushed +the naval power of Spain in the Philippines. + +"Let us hope that the war is already at an end in that quarter of the +globe." + +"Phew! what a victory!" said Hal, lifting his eyes from the paper. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +A DESPERATE UNDERTAKING + + +A gigantic success had indeed been scored for America by Admiral Dewey +and his fleet, and it need scarcely be mentioned that east and west, +north and south, he was a hero throughout the States. For the moment the +interest of the nation was transferred to another sphere; the China seas +claimed the earnest attention of all. Indeed, when fuller details were +to hand, it was more and more apparent that the action in Manila Bay had +been of the utmost importance; and before proceeding to detail the +doings of Hal, it will be as well to describe the situation more +precisely. + +One would have thought, considering the importance and value +commercially of the Philippines, that Spain would have strained every +nerve to bring their defenses to a pitch of perfection which would have +defied the might of America. But this was not the case, for just as the +United States was deficient in men ashore, so was Spain hopelessly +obsolete with regard to her sea-power. Though war had been expected for +many months, and, indeed, had been imminent, no effort had been made to +supply the Philippines with a modern fleet. Admiral Montojo, the sailor +who commanded in the China seas, had but a poor squadron of vessels to +depend upon, and it will be scarcely believed that, of the nine which +sailed under his orders, one at least was unable to put to sea, for the +simple and deplorable reason that her boilers were worn out and would +not raise the necessary steam. Of the others, all may be described as +obsolete in defenses and in armament. Whereas Admiral Dewey boasted of a +fleet of six up-to-date ships, heavily armored, and with steel +under-decks, in the case of the cruisers, which would give ample +protection to the engines, the Spanish vessels had little more than thin +iron plates to depend upon. In fact, in all that goes to make a fleet +efficient and dangerous the Spanish ships were wanting. The American +ships hopelessly outmatched Admiral Montojo's command in speed, +protection, and gun-power. + +The last mentioned, though not touched upon before, was not the least in +importance, and here again Spain showed herself quite obsolete. Her guns +were, almost without exception, old and practically useless. In +addition, ancient and fairly modern cannon were placed in ships side by +side--a terrible mistake, and one destined to cost their crews dear when +the time for fighting came, for the task of selecting and supplying the +various forms of shell and powder would be no light one. + +Nor was it merely in point of fleets and armaments that the Spaniards +failed. Knowing his ships to be hopelessly outmatched, it is a matter +for wonder that the admiral did not sink them in the bay, after having +removed all the guns and stores. Had he done so, he would have joined +forces with the commander of the troops stationed in the environs of +Manila, and with him could have given a decided check to the Americans +when they attempted to land. Again, failing this, he might have +withdrawn with all his ships to the numerous creeks which cut between +the Philippines, and, lying hid there, might have sallied out at any +moment, and taken Admiral Dewey unawares, thereby doing good service for +king and country. + +However, we have seen that he chose to set his face to the enemy, and +one can only admire the courage of the man, and of all those who helped +him during the engagement with the Americans. Defeat was certain, and +death not improbable. + +Indeed, when full details came to hand, it was only wonderful that any +had escaped with their lives, for the Spanish fleet was taken unawares. +Only half of the ships had steam up at the moment, while three were in +the hands of the dockyard staff, undergoing repairs. Those that were +ready steamed out to the open water, and formed in line of battle across +the opening of Cavité Bay. As they took up their positions, Admiral +Dewey and the American fleet swerved and ran down the line. + +Twice did the fleet pass along the Spanish line, and by then the _Reina +Cristina_, the flagship, was in flames, and had lost some fifty of her +crew in killed, while the greater number were wounded. The other ships +had fared as badly, and had been riddled with shell. Indeed, while the +American fleet had been struck in all some dozen times, the _Reina +Cristina_ alone had been pierced by more than seventy missiles. By the +time Admiral Dewey had passed down the line for the fifth and last time, +the Spanish ships were burning and sinking in all directions. + +Seeing that all was lost, Admiral Montojo, who had, after the fire on +board the flagship, transferred his flag to a small cruiser, gave orders +that all who were able were to scuttle their ships and abandon them. The +command was reluctantly carried out, the wounded being taken ashore and +placed in the villages, while the uninjured marched for Manila, bearing +with them their arms and the breeches of their more or less useless +cannon. + +Having thus put out of action Admiral Montojo's whole fighting force, +the Americans drew off for breakfast, and, having refreshed themselves, +steamed into Cavité Bay in two lines. Here they met with little +resistance, and in a very short while had silenced the shore batteries. +When at last they drew off for the night, the naval arsenal at Cavité +was in their hands, all the shipping within the harbor was in flames, +while the town of Manila itself lay under their guns. Indeed, the might +of Spain was broken in the seas which surrounded the Philippine Islands. +But there the victory stopped, for by this time the American fleet was +sadly short of shell and powder, and in addition there were no troops at +hand to invade the island. Consequently, as the Spanish commander +refused to surrender, Admiral Dewey found himself in a dilemma, in which +we will leave him for the moment, while Hal Marchant and his doings +claim our attention again. + +Three days after landing at Key West he went aboard the _Hudson_ again, +and in due course stepped upon the deck of the flagship, the _New York_. + +"How's the youngster?" asked his naval friend, shaking Hal by the hand. + +"Doing well, I am glad to say. But he'll be in hospital for a month." + +"And by then this war will be over," was the answer. "Our troops are +getting into fighting order away over in the States, and before long +they will be sailing for Cuba. Then I fancy two weeks will settle the +Dons." + +"And what is to happen in the meanwhile?" asked Hal. + +"That's not easy to answer right now. The Philippines are going to be a +bother, and may even delay the invasion of Cuba, for it seems that the +natives there have made up their minds to be free of Spaniards and +Americans too. That, of course, is clearly out of the question, and I +believe a part of the force prepared for Cuba will be sent to the China +seas. You see, Cuba will be freed and given independence, but with the +Philippines it is a different matter. Up to this we Americans have held +aloof from foreign conquest, but now it is necessary that we should have +some possession in the East, for it is there that trouble with other +nations is likely to arise in future. So, no doubt, we shall just go for +these insurgents tooth and nail, till they think better of it and accept +us as their masters. + +"Another matter also is engaging our attention. Everyone in the fleet +has to be precious spry, for Admiral Cervera has sailed with a Spanish +fleet from Cadiz, and some say has already left St. Vincent for these +seas. I need not tell you that Admiral Sampson hopes to catch him, and +is disposing his vessels so as to watch all the approaches to Cuban +waters. If we fall in with the hostile fleet, there will be a general +action, and I tell you, sir, that the Amurricans will win. At any rate, +you won't find a single commander who will strike his flag. + +"In the meantime, and while we are keeping an eye open for Cervera, we +are to make an attack upon San Juan, which, I dare say you know, lies +very close to Cuba. It is a most important station, situated on the +coast of Puerto Rico, one of the Caribbean Islands, and if in our +possession would be an excellent base at which to concentrate our forces +for the invasion of Cuba. If Cervera were to slip in there, his gunboats +would make things very hot for us. Hillo! Time's up. I ought to have +been on the bridge ten minutes ago. So long, Marchant, and let us hope +that we have some fun to look forward to." + +He nodded gayly to Hal, and ran up on to the bridge, looking +particularly smart and sailor-like in his white suit and his +linen-covered cap. + +Hal paced up and down the deck for some time, closely observing the +other vessels. Then he dived down to the gunroom to consult the papers. +Already he felt quite at home, and like one of the officers, for he had +been made an honorary member of the mess, and was in receipt of +sufficient remuneration to pay his way. Indeed, by a friendly +arrangement, he had been engaged as guide, in the not unlikely +eventuality of a party of sailors being landed at Santiago. And so long +as he remained on the ship, this arrangement was to be in force; but he +had been careful, when accepting the post, to stipulate that, should an +opportunity occur for him to land at Cuba, he was to take it at once, +promising that he would return at the earliest moment, if it were +possible, and if not, that he would transfer his services to the troops +when they landed to invade the island. + +"I've had orders from the commodore to make things agreeable to you," +said the paymaster of the ship, soon after Hal came aboard. "Somehow, he +seems to fancy that you're mad keen to slip ashore, and if that is the +case, you're to go when you like. Up till then, you'll be ready to land +and show the boys round at any moment. In return there's free rations +with the officers, and so much allowed for extra tobacco and the like. +If you do slip ashore--and I think you won't, because it is the kind of +thing that a madman would do--then you've got to promise to come back to +the ship as soon as you can, or to fall in with the troops. Now, do you +jump at it or not?" + +"The terms will suit me very well," Hal answered readily, only too +thankful to feel that he was no longer a guest, but had some right on +the ship. + +And now for many days nothing of importance occurred. As predicted by +the lieutenant, a bombardment of San Juan was attempted, but with +negative results, and thereafter the fleet, sailing under the orders and +flag of Admiral Sampson, patrolled the seas in and about Cuba, keeping +a bright and anxious look-out all the while for the appearance of +Admiral Cervera's warships. + +Occasionally trifling engagements took place, and the Dons, looking from +their forts, seldom failed to spy one or more of the blockading fleet in +the offing. But no real success worthy of the name was gained on either +side. An attempt on the part of the Americans to cut the cables was +frustrated by the Spanish, who in this and in other engagements proved +that a few, at least, of those who garrisoned the island were efficient. +On the whole the Dons scored, but not to any marked degree. Then an +event occurred which altered the plans of America, and caused Hal once +again to run into danger. + +"We've had news that Cervera sailed with his fleet from St. Vincent," +said his friend the lieutenant one day, coming forward with a message +just received on the flagship by semaphore. "The Spanish admiral hauled +up his anchors and got the steam turned on somewhere about April 28th. +Since that he's been lost. No one has so much as a notion where he's +been, and I tell you the whole American fleet has been watchin'. Now the +tale comes that the _Maria Teresa_--that's the flagship--and three other +cruisers, with three destroyers that were built for the Dons some time +ago by Britishers over in England, have hoodwinked the whole lot of us, +and have slipped safely into Santiago. Mind you, it is not likely, but +it's possible--quite possible; though, how on earth he managed to get +through, without being discovered, is more than I can guess." + +"Then I suppose that Admiral Sampson will order his fleet to Santiago?" +said Hal. + +"So, young man; you'll be a naval expert before you've left us. We're +right now for the place, and I should fancy that Havana will be left in +the cold." + +"I'm very glad you are returning to my part of the island again," said +Hal in tones of pleasure, "Now I shall have a chance of slipping +ashore." + +"That you may," was the reassuring answer. "If Cervera's fleet is really +there, we shall be doin' somethin', you may be sure. Most likely there +will be a landin', but it's too early to say for certain. When it does +come along, though, my promise is a promise, and I'll stick to it and +give you a helping hand." + +Hal had to be satisfied with this, and spent the hours that intervened +before the _New York_ reached the neighborhood of Santiago in wandering +aimlessly up and down the deck, wondering all the time what had happened +at the hacienda during his long absence. + +Even when the green-clad hills of Eastern Cuba were in sight he was +still far from his object, for as yet there was nothing more than +rumor--rumor which too often misleads or deliberately lies--to show that +the Spanish fleet had arrived. Evidence there was already to hand which +showed that Admiral Cervera had sailed straight from his station in the +Cape Verde Isles to Martinique, and from there to Curaçoa. From that +moment he had been lost. Rumor, as has been said, described his arrival +in Santiago, and, indeed, the news was published in Spain, the +government at Madrid declaring it to have been received direct by cable +from Cuba. But it is not well always to believe the report of an enemy, +for this might, after all, be only a simple and harmless _ruse de +guerre_. And so for many days the American fleet under Sampson patrolled +the seas, while Admiral Schley, who had also come upon the scene with +another fleet of proud vessels flying the Stars and Stripes, sailed +along the southern coast, reconnoitering every harbor. + +"I can't get to the bottom of these Dons," said Lieutenant Samuel K. +Billing in grumbling tones one day, as the _New York_ lay to on the +ocean, slowly drifting along the coast. "Here we are, longin' to know +what's happened to Cervera, and just doin' nothin'. And how are we to +obtain information? I guess that a bold course would suit the case +better than anything. Just sail right in to a close range, so as to +search the whole of Santiago with our glasses." + +"That does sound the most sensible course," Hal agreed. "At any rate, it +would save all this unnecessary delay, and would keep the American +people in better humor. They must be very anxious for stirring news away +in the States." + +"So they are. But look here, Marchant; if Cervera is really in there, +why does he not make a rush at us? That is what leads me to doubt +whether he's in the island, or, rather, in the harbor; for if he were +anchored in Santiago Bay, and just took the trouble to send out his +destroyers, why, we should be most uneasy." + +This, indeed, was the argument used by many. If Cervera--who was known +to have three British-built destroyers with him--were really in +Santiago, why, then, did he lie hidden and skulking in there? Why did he +not take advantage of his strong position, and of the uncertainty +covering his whereabouts, to steal out at night and fall upon the +American ships which patrolled the open sea? A bold man with such +possibilities before him, and with such obvious advantages, might well +do much for the country he served, and wreak havoc in the ranks of the +enemy's fleet. What did it mean to one acquainted with the noble +profession of a sailor? Risk? Yes, certainly; but imagine what glory and +what honor if success were to crown his efforts! Choosing some densely +dark night, and with all lights carefully dowsed, the commander of one +of those low, rakish-looking destroyers might easily run from the +harbor, dash amongst the enemy, and discharge torpedoes right and left. +What if the bag were only one proud ship each night? It would still be +a fine result, and the loss of confidence amongst the Americans, even +with their iron nerves, would be an advantage to the Spaniards in future +conflicts, for nothing tells upon the fighting qualities of a force, +whether on land or at sea, like constant harassing tactics, and fear of +attack which comes only when it is least suspected, and so suddenly as +to make retaliation impossible. + +In spite of all the possibilities, there was not so much as a move from +the harbor, and even when a transport, laden with coal, was held up just +outside and within shot of the batteries on Morro Castle, there was no +sign of help, and no destroyers ran out to attack the American ships. + +And yet, incredible though it may seem, Cervera had reached Santiago as +early as May the 18th, though it was not till the end of the month, when +Admiral Schley and his consorts made a reconnaissance in force, that it +was definitely decided that the long-lost fleet was there. Day after day +he had been lying hidden behind the promontory, with steam always up, +and yet undecided how to act, and never venturing to leave the harbor. +Truly a policy that was scarcely likely to win honor and possessions for +his country! + +It was a day of excitement and high hope when at last Cervera's +whereabouts was known to the American fleet. + +"George! But now it will be a game!" exclaimed Lieutenant Billing in +delight. "Marchant, there'll be a chance for you yet. Wait till we've +whopped this fellow to pieces, and then you shall go ashore." + +"But how will you whop him?" asked Hal. "You have him safely in the +harbor, I'll allow; but to reach him is another matter." + +"That it is, and I ought not to have talked about knocking him to +pieces. But I meant this. There he is, and there he'll stay. Do you +follow? We're goin' to put a cork in the bottle." + +"A cork? But how?" + +"Like this," the lieutenant explained. "Santiago, as you must know +mighty well, has got a long, narrow channel leadin' to the sea. Well, +the water is not extraordinarily deep, and I reckon that a ship sunk +sheer across the opening would act as a bung. We can't get in, as you've +mentioned. It isn't exactly the kind of job an admiral would fancy, for +there are mines placed everywhere in the fair way, to say nothing of the +guns linin' the sides." + +"Yes, they've mines, I know," Hal interposed, with a smile, remembering +his own experience. + +"So you do, young fellow. I was forgettin'. Well, we don't take kindly +to the notion of walking straight in, so, if the gate is shut tight, it +won't matter at all to us. But to the Don it will. He'd be just like a +fly in a bottle, and he'd be as much ours as if he sailed out right +away, and got knocked to pieces with our shells." + +"Yes, I can see that," Hal agreed. "Once he allows himself to be shut +in, he will be out of the game altogether. He will be harmless to you, +and a dead loss to his own side. In fact, the Spanish fleet will cease +to exist." + +"Put very nicely, and that is the case," the lieutenant answered. "But +now, about this bung. Lieutenant Hobson will put it in position. He's a +kind of specialist in naval construction, and this bottlin' game is his +plan from the very beginnin'. I can tell you that he's a very fine +fellow." + +"Why, it will be a most risky undertaking!" exclaimed Hal. "To block the +opening efficiently, the ship will have to be sunk close under the +batteries. It will mean certain death for all." + +"Well, it may," was the answer. "It is frightfully risky, I'll allow; +but it is not certain death. You see, the darkest night will be chosen, +and every man will be wearin' a life-belt, and will have a raft close +handy to swim to. Supposin' the guns do go off, the chances are that no +one will be hit. But those torpedoes will be precious nasty, I'll agree. +They'll kill if anything does. Yes, now that I come to look into the +matter more closely, I'm inclined to fall in with you, young Marchant. +It is bound to be very risky; but then, Hobson is a fine, gallant +fellow!" + +He spoke in tones of the utmost pride, and well he might, for the +officer to whom he referred, though only twenty-eight years of age, had +already attained to no mean reputation in his profession. And who but a +bold and resolute man could have volunteered for such an undertaking as +that proposed? Surely no weakling could expect to carry it out, while +for a coward to attempt to take part in it, and, more than all, to lead +what was no better than a forlorn hope, was ridiculous, and utterly out +of the question. + +Lieutenant Hobson had a fine spirit, and a glance at his face was +sufficient to show the class of man he was. "I leave myself without +anxiety in the hands of Almighty God," he wrote, when setting out for +the war, and he entered upon this hazardous and all-important enterprise +in the same condition of tranquil and absolutely fearless confidence. + +"Yes, he must be a plucky beggar," Hal agreed. "I wonder +whether--er--er--er----" He became suddenly silent and thoughtful. + +"Well, what is it?" the lieutenant exclaimed. + +"I was wondering whether I could go with Hobson," Hal said quietly. "You +see, it would be doing something for the cause, and for my bread and +butter, and it would give me the opportunity for which I have been +longing, and enable me to reach the island." + +"Yes, and of bein' shot," the lieutenant answered sharply. "Say, +Marchant, don't you do somethin' that's mighty silly. All the volunteers +that go with Hobson will be made prisoners as sure as eggs. They'll run +a chance of bein' shot as well. Now, if you were captured with them, +that rascal of a sweep--what's his name? d'Ar--d'Arousta; yes, that's +the fellow--would spot you at once, and then--click! It would be all up +with Mister Marchant, I reckon." + +"It might," Hal replied thoughtfully; "but I'll take my chance. Will you +help me to join as one of the volunteers?" + +"Why, man alive, you're just askin' too much," the lieutenant answered +hotly. "When volunteers were called for, how many do you think stepped +out? Every mother's son aboard the whole combined fleet! Every one of +them, I tell you, and a precious fine hullabaloo they're kicking up too, +now that the matter is settled. You see, only seven boys are wanted, so +there's that same number walking about just now as proud as peacocks. +And there's hundreds more, officers and men, who are sayin' all that's +black, and grumbling atrociously. Seven is the number, young Marchant, +and you'd better remember it." + +"I will, and I'll be the eighth," said Hal in the same quiet voice. +"Look here, Billing, I'm very anxious to get ashore. Will you, like a +good fellow, contrive to get me included in the expedition?" + +"I'll try, and I can't say more than that," was the answer, given with +obvious reluctance and hesitation. "Tell you what it is, Marchant. For +one of your country, you're one of the best fellows I know. I've taken a +fancy to you, and now you've the cheek to ask me to help to get you +killed! That is playing the wrong game." + +"Nonsense! It is not so bad as that," Hal replied, with a smile. "All I +ask is that you will help to get me aboard Hobson's ship. I'll manage +the rest." + +"Well, I'll see." The lieutenant nodded and walked away, leaving Hal +sunk in a brown study. + +"It seems a chance," he said thoughtfully--"a chance in a hundred. Every +day out here I get more anxious about the hacienda, about the safety of +Mr. Brindle and Dora. I've promised to fight with the Americans, and no +doubt I shall have to run many risks. This is a big one, but not greater +than that which I took when escaping from the island. In that case, my +knowledge of Santiago helped me to get away safely, and I see no reason +why it should not aid me in reaching the land and stealing into the +forest without being observed. They say that every foot of the coast is +watched, but it is more likely that all eyes will be fixed in the +direction of the harbor entrance, where the ship is being sunk; so that +a single individual might easily evade the sentries. Yes, I know the +harbor, and will willingly take the risk. The job now is to make +arrangements to go, and if the worst happens, and I am refused +permission, I will slip overboard and swim to the vessel selected as the +bung, and climb aboard her as best I can." + +That an attempt to close the entrance to the harbor of Santiago was +about to be made was already public property in the American fleet, and +everyone watched the preparations for the event with the greatest +interest. Lieutenant Hobson, with a large force of men, was busily +engaged upon a big tramp collier, the _Merrimac_, which was destined to +be sunk across the entrance. For this purpose, a row of ten miniature +torpedoes was fitted along the port-side of the steamer. They were each +loaded with eighty-two pounds of gunpowder, and were connected by means +of wires with a battery placed on the bridge. Pressure upon a simple +button would fire them, and, it was hoped, would blow such a hole in the +vessel's side that she would sink immediately. + +Then their duties were carefully assigned to the seven men. Two were +told off for the engine-room, and the remainder were to be on deck. At +the critical moment steam was to be turned off, and the fore and after +anchors cut away from their lashings and dropped. Then the sea-cocks +were to be opened wide, and the wheel lashed. By that time all but one +would have dived overboard, and would have swum to the dinghy, which was +to be towed behind the ship, and would contain life-belts and rifles. + +And then would come the final act. Hobson, the last upon the ship, would +press the button and explode the torpedoes, and follow his men into the +water. All were to be dressed in underclothes only, with revolvers and +ammunition strapped round their waists in waterproof belts. + +"It's the finest thing that was ever thought of," said Lieutenant +Billing enthusiastically, a few hours before the attempt was to be made. +"If it does not succeed--and I tell you that that's likely--it will +deserve to be remembered. I guess that the Dons will concentrate every +gun on the _Merrimac_, and though it will be dark at the time, their +searchlight will help the shootin'. So every one of the boys will have +to run the chance of being shot. Are you still anxious to go?" + +"I am," Hal answered, with determination. "I have thought the matter +over, and have fully made up my mind to risk it. If Hobson and his men +undertake it cheerfully, why should not I?" + +"That just depends on the stakes," the lieutenant replied with a sly +smile. "You see, our boys will be doin' somethin' for their country. +They will be patriots, you understand. Now, with you it's different. You +are wantin' to get ashore to see how your friends are doin'. I suppose +they are particular friends. Anyway, the attraction must be very +strong." + +"It is," Hal murmured. "But what have you arranged?" + +"Just this. I'm sure to go aboard the _Merrimac_ with orders before the +evenin' is done. I'll take you along too, and when you are there you +must just manage for yourself, and, whatever happens, Hobson must never +know." + +"He shall not," Hal answered readily. "I'll hide away, and when we reach +the channel, I will swim for land, leaving the others to make for the +dinghy." + +"Well, I hope it'll come out as rosy as that," the lieutenant replied. +"Now, you get right down into my cabin; you'll find two bundles there, +tied to a belt. One's a revolver and cartridges; the other is food. +You'll want both. No more now, young fellow. I am not going to have any +thanks for helping you to get killed. Here's good luck to you." + +He shook Hal heartily by the hand, and then hurried away. As for the +latter, he at once followed the instruction given him, and then, +carrying the two parcels, went to his own cabin. + +"I'll make all ready for a swim," he murmured, turning the contents of a +drawer on to the carpet. + +There were some thin cotton suits, and he at once selected a coat and +the lightest pair of trousers, tearing these across at the knees, so as +to make them like football knickers. Then he threw off his outer +clothes, and having donned the ones he had just selected, put on his own +suit over them. A minute later he was ready, the belt attached to his +waist and out of sight, and the parcel of food beneath his coat. + +Just as dusk was falling, a marine came to call him, and on ascending to +the deck he found the lieutenant waiting. They at once went over the +side into a cutter, and were rowed across to the _Merrimac_. + +"There she is," whispered Lieutenant Billing, as her enormous hull hove +in sight. "Good luck, Marchant! Just you slip aboard after me, and look +round for yourself. So long to you." + +"Right; I know what to do. Good-by, and thank you very much." + +Hal stretched out his hand, and gripping the lieutenant's, pressed it +warmly. Then he clambered up the swaying rope ladder on to the deck. By +this time night had fallen, and as it was necessary to have no lights +burning, the ship was in darkness from stem to stern. Hal at once +crossed the deck, and, feeling his way along the engine skylights, came +to a wide, open companion way. He slipped down the stairs, and at once +found himself in a small saloon. Then his fingers touched a handle, and, +turning it, he entered a small cabin, through the unshaded porthole of +which he caught a glimpse of distant lights, twinkling faintly from the +ships of Admiral Sampson's squadron. + +"This will do for me," he murmured in tones of satisfaction. "I'll lie +here till the hour for action arrives." + +He sat down and kept a watch out to sea. Occasionally he heard footsteps +overhead, and once the low murmur of voices, evidently from men lying +alongside in a boat. But soon all was quiet, save for a low grating +sound which now and again reached his ear, and told him that the stokers +were at work. Hour succeeded hour, and still he remained in the cabin, +though he was becoming more and more restless and troubled, for the +_Merrimac_ did not move. At last, when midnight was past, her anchor +was hove up, and she steamed away for Santiago, her departure having +been delayed, as all was not ready for the enterprise at the appointed +time. + +Hal at once sprang to his feet, and, having seen that his revolver was +well secured, and the parcel of food tied to his belt, he pulled off his +outer clothes and stood up in the thin cotton ones which he had +selected. But, after all, he was to be disappointed, for suddenly there +was the panting of machinery, and a low black hull rushed past, leaving +a trail of fiery sparks behind it. + +"_Merrimac_, ahoy!" someone hailed. "Admiral's orders that you put about +at once and drop anchor over the old moorings. The dawn will break +within an hour." + +The torpedo boat at once sheered off, and as he watched from his +porthole, Hal saw her swing round with a rush that sent her swaying and +dipping into the oily sea. + +"Off till to-morrow," he murmured. "Very well, it is disappointing; but +I must make the best of it, and as I am here in a comfortable cabin, +why, I shall stay here. I have grub with me, and there are blankets on +the bunk. I'll just see what can be done with the door." + +He fumbled at the handle, and discovered a key and a latch, which he +fastened. Then he lay down on the settee, and covered himself with a +rug. A few moments later he was asleep, worn out by the excitement of +anticipation, and by the long vigil which he had kept. + +When he awoke, the sun was going down, and another day was almost gone. + +"Now for it!" he exclaimed. "I'll just indulge in a meal, and will then +prepare for a swim." + +He undid the parcel, ate heartily of biscuit and meat, and, after +carefully reconnoitering, popped into the saloon, and obtained a drink +from a small filter. Then he locked himself in the cabin again, and +packed up the remains of the food. A few hours later the moorings were +quietly dropped, and in trying silence the _Merrimac_ steamed away for +Santiago upon as adventurous an expedition as was ever contemplated. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +FORTUNE FAVORS THE BRAVE + + +Well might it be said that the good wishes and anxious thoughts of +hundreds followed the gallant Hobson and the meager crew of the +_Merrimac_ as she steamed towards Santiago. High hope of success, +apprehension increased by the darkness and uncertainty as to her +whereabouts, kept everyone in a fever. No one could sleep, and from the +open ports, and from the silent and darkened decks of battleships, +cruisers, and gunboats, a thousand and more pairs of anxious eyes stared +into the gloom. + +"Where was she? Had she run aground? Had she lost her bearings in the +darkness? Hush! Did anyone hear that? What was it then? Oh, only +escaping steam? What a relief to think of it!" + +The questions were passed along the decks, time and again, and for the +most part left unanswered. Then, as each man became silent in despair of +hearing anything, a faint, almost inaudible hail came across the heaving +water. + +"Hark! Huss-s-s-h! Did anyone hear that? What was it? Discovery?" + +Almost instantly a spout of flame shot from a cliff beneath the Morro +Castle, cutting the darkness in twain as with an arrow, while a +deafening report set the air throbbing and reverberating. Another +followed, and then a third, and within a few seconds a line of flaming +dots cut along the dark hillside, while shells flashed brilliantly red +in the air as they shivered into a thousand pieces. Nor was this all. +The torpedo-boat _Pluton_ was patrolling the entrance, and at once added +the sharp, angry snap of her quick-firers to the din, while guns from +another battery ashore, and from the _Reina Mercedes_, a battleship +anchored within the harbor, played upon the black hull of the devoted +_Merrimac_. Add to this a couple of torpedoes, which were discharged in +her direction, and some idea can be obtained of the terrors that +assailed her. + +Meanwhile Hal had been by no means idle. No sooner had the moorings been +dropped, than he opened the cabin door and went into the saloon. + +"I'll just stay here till I think we're getting close inshore," he +murmured; "then I'll get on deck. Let me think. The small torpedoes are +placed to port; that means that I must get away to starboard to escape +the explosion. Hobson stays on board for that, and so shall I. When she +begins to sink, I shall go overboard, and swim straight for the shore. +By Jove! I forgot a life-belt, but perhaps there's one in the cabin." + +He ran back, and felt above his head for the racks upon which the belts +are usually placed. A low cry of pleasure escaped his lips, for the very +thing he wanted was there. Taking it down, he promptly slipped his arms +through the slings and quickly buckled the belt on. Then he crept to the +companion-way, and sat down upon the bottom step of the ladder, where he +waited for what, in his overstrung condition, seemed to be hours. + +Bang! The report made him start to his feet, and stand there holding to +the rail, while the thump of his heart seemed to shake him from head to +foot. + +Bang, bang, bang! Crash! The _Merrimac_ shivered as a six-inch shell +struck her true in the center, and piercing her thin plates as if they +were sheets of tissue paper, exploded forward of the engines, blowing a +big gaping hole through the saloon in which Hal sat. + +"Another such as that, and I shall get caught down here," he thought. +"If I am to be hit, it will be better to receive the wound on deck, for +then, when she sinks, I may have a chance, and not be drowned like a rat +in a cage." + +He felt his way up the ladder, and crawled silently across the deck to +the starboard side, where he crouched close to the bulwarks. Above him +the bridge appeared dimly, and behind that a circle of sparks flew into +the air from the funnel. There, too, standing upon the frail support, +was the hero of the hour--Lieutenant Hobson, the gallant officer who had +devised the scheme, and begged, not in vain, to carry it out. + +More than once, as the guns on the hillside flashed, Hal saw his figure +silhouetted clearly against the light. He stepped from the side to the +center of the bridge, and, placing his hands to his mouth, so that his +voice should not be drowned by the din and uproar, shouted some order in +stentorian tones to the man who was stationed at the wheel. Then Hal +heard the tiller-chains rattling, and for an instant in the light of a +brilliant flash, which had darted suddenly from the battery stationed on +the frowning heights of Morro Castle, caught sight of the steersman +bending to his work, and putting all his power into the spokes. But the +_Merrimac_ kept steadily on, failing to answer to her rudder, which had +been smashed to pieces by a shell. At the same moment steam was turned +off, and the two men who had been stationed in the engine-room hastily +quitted it, and tumbled up on deck as fast as their legs would carry +them. + +"It's getting nearly time for the torpedoes," Hal murmured, "for I judge +that we must now be approaching the entrance of Santiago harbor. Ah! +what was that?" + +Two loud splashes reached his ear, coming from fore and aft, and a +moment's reflection told him that the anchors had been let go. But the +Americans were not to have it all their own way, for ill luck again +followed the _Merrimac_. A shell, unfortunate for them, but lucky for +the Spaniards had crashed into her stern at a most critical moment, and +had smashed her rudder into splinters; and now, when that defect might +have been remedied by anchoring fore and aft, and afterwards floating +her down to the entrance to Santiago, the anchors, in whose powers +Lieutenant Hobson's hopes were centered, failed to grip the bed of the +ocean, and in consequence the long black hull forged slowly on through +the water till it took the ground near Estrella Point. As it did so, +there was a series of loud and deafening reports as her intrepid +commander pressed the button and exploded his row of miniature +torpedoes. + +"That will finish her!" thought Hal. "I'll wait till she sinks lower, +and then I'll dive overboard. My best plan will be to swim away from her +as far as possible, though there will be no great danger of being +carried under as far as I can see, for the water here is very shallow, +and will scarcely cover her upper works when the keel is resting upon +the bottom. I'll just creep to the bows, so as to make it as short a +swim as possible." + +He rose to his feet and stole forward. But, unfortunately for Hal, a +strong tide was running, and floating the sinking _Merrimac_ free of the +land, it swept her into deep water. An instant later, a Whitehead +torpedo, discharged by the _Reina Mercedes_, which lay within the +harbor, rushed seething through the water at more than thirty knots an +hour, and struck the hull right forward almost directly beneath Hal's +feet. There was a terrific concussion, and a blinding sheet of flame +seemed to envelop the _Merrimac_. A column of water started high into +the air, while Hal was hurled overboard as if from the arms of a +Hercules. Indeed, so great was the shock that he lost consciousness, and +might very well have been drowned in that condition. However, the cold +water surging about him brought him to his senses almost instantly. Then +the instinct of self-preservation asserted itself, and, without exactly +knowing why, he commenced to strike out lustily, swimming away from the +shore, for he was almost too dazed to know what he was doing. + +Suddenly the clatter of quick-firers behind attracted his attention, +and, turning, he began to forge a way towards the shore. And now he had +cause to congratulate himself upon the fact that he had donned a +life-belt, for the shock of the torpedo explosion had sadly deprived him +of his strength. Indeed, but for the support he received, he would have +sunk there and then, and the name of Hal Marchant would have disappeared +from this narrative. He was not, however, the sort of lad to give in +without a struggle, so, clenching his teeth, he turned on his side, and +struck out with all his power. Something touched his hand--something +slimy and covered with weed--which he grasped with thankfulness. Then, +having rested for a moment, he dragged himself on to a mass of rock, +which jutted into the sea, and seated himself upon it, his head still +throbbing painfully, while his brain was dizzy and overcome by the crash +of the explosion. + +"This won't do," he said at last. "Dawn will be breaking before very +long, and it is quite time that I looked for a hiding-place. On the +appearance of the first ray of light I should at once be discovered if I +were still seated here. Besides, I must not forget that, once the +interest in the _Merrimac_ is gone, the sentries whose attention is +attracted just now to the entrance of the harbor will become more +vigilant in watching for the possible landing of enemies upon the +particular part of the coast intrusted to each man's care." + +He rose from his seat with an effort, for he was feeling thoroughly done +up. Then he groped his way across the rough surface of the rock, and, +having waded through a deep pool, was in the act of climbing on to dry +ground, when someone pounced upon him with a guttural exclamation of +delight, and he found himself in the arms of a Spanish sentinel. + +"Halt! cease from struggling, or I will kill you!" the man cried, +clutching him by the shoulder and endeavoring to place his bayonet +against Hal's breast. + +The point pierced the thin clothing he was wearing, and dug slightly +into the flesh beneath. + +"Halt, I say!" the sentry hissed. "The weapon points to your heart, and, +by St. James, I will thrust it home if you do but move an inch! +Surrender, I say!" + +"Never!" Hal answered hoarsely. Then, shaking the sentry's hand off, and +pushing his weapon aside with a hasty movement, he stepped back a pace, +and struck out blindly with all his might. His fist hit the Spaniard +full on the chest, and sent him staggering backwards, and his rifle +crashing to the ground. But he recovered himself in a moment, and threw +himself upon his prisoner with an exclamation of fury. + +"Pig! Villain!" he cried. "Yield, or I will toss you into the water, and +drown you like a rat." + +Clasped in each other's arms, they swayed from side to side upon the +rocks which fringe the margin of the sea. Then Hal's foot twisted upon a +stone, and both fell to the ground with a crash. + +What followed was a blank to Hal. He remembered nothing, and lay upon +the seashore silent and apparently lifeless for the space of more than +ten minutes. Then a puff of cold air fanned his cheek, and he suddenly +found himself lying with his eyes wide open, staring at the stars +above. + +"Hillo! What's this?" he murmured vacantly. "Stars! A clear sky! Where +is the cabin, then? Where is Billing?" + +He stretched out a hand, and touched something that was wet. Then his +fingers came in contact with a head of hair, and he withdrew them +instantly, with an involuntary shudder. At once the struggle with the +sentry flashed across his wandering mind, and brought him to his senses +with a start. + +"By Jove! I wonder whether he's hurt?" he said. "I'll see, and then cut +away for safety, for it will never do to remain here." + +He stretched out his hand again, and having discovered the sentry's arm, +placed the tips of his fingers on the wrist. But there was no movement +of the pulse, though he longed to feel it. Struggling into a sitting +position, he shuffled closer to the man, and listened to hear if he were +breathing. But there was not a sound; not even a sigh rewarded his +attention. + +"Poor beggar! Dead!" he exclaimed. "Well, it is the fortune of war, for +it was my life or his. I suppose he struck his head in falling." + +This was, in fact, the case, and to it Hal no doubt owed his life. But +he had no time to sit there and think. Dawn was dangerously near, and if +he was to reach a safe haven, he must be moving at once. + +"Ah, I've got it!" he exclaimed suddenly. "I'll change into his +clothes." + +He started to his feet, and going to where the body lay, undid the +buttons, and tore tunic and trousers off. The boots and socks followed, +and were rapidly transferred to his own person. Then he picked up the +rifle, and prepared to move away. + +"Supposing his comrades come in the morning and find him?" he suddenly +asked himself. "They will suspect that someone has landed, and borrowed +his clothes. I must tumble him into the water." + +He bent over the limp figure of the unfortunate sentry once more, and +carefully felt for a heart-beat. But there was none, and it was evident +that the man was dead. + +"It's not nice, I know," Hal murmured. "But it's for my safety, and +therefore must be done. He won't be any the worse off, poor fellow!" + +It was indeed a trying act for any young man to carry out, and it was +not without a fierce struggle that Hal at length overcame his +compunction. War was war, he told himself, and this kind of thing was +bound to happen. He must put aside all feelings of compassion and act +like a man. + +The thought braced his nerves, and dropping the rifle for a moment, he +stooped, lifted the lifeless form in his arms, and tossed it into the +sea. + +Then the necessity for instant action asserted itself, and picking up +the rifle, he turned inland, and struck boldly for the town, leaving the +_Merrimac_ sunk deep at one side of the channel leading to the harbor of +Santiago. + +Up and up the steep rocks he toiled, till he came to a deep gully, down +which a tiny watercourse tumbled towards the sea. He could feel shrubs +on either side, and thick grass beneath his feet. Then, as if fortune +had determined to follow him, the sky in the east commenced rapidly to +lighten, and so enabled him to see his whereabouts. + +"There is a thick mist, which will lie on the land till the sun is up," +he said with satisfaction. "That will give me time to hit upon a likely +spot. Ah! what is this? This should suit me." + +He suddenly espied a hollow in the midst of a mass of volcanic rock. It +was carpeted with grass, and was overhung by a few big-leaved rock palms +and ferns, all dripping with moisture. It was an ideal hiding-place, +and he promptly crept into it and sat down, hugging himself in his +borrowed tunic, for the morning air was bitterly cold. + +A little later the sun came up in all his glory, and, topping the +bowlders on either side, poured a flood of grateful heat upon him, +warming him, and drying the leaves and grass. + +Hal removed his wide-brimmed hat from his head, and cautiously looked +out towards the mouth of the harbor. + +"Ah! there is the _Merrimac_," he exclaimed, seeing the top of a mast +projecting. "Bad luck! it's in deep water on one side, so that the +entrance is not closed. Cervera will be able to come out, after all. But +it was a plucky attempt, and I only hope that Hobson and his men have +got safely away. Hillo! there's the raft, and I can see men clinging to +it." + +This was the case, for the explosion had swept the crew overboard, to +find that their dinghy had been smashed by a shell. But a long, +raft-like float had been prepared, and to this all swam. Even as Hal +caught sight of them, a steam-launch flying Spanish colors ran out from +behind the headland of cliffs, and steered towards them. + +"Prisoners at any rate," remarked Hal. "That is better than being +drowned, and I've no doubt that the Dons will treat them well, and +admire them for their bravery; for it was a plucky thing to do." + +Hobson and his men were, in fact, received in a most friendly manner. +Admiral Cervera was himself on board the launch, and greeted the +prisoners in the most courteous way. Then they were taken back to the +harbor and placed upon the _Mercedes_, where the best of treatment was +accorded them, Hobson being taken to the first lieutenant's cabin, +while the men were sent to the quarters for'ard, where they were regaled +with biscuit and coffee, with Spanish cigarettes to follow. + +So highly did Cervera think of their bravery that he promptly sent an +officer out to Admiral Sampson to acquaint him of their safety. + +Hal watched the launch take the eight men on board, and then turned his +eyes inland. + +High above him, and standing far back, was a battery with open +embrasures. It was partly masked in low bush, which extended down to the +gully in which he was lying. + +"If I wait till night and follow the stream, it will take me to the left +of the fort," he said, rising to his knees, and looking between the +leaves of the palm trees. "From there I will strike into the bush, and +follow its edge till I get behind Santiago. Then away for the hacienda." + +He lay back in his hiding-place, and, feeling secure from discovery, +opened his packet of food, and ate a hearty meal. A draught from the +stream appeased his thirst, which was great after the salt water he had +swallowed. Then he lay down, and, worn out by his exertions, fell +asleep. He awoke some hours later, when it was getting dark. + +"Now for it," he said. "I'm feeling as fresh as a daisy, and, after the +trouble I have been put to, mean to reach the hacienda. If anyone tries +to stop me, it will be the worse for him." + +He jumped to his feet, and looked hastily to his rifle, to make sure +that it was in good condition, and the bayonet fixed. Then he stole into +the gully, and waded up stream. It twisted and curved, bearing steadily, +however, to the left. At last, when Hal judged that he was beyond the +fort he stepped on to the bank, and struck off into the bush. + +"Now I'll go for the mules," he said, suddenly recollecting that when he +and Gerald left the hacienda on their way to Florida for the purpose of +fetching more negroes, they had placed their animals in the hands of an +aged native living on the outskirts of the town. "The fellow we left +them with is sure to have taken good care of them; and if only the +Spaniards have not relieved him of his charge, I shall be able to get a +mount, and so reach the hacienda long before the dawn breaks." + +An hour later he was at the tumble-down cottage in which the native +lived, and, having roused him, quickly got him to understand that he +required the mules. A few minutes sufficed to saddle them; then he +mounted one, and, leading the other, set off towards Eldorado at a brisk +canter. + +"Halt dar! Who am dat? I fire if you come one step nearer!" a voice +suddenly cried out as he rode through the dense plantation of sugar-cane +which surrounded the hacienda. + +"Don't shoot, boys! I'm Hal Marchant. I'm dressed in Spanish uniform," +Hal shouted in reply. + +Then he heard a conversation being carried on in low tones, and a moment +or two later someone struck a match and advanced with it between his +fingers. The tiny, fluttering flame showed the burly figure of a negro, +clad in plantation clothes, and bearing a rifle slung over his +shoulders. + +"Come forward if you de boss," the man cried, "Seems I know de voice." + +"Of course you do, Jake," Hal answered, slipping from the mule and +stepping up to the man, who was now closely followed by others. "Look at +me carefully. Though I am disguised, you who knew me before will have no +difficulty in recognizing the overseer." + +There were at once shrill cries of delight from the negroes, and they +ran towards him with outstretched hands. + +"Sure you am de boss right 'nough," Jake cried, for it was he who was in +advance of the others. "Oh, won't de missie be glad! Quick, sar; you +come right 'long up to de hacienda, and not wait one little moment. All +say ebery day, 'Where am de boss Hal and de young master? Am dey killed +by de Spanish dog? Oh, where am dey, Jake?'--Jake him not know. No boy +know, and eberyone go 'bout wid sad heart, and tink dat José dog get +hold ob de masters and shoot. Tink never see 'em more. All de boys +plenty sad, sar, and de missie an' de boss more dan all. Come quick, +sar; eberyone be plenty glad." + +The good fellow held out his hand, and clasped Hal's with a fervor which +showed how genuine his feelings were, while the flickering and uncertain +light cast by a second match which one of the negroes struck at the +moment showed tears in Jake's eyes, for he was very fond of Hal. + +"Yes, I dare say that all will be glad," Hal answered gayly, "especially +when the news I bring of the young master is so good. But there, trot +along, Jake; I'm in a hurry to reach Eldorado." + +"Quiet there, my men! What is this sudden commotion? Who is that +standing there with the mules?" + +It was Mr. Brindle's voice which came through the darkness, and Hal at +once shouted to him. + +"It's Hal Marchant," he cried. "I'm just returning, and Gerald is well, +and in Florida at this very moment." + +"What? Hal again! Where on earth have you been? What has happened to you +both since you left us? Come into the hacienda at once. My dear, dear +lad, how rejoiced I am to see you again!" + +Mr. Brindle rushed forward and shook Hal eagerly by the hand, till his +arm positively ached. + +"What does this mean?" he asked, noticing the Spanish uniform. "Dressed +as one of the enemy! But not one, really, I am open to wager all that I +possess. Come in, though. You can tell the tale when we are seated." + +They hurried to the hacienda, and were just stepping upon the veranda, +and were close beneath a lamp which threw all its light upon them, when +Dora ran out, having been disturbed by sounds in the plantation. +Instantly her eyes fell upon Hal; she stopped abruptly, brushed her hand +across her forehead, as if uncertain of the reality of what she saw, and +then staggered towards him with a low, quavering cry upon her lips. + +"Hal--Hal Marchant back to life again!" she murmured doubtfully. + +"Yes, the same, safe and sound, too, and come back home again," said our +hero, advancing boldly and taking her by both hands. "Are you glad to +see me Dora?" + +It was a question that might well have been left unasked, for the truth +was clearly to be seen in her upturned face, which was flooded with the +light from the lamp, and showed eyes sparkling with joy, and overflowing +with tears of thankfulness, while her lips trembled with emotion as she +endeavored to speak to him. Poor Dora could not steady herself to do +more than whisper his name, but she did that which was far better, and +went a long way to make amends; for, like the brave, simple-hearted girl +she was, she straightway stood on tiptoe, and, placing a hand on either +shoulder, kissed Hal on the cheek. + +"There," she said at last, with a return to her old playful mood, "you +may see for yourself, sir, whether or not I am pleased and glad at your +home coming. Glad! I am overjoyed! A weight is lifted from my heart, +for now I know that you are safe, and a glance at your face is +sufficient to tell me that Gerald, too, is well." + +"Yes; he was wounded, but is recovering fast," Hal answered, still in +some confusion after his hearty welcome, and the honest way in which +Dora had shown it. "No wonder that you have been upset at our long +absence, and at receiving no news. We have had many adventures, and as I +can see that you are both longing to hear all about them, I'll run +through them right away. + +"Let me see; we had scarcely left the hacienda, when we were arrested as +spies in Santiago. Things then were bad enough, for we offered +resistance, and, I am sorry to say, damaged the face of the officer who +was foolish enough to attempt to arrest us. We were captured after a +chase, and then José d'Arousta turned up like a bad penny, and made the +aspect of affairs infinitely worse. We were found to be carrying arms; +and, in short, with that fellow's evidence against us, we were convicted +of spying, and were sent to the Morro Castle with the pleasant prospect +of an early breakfast, a short walk, and then death at the hands of a +file of soldiers. I need not tell you that we managed to get the better +of our captors, and escaped from our prison during the night. A launch +happened to be in the harbor, and we promptly steamed out to sea in her. +Since that we have been with the American fleet. There, you have it all, +I fancy." + +"Escaped! Slipped out to sea in a launch! Why, a prisoner in the Morro +Castle is deemed as secure as bullion in the strong rooms of the Bank of +England! And you two lads managed it? Splendid! Just what we might have +expected. Now I can understand the noise and excitement that occurred in +Santiago on the night of your arrival there. But tell us how it is that +you have been so long away." + +Mr. Brindle rattled off his remarks and his questions in a manner that +was most confusing, and Hal at once prepared to give a full account of +his adventures. + +"Come," said Dora, with a smile, "Hal is thirsty, and, no doubt, hungry +too. Let us take him in and give him something to eat and drink. Then +perhaps he will be good enough to satisfy our curiosity." + +"That I will!" Hal exclaimed. "I can tell you that I am as hungry as a +hunter or as fifty hunters, for the matter of that, for I have not +tasted more than a bite since I swam from the sinking _Merrimac_ twenty +hours ago." + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +THE INVASION OF CUBA + + +"And so you were aboard the _Merrimac_, and were one of that +extraordinarily gallant crew?" said Mr. Brindle, when Hal had at length +told all that had befallen himself and Gerald since they left the +hacienda to fetch more help from Florida. "Indeed, my lad, it seems to +me that you have seen more adventures and more of this war, short though +it has been, than anyone else taking a part in it. One thing strikes me +forcibly, and that is your determination to return to the hacienda in +spite of all difficulties. What made you undertake the task? Consider +the frightful risks you ran, for now that you have time to look into the +matter, and judge of the dangers that menaced you, you cannot but admit +that your life would have paid for it had you been captured. There is +not a man in Santiago who would not give you over to the authorities if +he happened to recognize you; while, had the military but laid hands +upon you, your fate would have been sealed, for they have a score to pay +off, and would take good care that you did not outwit them as before." + +"I don't know that the danger was so very great," Hal answered quietly. +"You see, Mr. Brindle, you have been like a father to me since I lost my +own. You gave me a home and employment when I was an outcast and in +want, and I should have been an ungrateful cur if I had not endeavored +to return your kindness in some way. You sent me on a mission to obtain +negroes to defend the plantation, and when I left you, you were in what +one would call a very sorry plight. Unfortunately, I happened to fall in +with that fellow José d'Arousta, who we all know bears the hacienda and +its owners little love. I failed entirely to carry out your wishes, and +have naturally been anxious to know how you were doing without the help +which you so sorely needed. Once we had given the slip to the Spaniards, +I felt certain that they, led by that fellow I mentioned, would do all +in their power to discover us, and one of their first actions would +certainly be a visit to Eldorado. The consequences might well have been +serious, and, as a matter of fact, I have imagined that all sorts of +evil things had happened. That is the reason why I have worked hard to +get here, for I felt that I must settle the question. As to the risk, +well, I admit that it was great, but it is past now, and I can afford to +laugh at the adventure. Now, as to why I failed to bring negroes when I +sailed to Florida with Gerald. No one, not even the President of the +United States, could have chartered a boat to bring them here, for +transport is at a premium; and, moreover, the Spaniards watch every foot +of the shore. You heard how one poor fellow spotted me in the darkness; +what chance, then, had I of landing with a batch of negroes?" + +"Not the smallest, my lad. There is no need for an explanation as to why +you did not carry out your mission, for we all know by now that what Hal +Marchant sets himself to do he does, if it is possible, in spite of all +dangers and difficulties. As a matter of fact, I recognized that your +hopes were doomed a few days after you had ridden away. And now let me +tell you how we have fared. When you awake to-morrow, and go out on to +the veranda, you will find that a great change has taken place about the +hacienda; for the beautiful Eldorado, of which we were so proud, is now +little better than a fort. Bags, in which tobacco leaves are usually +kept, have been filled with earth, and arranged outside the walls and in +front of every window. A double row protects the top of the veranda, +and, better than all, a tall tower surmounts the roof, and looks down +upon the clearing. Yes, we have been hard at work, I can assure you. To +begin with, while some felled the trees at the edge of the clearing, a +few, who could ill be spared, lay out in the forest and plantation, and +scouted round to warn us of the approach of the enemy. The remainder +worked--well, like the slaves they were once upon a time, or as their +fathers and mothers were before them. It is incredible to me even now +how they managed as they did; but, within a few days of your departure, +our defenses were completed, and not a moment too soon, as I will tell +you. + +"Not a week had passed when the outposts, which I had stationed away in +the forest, brought me word that a mounted party was approaching. I at +once concentrated my meager force amongst the trees, and awaited +developments. Then, as the strangers drew nearer, I sent forward a white +flag and demanded their business, informing them at the same time that I +was prepared to resist any violence. + +"As you might expect, José d'Arousta was the leader of the gang, and he +at once advanced to meet me, as unconcerned and as impudent as ever, and +to all appearance careless of the consequences. + +"'I carry a warrant here for the arrest of your son, and of his +accomplice, the Englishman, señor,' he said, in his suavest tones, not +forgetting at the same moment to lift his hat with a flourish. + +"'Indeed,' I answered; 'and for what reason have you been intrusted with +such a document?' + +"'Pshaw, señor, you cannot prevaricate with me,' he said disdainfully, +and with an aggravating sneer for which I could have struck him. But I +was careful to maintain a calm demeanor. + +"'Prevaricate!' I retorted. 'Surely José d'Arousta, the would-be thief, +is scarcely the man to say that to me. Prevaricate indeed! I will have +you know that I do not stoop to telling an untruth, even though a +regiment of Spaniards were at my door.' + +"At that our old friend lost his temper, for my words touched him on the +raw. + +"'You are telling an untruth,' he cried. 'You would have me believe that +the two for whose arrest I hold a warrant are not here. They are spies, +I tell you, and you are aware of it, for you must have sent them into +Santiago. That is where they were captured, in the very heart of the +town. Deliver them up to me, señor, or it will be the worse for you.' + +"You may guess, my lad, that my heart leapt to my mouth at his words. +You and Gerald captured! It was a shock to hear it. Next moment, +however, I was comforted by the reflection that, if he now asked for you +both to be handed over to him, you must have effected an escape. + +"'If they were indeed captured, Señor José d'Arousta can scarcely want +them delivered into his keeping now,' I said quietly; 'and if he does, +he should apply to his own countrymen. In any case, the lads are not +spies.' + +"'Señor,' he replied hotly, evidently having lost all patience, 'I ask +you again to hand them over. Where are they, I say?' + +"'And I answer, if you have lost them, find them for yourself. I will +give you no help,' I rejoined, in the same calm tones. + +"'I will," he cried angrily; 'I will take them now, at this instant, +from the hacienda, and then I will do as I promised, and set the place +flaring about your ears.' + +"'Then you will do so at your peril,' I answered with an easy smile. +'Here are some of my men. See, they are armed, and will fight for me +till I tell them to hold their hands. Now, draw back to your set of +scoundrels, and do your utmost.' + +"'You shall suffer for this, señor,' he shouted. 'I will shoot every +hand on the plantation, and then look to yourself and to the adorable +señora. Those who attempt to hinder the servants of his Majesty King +Alfonso of Spain must pay heavily for their temerity.' + +"I bowed haughtily to that, while he withdrew to his men. Then the whole +Spanish party put spurs to their animals, and came galloping towards the +hacienda. We brought them to their senses at once with a volley, which +emptied three of their saddles, sending the men crashing to the ground. +A second, equally well aimed, dispersed them, and when they fled back to +Santiago it was with their heads held less haughtily in the air. From +that day to this I have seen nothing of the pleasant José, nor has the +hacienda been attacked by any marauding Spaniards." + +"I am very glad to hear it," said Hal, in tones of satisfaction. "Had I +known it, I think that I should have waited longer before coming. But +anxiety for your safety got the better of my fears. Then, too, I had +intended to remain here in case you should need another rifle. But now, +with your permission, I will leave the island again and join the +Americans. I had no part in this quarrel between the two nations when I +left the hacienda, though I admit that my sympathies were strongly +inclined to the Yanks; however, my ideas are changed now. But for a +lucky escape, Gerald and I should have fallen as spies before the rifles +of a file of Spaniards. I seek no revenge for that, but it has made me +throw in my lot with your countrymen. I have seen some fighting with +them already, and now I hope to act as guide when they invade this part +of the island." + +"I cannot blame you for your resolution," Mr. Brindle answered. "Until +this struggle is settled one way or the other, none of us can return to +our usual employment; nor can we feel secure. I thank you, my lad, for +all you have done, and particularly for the thought which prompted you +to return to us in spite of such difficulties and dangers--dangers, by +the way, which would have deterred many a man of more mature years. You +find us very well able to look to ourselves, and you have relieved our +anxiety as to your own and Gerald's safety. Go, therefore, as soon as +you wish, and join the army of invasion. When the war is over, return to +us, for here is your home, and here you may be sure of a real welcome." + +He reached across the table, and shook Hal heartily by the hand, sending +a cup clattering to the ground as he did so. There was no doubt that +Hal's devotion had touched him deeply, and the same could also be said +of Dora. To hide the tears which would come when she thought of all he +had gone through, and of all the dangers he must yet encounter, she +knelt on the carpet and commenced to pick up the pieces of broken china +that lay scattered there; for Dora was, indeed, very fond of this fine +young fellow, who had come into the lives of the hacienda folk in such a +curious manner. + +"I am glad you agree," said Hal, returning his employer's grip; "and +now, as you throw no difficulty in the way, I will prepare to slip from +the island again. Of course I shall have to leave when the American +fleet is near, and, in any case, I must arrange to join the troops when +they reach Cuba." + +"Which will be shortly, I fancy," Mr. Brindle said, rising from his seat +and going to a bookshelf. "Here are the chief American papers up to a +few days ago. I do not pretend to know how they were landed, but I +secured them through a native, who is in communication with one of the +plantation hands. Evidently President McKinley and his government have +been hard at work, for troops, consisting of regulars and volunteers, +have been mustering and drilling everywhere. It is of course impossible +to create an army in a day, even though you happen to have some +thousands as a nucleus. Then, too, transport, engineering, supply, and +doctoring are items which cannot be arranged rapidly. It takes weeks, +sometimes months, to get these departments to work smoothly, a fact +which has only dawned upon our generals and people, and is no small +source of worry. Still, much has been done; for under General Miles, who +is the Commander-in-chief, chaos has gradually developed into some form +of order. Another seventy-five thousand volunteers have been called for +to make up the deficiency caused by the necessity of sending troops to +the Philippines. Now, I understand from these papers, Chickamauga and +Tampa are overflowing with troops, while other camps in various parts of +the States are in a similar condition. Transports lie at Key West ready +to carry the boys across the sea, and in that vast country everyone is +on the tiptoe of excitement at the thought of invasion at last, which no +doubt will take place in this neighborhood. The arrival of Cervera's +fleet has altered the sphere of action, which is unfortunate enough for +Spain, for the bulk of her troops are at Havana, where enormous +preparations to resist attack by land or sea have been made by Marshal +Blanco. Santiago is even now in a state of famine, and if our troops +land near, the town is sure to fall, and the Spanish colors give place +to the Star-Spangled banner. + +"Now I fancy that you have all the news. Fitzhugh Lee, a veteran of the +civil war, is one of our generals, as also is Joseph Wheeler. Theodore +Roosevelt has raised and equipped a cavalry regiment, which is likely to +lead the Dons a dance, for it is for the most part composed of cowboys. +Astor, another patriotic millionaire, has supplied a battery of +quick-firers, with men, horses, and equipment complete. Others have come +forward with money, and last, but by no means least, American women have +commenced to organize hospitals, so as to be ready for the reception of +sick and wounded, of whom there must needs be many, particularly of the +former, for it must be remembered that swamps are to be found everywhere +in this country, and that fever, combined with hardship and exposure, is +far more fatal to an invading army than are swarms of bullets and vast +masses of the enemy." + +This, indeed, is a wholesome truth that it would be well to remember +always. An army sent into the field cannot prosper and give a good +account of itself unless its more peaceful departments are in a state of +perfection. For supposing the transport and supply fail, where would all +the hungry men and horses obtain food? Grass can generally be had in +abundance for the animals, but even grazing is often scarce. As for the +men, they may by great good fortune pick up plenty to keep them going, +but the chances are, especially if they have entered the enemy's +country, that they will find little, and even then only after a long and +fatiguing search, during which they may suffer heavy loss by the fire of +the enemy. Therefore, the army which possesses an efficient supply +department, following ever upon its heels, will be far more capable of +success than an ill-fed force of men, who, after a long day in the +field, must perforce wander away to find food. Of no less importance, +too, is the medical department. Men who are exposed to hardship and +rough work will almost inevitably fall ill, and who is to look after +them, and those who are wounded in action, when they are helpless, if +organized hospitals, each with an efficient staff, are not attached to +the force? Men would die untended by the roadside, while the number of +sick would increase by leaps and bounds till they hampered the army, and +destroyed all hope of rapid movement, and therefore of success. + +Mr.Brindle had given most of the news, and to bring the events of the +war up to date it is necessary to add only a little. Fourteen thousand +men, together with the new Astor Battery, were sent to San Francisco, +and from there, owing to the lamentable want of transports, were +conveyed in batches to the scene of operations in and about Manila, in +the Philippines. This naturally caused delay, so that many weeks passed +before active measures could be taken. This expedition was commanded by +General Wesley Merritt. + +And now a small but extremely important incident had upset all +calculations. Cervera and his fleet had arrived at Santiago, and it was +at once necessary that the town and harbor should be subdued, and the +fleet destroyed. Admiral Sampson, who, after the _Merrimac's_ +adventurous voyage, had made several reconnaissances in force, declared +that to rush the entrance was impossible. He called urgently for troops, +and General Shafter was at once ordered to hold himself and twenty-six +thousand men in readiness to sail from Key West. + +Hal stayed at the hacienda for a week, and then he rode away for the +coast, still disguised as a Spanish soldier. + +Almost every night while at Eldorado he had heard the guns of the +American fleet playing upon Santiago and its forts, the noise on two +occasions, when the dynamite gunboat, named the _Vesuvius_, was in +action, being prodigious. When he arrived on the seacoast, he at once +hid in a big grove of palms. + +"From here I ought to be able to get some idea of the movements of the +fleet," he said, seating himself upon a rock, and lifting a pair of +glasses to his eyes. "It seems as if a landing were intended." + +He was not mistaken, for some cruisers were steaming slowly along the +coast as if searching for an opening. Suddenly they turned shorewards, +and their guns began to fire upon a small fort. + +"Now is my chance," thought Hal. "By riding hard I ought to be there in +time to join any landing-party that may be sent ashore. They have chosen +Daiquiri." + +He jumped into his saddle again and cantered off. An hour later he rode +boldly down to the shore, to a point from which a small pier projected. +A party of American marines had just landed, and Hal found himself at +once a prisoner amongst friends. + +"Why, who aer this? Come off that 'ere moke!" cried one of the marines, +grasping his bridle. "You must be the durndest fool as ever wur, or +perhaps you're what's wuss, and that's a cove what goes back on his +pards." + +"I am nothing of the sort," Hal answered, with a laugh. "I am British +born, and American just now for choice. You would do me a great favor if +you would drop the point of that bayonet, my friend." + +"Wall, that kind er knocks me all ter pieces!" the marine answered, +starting back in astonishment, while a roar of laughter burst from his +comrades. "A Britisher, and no durned son of a Don after all! At any +rate, hop off it right away, and come along slippy. You may be a pard, +as yer say; but then yer mayn't. Ef it aer that sort er way, it'll be a +case with yer." + +He took Hal by the sleeve, and conducted him to the officer in charge +of the party, where explanations were soon made and accepted. + +"Where are you going now?" the officer asked. "I presume you've come +here on purpose?" + +"Yes; I wish to get aboard the flagship," Hal answered. "I was there +before, and, in fact, only left a week ago, when I managed to get +ashore." + +"Ah, you did? Then come along right here, sir, and tell us how the Dons +are doin'. Then, if you wish it, I'll send you aboard the admiral's +ship. But if you'll take my advice, you'll remain with us. We're the +advance landing-party." + +"I will with pleasure," Hal replied; "and if you wish it, will act as +guide." + +"That would suit finely. Say, do you know Guantanamo, the port forty +miles east of Santiago?" + +"Yes; I have been there once. I rode from the hacienda to it, and +followed forest paths all the way." + +"Then you'll be very useful, for it's there that we're goin' to land. +We're here for the night only." + +This indeed was the case, and the marines encamped close beside the pier +that night, Hal taking up his quarters with them, and making use of the +opportunity to borrow a suit of American clothes; for it was no joke +being dressed as he was, and running the gantlet of the abundant chaff +which his Spanish uniform attracted. We will do him the justice, +however, to say that he made a very fine, soldierly looking fellow in +his unaccustomed kit, and would have taken first place for size and +general air of manliness among the Spaniards quartered in Santiago, or, +for the matter of that, in any part of the island. + +"You'd get copped as sure as eggs if you met any of the enemy," was the +remark which one of the marines made to him. "As soon as you'd put yer +head into one of the Dons' camps you'd find a tidy lot er bullets +fizzin' close by yer nose, for I reckon they don't show many of your +sort. There's somethin' about you, young mister, that looks like beef, +good old honest roast beef, the stuff that Britishers boast of, and the +same that them Froggies and others of the same sort sneer at, and jist +wish they could crow about. But get it off--I mean them togs, else +p'raps the sentry yonder will be makin' a mistake, and sendin' a plug of +daylight through yer." + +On the following day the marines re-embarked, and steamed along the +coast to Guantanamo, where three cruisers and two gunboats at once +entered the roads, and rapidly dispersed the Spanish garrison. Then the +_Panther_, a transport, carrying 850 marines, steamed in. The men at +once disembarked, Hal accompanying them. They encamped on a hill near a +village called Playa del Este, and pushed their pickets into the bush, +which grew down close to the water's edge. On their right, Caimamera, +another village, was in flames, having been deserted and fired by the +Spaniards. + +"Mr. Marchant," said the officer in charge, to whom Hal had been +introduced, "will you take a rifle and help the boys?" + +"Certainly," was Hal's ready answer. "I fancy that your men will soon be +engaged, for this place is surrounded by bush, as you can see for +yourself, and that is an ideal cover for Spanish irregulars, who, I may +tell you, are masters at that particular form of fighting, having been +taught many bitter lessons by the insurgents. There! Listen to that!" + +They went outside the tent, and heard the distant rattle of musketry, +and then the answering shots from their own pickets. Taking up a rifle, +and filling his pockets with cartridges, Hal at once ran up the hill to +join them. + +"Keep yer noddle low thar," a sergeant sang out to him. "The Dons aer +sendin' their bullets skimmin' over here, and it's odds yer don't quite +see from where. That's the ticket. Get low down, and keep a lively +look-out." + +Hal took the advice given him, and, copying the example of the sergeant, +threw himself down behind a rock. Then, dropping his rifle for the +moment, he commenced to build up a little breastwork, just like the +schantzes used by the Boers in South Africa. Having obtained excellent +cover in this way, he knelt up and stared into the bush. + +Ping! thud! A rifle flashed three hundred yards away, and the bullet +struck a foot or two to his right, sending chips of rock and a fine dust +flying into the air. Ping! phit! Again the rifle cracked, and all that +Hal could see was a dense mass of tangled green trailers and ferns. + +"Wait a bit," he murmured beneath his breath. "I see that big fern +moving. Why, as I live, it has crawled ten feet in the last half-minute. +There must be a man behind." + +He aimed carefully and fired. Instantly the waving fronds started high +into the air, and, falling asunder, disclosed a Spanish guerrilla +reeling blindly from side to side. Then he flung his arms wildly above +his head, and, twisting round in his agony, fell prone to the earth. + +[Illustration: "HE AIMED CAREFULLY AND FIRED."] + +"That aer one for you, pard," the sergeant cried. "Guess it wur a mighty +fluke." + +"Wrong, then," Hal answered. "The Spaniards have stuck ferns into their +hats, coats, and belts, and that is the reason why you do not spot them. +It's a very old trick of theirs, and one that they learned from the +Cubans. Watch for moving leaves, and pull your trigger with the sights +leveled three feet beneath." + +"So! aer that it?" the sergeant answered wonderingly. "You're mighty +cute, young feller. Hillo! Durn me, but thar aer a fern on the walk." + +He rose to his knees, and, sighting carefully, pulled his trigger very +gently. The report was followed instantly by a commotion amidst the +leaves, which suddenly fell to the ground. + +"That fetched home, I'm thinking," he cried. "Here goes for another. +Ah----" + +Hal turned his head, to see the unfortunate American suddenly collapse, +and lie motionless across the bowlder. A Spanish bullet had brought +quick revenge for the death of a comrade. + +"Poor beggar! The fortune of war," Hal remarked sadly. "Well, as he's +gone, I must act for both." + +He placed a cartridge in the breech and went on firing. Then he passed +the news that the Spaniards were, like Malcolm's army of old, decked +with boughs and leaves, along the lines of trenches which had been +thrown up hastily for the protection of the outposts. Hour after hour +the musketry duel continued, and so clever were the Spanish guerrillas +at taking cover that they forced the American pickets back to the main +body of the marines. About midnight Hal retired from the firing line for +refreshment and sleep. + +"What advice do you give about these fellows?" asked the officer. +"They're certainly clever at keeping out of sight, and there seems no +way of getting alongside them. We've four killed already, including our +surgeon, and if it wasn't for the bad shootin' of the enemy there'd be +heaps more." + +"I should say, turn on the electric searchlight till morning, and then +pound the bush with the guns of the ships," Hal answered. "If that does +not stop the firing, you'll have to choose between retiring and rushing +their cover." + +"We're not going to do the first, in any case," the officer replied +sturdily; "but that is a good dodge--to turn on the light. I'll signal +down for it," and he went away at once. + +Hal ate a meal of tinned meat and rusks, which he washed down with a big +draught of coffee from the lid of his canteen. Then he rolled himself in +a blanket which had been given to him, and quickly fell asleep, for he +was worn out with his long day in the trenches. But all night long the +musketry flickered along the hillside, and when morning dawned it was as +active as ever. Early in the day a band of Cuban insurgents joined the +invading Americans, and gave information of a Spanish camp four miles +away. + +"There's going to be a fight to-morrow," said the marine officer to Hal. +"We've just had orders to march out and attack this Spanish encampment. +Cubans will lead the way, so that we shall not be wantin' you as guide; +but if you'd care to come, why, you know you're welcome." + +"Just what I'd like. When do you start?" + +"Early dawn. We'll get breakfast for all hands, and then away, so as to +make a day's job of it. The ships are now going to throw shells into the +bush." + +He had scarcely finished speaking, when loud booming was heard from the +sea, and missiles commenced to hurtle overhead. Every corner of the bush +was searched by the exploding shells, but, in spite of the flying +fragments, the same desultory and harassing fire continued, for the +Spanish guerrillas clung tenaciously to their posts. + +Next morning a force of six hundred, including marines and Cubans, +marched from their bivouacs, Hal joining the party, armed as before with +a rifle. + +"I reckon we'll have to be precious wide awake," said his new friend. +"Cubans are out as scouts, but in this thick bush we want something in +the shape of a balloon. How far should you say we are from the Dons?" + +"They told us that the camp was four miles from us," answered Hal. "We +have been marching for an hour, so I fancy that we must be within half a +mile or less of the enemy. Hillo! Lie down quickly!" + +The silence of the bush, through which the troops were forcing a way, +was suddenly broken by the crackle of musketry coming from directly in +front. Fortunately, the marines were moving in open order, or otherwise +the losses would have been heavy. As it was, no one was hit, though +showers of leaves were stripped from the trees, and came tumbling in a +cloud to the ground, or upon the heads of those who happened to be +beneath. + +"A Spanish ambush!" exclaimed the officer. "Here, sir, hop along over to +the signaler, and tell him to let the _Dolphin_ know whereabouts they +are lying." + +"Right! I'll do it!" cried Hal. "You can expect me back shortly." + +He bent low in the bush, and ran to the left, to a knoll upon which a +signaler was stationed. On his right nothing but thick scrub was to be +seen, from which, however, the continuous ping of musketry rang, proving +that hidden foes lurked there. Straight ahead was the coast, towards +which a gunboat, the _Dolphin_, was steaming so as to aid the land party +with its guns. + +Hal at once gave his message, and watched the signaler wag his flags to +those on the gunboat. A few minutes later small shells from the +quick-firers began to fall into the cover in which the Spaniards were +lurking. Then rifle volleys were directed at them, searching every +corner. At length, unable to face the hail any longer, they broke and +fled. + +"After them! Charge! All together, boys!" shouted the officer in +command; and, springing to their feet, the whole party dashed forward. + +"Hold! Lie down, all of you! You'll get knocked to pieces by the +shells!" the officer shouted again; and, producing a whistle, blew a +shrill blast upon it. For the _Dolphin's_ guns were still playing upon +the bush, and to attempt to cross it would have been to incur heavy +loss. At length, however, the gunboat was signaled to cease fire, and, +at once rising to their feet, the whole of the invading force dashed +towards the Spanish camp. + +Rifle in hand, Hal ran ahead of the men, and alongside the officers, and +was one of the first to rush amongst the huts in which the enemy had +taken up their quarters. + +"There are Spaniards just in front!" he shouted. "At them! Let us have +some prisoners." + +"Hooroo, lads! Charge!" the officer shrieked at the pitch of his voice, +and at the order the men who were nearest swept like a torrent to the +end of the narrow and dusty little street. + +"Hands up! Surrender! You are prisoners," he commanded, coming suddenly +in sight of a Spanish lieutenant and some eighteen men. Instantly rifles +were dropped to the ground, and the small party of the enemy, who had +been unable to escape, held their arms above their heads in token of +submission. Then their young officer advanced, and with saddened face +and a sigh of resignation tendered his sword to the American officer. + +"We surrender, señor," he said, in very fair English. "The fortune of +war has smiled but blackly upon us." + +Hal only waited to see that the prisoners were safely taken, and to hear +the American officer make some consoling reply, before he again dashed +forward in pursuit of the enemy. Suddenly a rifle cracked from a hut in +front, and the bullet pierced the rim of his hat, whistling shrilly as +it hurtled by his ear. Then a Spaniard stepped into the open, and, +shooting a cartridge into the breech, took a calm and steady aim at him +again. The figure was at once familiar, and a turn of the head at that +moment disclosed the handsome but scowling features of José +d'Arousta. + +Hal did not hesitate, but, lowering his bayonet, he rushed full tilt at +his old enemy. There was a sharp report, the stunning effect of a +concussion close at hand, the shock of which can only be realized by +those who have been unfortunate enough to experience it, and he +staggered back, half dazed. Next moment, with an oath at his want of +success, José sprang behind the building into the bush, where he was at +once lost to sight. As for Hal, he was too stunned to be able even to +see for a few moments, so great was the effect of the rifle which had +been discharged at point-blank range. When he was able to look round, +not a Spaniard was in sight, but a poor Cuban, who had been at his side, +lay wounded at his feet, having been struck by the bullet which José +d'Arousta had intended for himself. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +NEARING THE END + + +Hal Marchant returned to Guantanamo with the marines after the +successful attack upon the Spanish camp, which was left a mass of flame +from end to end. Their arrival was greeted vociferously, for theirs was +the first real victory ashore. They found their comrades in a great +state of excitement, news having arrived of the army of invasion. It had +already embarked, and had actually sailed from Tampa. But, after all, it +proved to be a false start, for the very next day brought information +that the fleet of transports had been ordered back, for fear that +Spain's one remaining squadron of warships, which sailed under the flag +of Admiral Camara, should suddenly fall upon and annihilate it. + +This, however, proved to be a false alarm; and on Tuesday, the 14th of +June, the transports steamed away with their freight of men, horses, and +equipment for Key West, where they were joined by a powerful fleet of +warships, which were to act as escort. On board the troop-ships were +rather more than 15,000 officers and men, while 10,000 more were ready +for embarkation as soon as the transports could return to Tampa. + +Arrived off the southeastern coast of Cuba, after a delightful sail +extending over a week, the fleet lay to, while General Shafter, Admiral +Sampson, and their respective staffs went ashore at Asseraderos, and +there met General Garcia, who had been the recognized leader of the +insurgents for many years. It was an historical meeting, and at its +termination Daiquiri was finally settled upon as the point of landing +for the long-expected invading army. + +"Mr. Marchant, we're removing from here right now," said the marine +officer a day after the fleet of transports had been sighted. "Daiquiri +is the point of invasion, and we are to steam along in that direction. +But I don't expect that we shall have the luck to land; the +troops--lucky beggars!--will do that, of course. What on earth sent us +to Guantanamo and kept us there is more than I can say. What did we do +for the cause? Next to nothing, I guess. Just hashed up one of the +camps, and nearly got into a precious mess with those guerrillas." + +"It does seem strange that you were sent there," Hal agreed. "Here have +we been hanging on to the place and sacrificing valuable lives, and all +for nothing. However, the invading force is at hand, and the business is +to commence in real earnest. As to Daiquiri, its proximity to Santiago +must be the chief reason for its selection, for, situated as it is, it +will save a tremendous amount of bush fighting. Fancy marching from +Guantanamo through forest and scrub! Why, the Spanish guerrillas would +certainly deal with us as the Cubans have with them in former times." + +"That is about the truth, I fancy; but, anyway, we're clearing from this +right now, so pack up your kit and make all ready," the officer replied. + +That night Hal was on board the gunboat, and by dawn they were lying off +Daiquiri, surrounded by enormous transports, which were filled with men +in boisterous spirits. Beside the troopers the gunboat looked so small +that one might have thought she could be of no fighting value. And yet a +glance at the underwater fittings of the torpedo-tubes, and the +quick-firers upon her decks, showed that, though small in proportions, +she was a dangerous customer to deal with, and capable of sinking any +of the transports with the greatest ease. + +Grouped upon her deck, the marines shouted to their comrades, and looked +enviously in their direction more than once. Indeed, they were far from +pleased at having had to vacate Guantanamo, after having to fight so +stubbornly for it. The brush with the enemy had been keen while it +lasted, and had satisfied their martial ardor; but all were disappointed +with the order which had compelled them to embark again, and it was no +wonder that they asked indignantly why they had ever been sent there if +the town and position were not to be held. It was a sheer waste of time +and lives, and the men were amongst the first to recognize this. + +Meanwhile, General Garcia, with a rag-tag army of three thousand +insurgents, watched the point selected for the landing. They were all +fairly well armed, but, without exception, they were ragged to a degree, +and presented a half-starved appearance. + +June 22d broke fine and clear, and straightway a bombardment of the +various forts and villages along the coast commenced. + +"I imagine that we are knocking bits off the blockhouses, and holding a +general action all along the line, so as to mislead the Dons," said the +officer of marines. "Hillo! That was fine!" + +His exclamation was caused by the simultaneous lowering of boats from +all the transports lying off Daiquiri. Then men swarmed into them, and +as soon as they were filled, strings of the tiny craft were attached to +launches, which steamed at once for the coast, which had already +sustained a fierce bombardment. That evening some six thousand Americans +had landed, consisting, for the most part, of the division under General +Lawton. In addition, a portion of General Wheeler's brigade of cavalry +had disembarked, and with them had come a machine-gun battery. The +method of landing the artillery horses and transport mules was most +interesting. The animals were thrown overboard, and as they were +unhampered with kit or harness of any sort, they came through the ordeal +wonderfully. + +Hal, ever on the look-out for adventure, had not allowed the day to pass +without an effort to get ashore. Indeed, he contrived to find a vacant +place in one of the boats, and in due course landed at the tiny jetty +which projected from the beach into the sea. As he walked along it, +someone, dressed as a trooper, rushed frantically towards him. + +"Hal! It's Hal! By Jove, how glad I am! Hang it, old man, don't you know +me, or are you too proud? Where the dickens did you come from? I heard +that you had gone ashore in the _Merrimac_. Well, this is a day!" + +It was Gerald Brindle, looking strong and well again, but somewhat +bewildered and out of breath as he accosted his friend and shook his +hands up and down as if he would never cease. + +"Steady, old boy! Of course it's Hal! Look out, you're breaking my +fingers. There, that's very nice; and now, if you'll stop for a moment, +I'll tell you all that is worth telling." + +Hal wrenched his hand away, and, stepping a pace backward, stood looking +critically at his friend. + +Gerald was dressed in a uniform of khaki, not unlike that worn by the +British troops in South Africa, but differing in one or more important +respects. For instance, in place of the helmet, which is only required +in the hottest countries, the American troopers had wide-brimmed, thick +felt hats, calculated to withstand a fierce sun, and well able to +shelter the head and shoulders when a torrent of rain was descending. +Then, again, this felt hat had a decided advantage for men on active +service, for, when they were lying down and skirmishing, it would not +hit upon the back of the neck and be tilted over the eyes at the most +critical moment. Another difference was that the Americans wore a light +gaiter, instead of the puttee. + +Gerald, with his head-covering pulled rakishly over one ear, looked a +very smart and soldier-like young fellow, and seemed to be well able to +manage the rifle which he carried in one hand. + +"A trooper?" said Hal, looking at him closely. "Well, old man, you look +every inch of it. Supposing you tell me how it is to be done, so that I +may follow suit, and take my place at your side." + +"That's easy enough," answered Gerald: "The ranks are filled up, but +we'll find room for you; for I happen to know one of the staff officers, +who will arrange for it, if I ask him. Why, Hal, I have a splendid +billet! I am one of Roosevelt's own; one of 'Teddy's Terribles,' or +'Roosevelt's Rustlers,' as we are sometimes called. You must have heard +of us by now. We're the cowboy lot, and we've all sorts and sizes in our +ranks. Fellows who are out of all employment, and who have not so much +as a cent to bless themselves with, and others who are the sons of +millionaires, or millionaires themselves, with so much to jangle in +their pockets that they would not miss it if you took the average man's +yearly wages from them. But, whatever their wealth, they are all +rattling good fellows, and all bent upon fighting. But we've no horses. +That's the joke of this invading army. The fact is that transports are +scarce as it is, and none could be spared for the mounts. However, we +weren't going to allow that to stop us, and here we are, ready to have a +fling at the Dons on foot, if need be." + +"So you are one of the 1st United States Cavalry, sometimes known also +as the Rough Riders, or by the other terms that you mentioned?" said +Hal. "Gerald, I'm for it, too. We'll see this war through together." + +"Right, that we will," Gerald answered eagerly. "Look here, we'll just +take the bull by the horns, and arrange the matter at once. Let's go +right away to the staff officer." + +Hal agreed, and they at once ascended the steep slope leading to the +camp, till they came to a pile of ammunition boxes, beside which a pole +was erected, bearing a piece of crimson bunting, while beneath it stood +an officer whose uniform proclaimed that he belonged to the staff. + +"Well, Mr. Brindle, what is this?" he asked, with a smile. "Introduce +your friend." + +"He's Hal Marchant, the fellow who sneaked on board the _Merrimac_ when +she was about to be sunk off Santiago. You will remember, Captain +Cromer, that the tale leaked out, and that Lieutenant Billing was said +to have come in for a wigging." + +"That was so. So you're that fellow, are you?" the officer asked, +looking closely at Hal. "Now, what's wanted? I know your sort very well. +You're dying to be right in the very thick of it; isn't that somewhere +near the case?" + +"It is the very thing!" Hal exclaimed. "I am anxious to join the Rough +Riders till the campaign is over." + +The staff officer thought for a few moments, during which he regarded +the two lads with some curiosity and amusement. Then he produced a +notebook, and hastily scribbled a few lines. + +"Want pay?" he asked suddenly. + +"No, not a dollar," Hal answered promptly. "I want all the fun, +though." + +"Then slip along right now with that to General Wheeler's brigade major; +I fancy it will just settle the matter for you, so that he'll allow you +to go with the boys." + +He nodded, and turned to give some directions to an orderly who had just +approached, while Hal and his friend hurried off as fast as their legs +would carry them. By early morning the former was a temporary trooper in +the celebrated Rough Riders. + +"I suppose we shall be moving very soon," said Gerald, as he and his +friend sat down for a meal. "There is one thing, though, that may delay +us. You see, things were so rushed at Tampa that all the equipment most +wanted is down at the bottom of the hold, while perfectly useless stuff +is at the top. But I hear that they are working very hard to set matters +right." + +This, in fact, was the case. Disembarkation of stores had been going on +day and night, not only at Daiquiri, but also at other parts of the +coast. The invading army consisted of three divisions--each split up +into three brigades--and of a cavalry brigade. While the second division +and the horseless cavalry had been landing at Daiquiri, the first +division, under General Kent, had begun to disembark at Siboney. +Meanwhile, General Shafter, the Commander-in-chief, had his quarters +aboard the transport _Segurança_. + +The very day upon which Lawton's division landed, he pushed forward with +the greater part to some wooded hills northwest of Daiquiri, which he +occupied without firing a shot. As for Hal and Gerald, with their +comrades of the cavalry, they left camp early on the following morning, +and marched to Siboney. By the time they reached the latter place, both +lads were on excellent terms with their fellow-troopers. Indeed, Gerald +was already well known, and it wanted only a mention of Hal's +adventurous trip ashore in the _Merrimac_ to bring a crowd surging round +him, clamoring for all the details. + +"Tell yer this, you're born ter be lucky, that's how I size it," said +one big cowboy. "Yer see, since this war got started, you've seen a rare +lot er moves, and never got so much as pipped with a bullet. That jist +shows as you're kept for somethin' more perlite, so I tell yer I shall +keep as close alongside as I can squeeze as soon as the shootin' +starts." + +"Perhaps that might not be quite as secure a place as in front," Hal +answered, with a smile. "A Cuban ran beside me only a few days ago, and +the bullet which was intended to take my life picked the poor fellow +off." + +"So? Then I'll stick in front; but, all the same, I guess you're born to +be lucky." + +The cowboy nodded his head knowingly, and strode off. That night orders +were issued to the Rough Riders to prepare for active measures. + +"We are to advance against Sevilla, which is three miles away," said +Hal, having gleaned some tidings from one of the sergeants. "It seems +that all the Spaniards are falling back upon Santiago from the +blockhouses and outposts, and a few only are left at Sevilla to bar our +progress. Of course we shall soon brush them aside; though, if the +fighting is anything like last week's, we shall have our work cut out +for us, for it will be bush warfare every foot of the way, and the Dons +have shown themselves masters of that particular art." + +"And afterwards, what shall we have to face?" asked Gerald. + +"That is a difficult question to answer; but if your father is right, +some seven thousand half-starved Spanish regulars. They cannot hope to +resist for very long, for food has completely run out in Santiago. Even +now many of the civil population are said to be dying daily of +starvation in the streets." + +"Then the sooner we end their misery the better," exclaimed Gerald. +"Hillo; orders, I fancy!" + +A message from headquarters had just been brought to the troopers, +telling them to prepare to march on the following morning. + +"The Rough Riders and other cavalry are to advance early to-morrow on +Las Guasimas," said the sergeant who had brought the order. "The +regulars will march to the right, and will take four Hotchkiss +quick-firing mountain guns. Boys, we aer goin' ter turn the Dons out!" + +"Hooroo! By Jingo we aer," the men shouted. + +"We'd do it better if we had horses with us," one of them said. "Say, +pard, you've been having gay times with the enemy; what's your opinion +on the case?" + +"I fancy that we are better as we are," Hal answered, with assurance. +"You see, I know the country hereabouts; it is densely covered with +bush, in which animals would be worse than useless, for they would stand +clear against the green, and would show where we were lying. Without +them we shall be more efficient scouts." + +"Pass the word there for Trooper Marchant," the sergeant now shouted. + +"What is it? Here I am," Hal answered, stepping forward. + +"You are acquainted with these parts, I hear?" the sergeant answered. + +"Yes, I have ridden through the bush more than once. What then?" + +"The general'll be oblee-e-ged to yer ef you'll get ahead of the column +and lead the way. We're kind er strangers here, yer see." + +"I'll do what I can," Hal answered briskly, being overjoyed at the +prospect. "I suppose my friend can come along too? He knows the country +much better than I do." + +"In course he can. Now, you'll be ready early, that's the order." + +Hal nodded, and at once began to talk the matter over with Gerald. Next +morning they left the camp with six other men, and marched some five +hundred yards ahead of the main body. A Rough Rider, who had been a +cowboy right away in the west of North America, was put in charge of the +little party. + +"Now what aer the partic'lar jokes of these fellers?" he asked Hal, as +they pushed along the road. "Yer foller, ef it wur Injuns, or even bad +men of the prairie, I'd be onter their games quicken'n a knife. But +these here Dons most like has a way of acting out er the ordinary, that +aint easy ter catch hold of." + +"They have, certainly," Hal replied. "To begin with, from the experience +we had at Guantanamo I fancy you will find that the enemy will make a +stubborn fight of it. Then they will lie hidden in the bush, and, look +as you will, you will never see more than masses of moving green, for +they cover themselves with leaves and fronds of ferns." + +"Christopher! That aer the game? Wall, pards, whenever yer fall on a +movin' bush pull yer trigger at it quicker than yer can wink," cried the +cowboy. "Now we'll separate, so's to have about twenty yards between +each man. Me and this here pard'll work the center, and t'others can fix +onter the sides. When any of yer spots somethin' that's out of the +ord'nary, send the warnin' along, and let every feller mark it. Then +we'll bring a cross fire ter bear upon it that'll rip through the +leaves, and clean the Dons off the face of the airth." + +It was a good suggestion on the cowboy's part, and the scouts promptly +carried it out, Hal and his new acquaintance taking the central place. +And now the road became almost impassable, for rain had fallen, +saturating the ground and trees, so that after a few minutes' work in +the bush all the scouts were drenched from head to foot. + +"It aer moist," the cowboy, whose name was Harman, exclaimed. "But it's +warm, so it don't matter no more'n nothing. Say, aer that Spanish +fellers thur?" + +He pointed to a prominent hill in front, along the face of which were +rows of trenches, and, though the distance was great, it was not +difficult to decide that this was the enemy's position. + +"Yes, those are Spaniards," Hal answered. "But look out! If I am not +mistaken, the bush to the left is filled with guerrillas." + +Scarcely had he spoken when a volley burst from the scrub in front, the +bullets whistling overhead. + +"That aer partic'lar bad shootin'," said Harman. "They aer right off the +mark." + +"I don't think so," Hal answered quickly. "Look away behind; the Dons +have spotted the Rough Riders, and other dismounted cavalry, and are +firing long-ranging volleys." + +This indeed was the case, and the bullets which whistled overhead were +meant for their comrades in the distance. Meanwhile, the column, +composed of regulars, who were marching on the right, had come in touch +with the enemy, while the cavalry were closing up to them on the left. +Suddenly the quick-firing Hotchkiss guns opened from the bush, and +commenced to shell the Spanish trenches, the reports being the signal +for a general rifle engagement. + +"This is warm," Hal shouted, as a stream of bullets swept overhead, +lopping twigs and leaves from the cover. + +"Say, Harman, let us work over there into the bush. It'll be a better +place from which to fire." + +They gradually edged through the scrub, till they reached a lower +position, where they lay for a time, firing up at the ridge in front of +them, and at the hill upon which the main body of the enemy was +stationed. From there a machine gun was busily at work, scattering +missiles through the foliage, and Hal found it a new and somewhat trying +experience; for the distant rattle was accompanied by a rushing hail of +long-nosed bullets, which flew low, and swept every corner of the bush. +Then the noise would pass away, to be replaced by the zip-zip of +Mausers, and by the distant ping-ping of the reports. Soon the main body +of the cavalry came up, and, creeping along the ground, the whole force +advanced rapidly on the Spaniards, Colonel Roosevelt being some yards in +front of his men. + +"Reckon a rush'll do it, boys," sang out one of the sergeants. "Just +keep yer blinkers on the boss, and look out for a lively time." + +Indeed the moment had arrived for something besides firing, for, as the +cavalry advanced, the Spaniards had retired slowly and doggedly, firing +all the time. And now a wide clearing cut across the front of the +Americans. Suddenly Colonel Theodore Roosevelt was seen standing in it, +fearlessly exposing himself to the bullets, and holding a smoking rifle +in his hand. He pointed eagerly to a tumble-down sugar factory away in +front. + +"Boys, we'll take it," he cried. "Forward, the Rough Riders!" + +A shout rose from the troopers, and springing to their feet, they joined +in a mad rush up the hill, firing as they ran. A few shots answered, and +then the enemy was seen to be hastily retreating, and within five +minutes the factory was captured. At the same moment, the Spaniards +retired from the ridge and hill; and the Americans, after sending out +scouts and pickets, sat down to rest and talk of their victory. + +"It aer a reg'lar fine start off," said Harman, excitedly. "Right from +the commencement we've shook them Dons up. That aer better than being +pipped all over and getting forced to give back. It'll liven us all up, +and, you bet, we'll take Santiago so quick yer'll scarcely believe. My +aunt! Aint this fightin' the thing ter make yer blood warm, not ter say +boilin'!" + +"It aer all that, Harman boy," another trooper broke in. "It aer +scorchin', I'll allow. I tell yer, comin' along through the bush, under +a sun as hot--wall, as hot and hotter'n blazes, it fairly cooked yer. +Then, when the bullets came flickin' like so many flies--why, it kind er +made yer queer." + +"It did that," Gerald agreed. "My pal and I have compared notes. We were +roasting, it was so hot; but when the bullets began to rush, we felt as +if cold water had been poured down our backs. However, we got used to +it, and mighty quickly felt the broiling heat of the sun again." + +"Say, boys, did any of yer see them skunks of Cubans?" asked another +Rough Rider. + +"See 'em! Not much!" Harman exclaimed disdainfully. "They wur to have +come along to-day, but when we marched past their camp, not a single one +of the varmint moved. Jist fancy! We're here fightin' fur them critters, +too!" + +A murmur of indignation and disgust went round the circle, for already +the Americans had taken a dislike to the natives. They had begun to +discover that these dusky insurgents were very good at lying away at +safe but impossible ranges, and firing an immoderate quantity of +ammunition. And whenever there was a prospect of plunder with no blows +to be feared, the Cubans were much to the fore, as they were also if +there happened to be an opportunity of ill-treating Spanish soldiers. + +"Ugh!" exclaimed Harman in disgust. "These black critters aren't a patch +on the Dons, who aint bright specimens themselves, for they're fellers +one can't kind er understand, and then they've picked hold of such a +jabberin' lingo. But they can fight! Them aer little chaps aer tarnal +good 'uns with a rifle, and I reckon that away here in the bush they'd +take some beatin'; they'd knock spots off a Red Injun, and that's the +truth." + +A chorus of assent came from the men, who at once began to discuss the +remarkable pluck shown by the enemy. Then inquiries were made for a list +of casualties, but it was not known until later in the day that sixteen +had been killed on the American side, and fifty-two wounded. + +That evening the Rough Riders and other cavalry lined the ridge and hill +of Las Guasimas, and, looking across a patch of open country, could see +the hill and fort of San Juan, and, beyond that, Santiago with its +harbor and ships. El Caney, a village of small importance, which was +destined to become a point of attack, stood close to San Juan. + +"What will be the next move?" asked Gerald, as he and Hal sat down side +by side that night, and waited for their turn of sentry-go. + +"That is difficult to say," Hal answered thoughtfully, "but I fancy that +the first thing will be to feed the troops. It is a question which seems +to have been entirely forgotten. Then we must remember that the stores +are still aboard the transports, and if they have been packed as +carelessly as reported, days must pass before we get guns and sufficient +ammunition and food. In any case, before we advance on Santiago, there +should be a reconnaissance, and the approaches should be thoroughly +explored." + +That the latter was a necessary precaution the least experienced in +military matters will say, and yet, strangely enough, the necessity for +a careful survey did not seem to have struck the leaders of the American +troops. And this, no doubt, was one of the evil results of a hastily +organized army. Soldiering cannot be learned in a day, and amateurs +cannot maneuver troops when they have had no practice. From first to +last the Americans had suffered from the inexperience of their various +leaders. Troops had been concentrated in the southern camps of America, +where the heat was very trying, and had been kept there for a long time +inactive, and exposed to disease. As a result, many had died, while +other young fellows had returned home with health shattered--and this +without having fired a shot. + +Then, too, the commissariat arrangements had been indifferent, and quite +insufficient. Troops were indeed conveyed safely to Cuba, but after they +had had a taste of war, they were left in the heart of the unhealthy +bush, with nothing better to eat than salt pork and hard biscuit; +coffee, tea, sugar, and such necessaries were unheard of. + +And on the beach at Daiquiri and Siboney a growing pile of useless +articles collected, while cases of food were searched for--articles +which the wisdom of some inexperienced person had placed first of all in +the ship, when they should have gone in last. No wonder that the heat +and moisture soon found victims, for men cannot stand hardship and +exposure if they are ill fed. Indeed, the week's delay before fighting +recommenced laid the seeds of disease in many men. And then the fatal +moment arrived when lack of precautions on the part of those in +authority was to cost many a poor fellow his life in the attack upon San +Juan. + +Beyond Las Guasimas was an open stretch of country to which troops must +march by one of two roads that led through the bush and forest, and upon +the openings of these the Spaniards had naturally concentrated their +guns, with a certainty of shooting accurately, for the ranges were +known. On the American side, no attempt was made to open up other +tracks, and this proved disastrous to the men; for on the 1st of July, +when another forward move was made, many unfortunate troopers were +struck dead at the first volley. This was, indeed, a memorable day for +both attackers and attacked. Marching northwest from Las Guasimas, the +divisions separated, Lawton's, accompanied by four guns, making for El +Caney, a village of small proportions, and situated on an elevation. +General Kent's division, marching with the cavalry and Rough Riders, +made the fort and hill of San Juan their objective. In both cases open +country had to be traversed; but in the latter the troops had first to +make their way through a dense belt of forest which gave place to the +open quite suddenly, and only two tracks existed. + +To describe each phase of the big engagement would be to puzzle the +reader; for it was like a game of chess, the pieces being in this case +the various units going to complete the divisions, and the board an area +covering square miles. + +On the right, after nine hours' stubborn fighting with a force less than +a tenth of his own, Lawton's division captured El Caney, and some +hundred prisoners. + +In the center, Kent's men, with the dismounted cavalry, and our two +heroes, lay at the edge of the forest, suffering heavy loss for some +hours; for the Spaniards sent long-ranging volleys into the trees, which +did much execution. Then, too, their quick-firing guns had the range to +a nicety, and sent showers of shrapnel sweeping through the ranks. At +length, unable to bear this loss without retaliating, the Americans +burst into the open, and stormed the hill and fort, every man fighting +desperately. Indeed, when the day was done, victors and vanquished +admitted that both sides had shown undaunted courage. Undoubtedly the +Spaniards had fought a brilliant rearguard action, and their +stubbornness, and the fact that half their small numbers were killed or +wounded, showed the spirit which possessed them. + +As for the Americans, though many of them had been soldiers for only a +few weeks, they attacked with a courage and a sternness of purpose that +were truly admirable, and did credit to the stock from which they came. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +THE FLOWER OF THE HACIENDA + + +Two days after the memorable attack on San Juan the American cause +seemed in as hopeless a condition as possible. From El Caney to the +coast the troops held a long line of trenches and faced a series of +works, all of which were manned by determined, though half-starved, +Spaniards. To the north and west Santiago was free and open to the +enemy, while, where the invading forces besieged it, their line was so +thin as to be practically useless. To attempt now to press an attack +home to the walls of Santiago would be to court disaster, for large +re-enforcements were needed for such an action; while, if the Americans +could but hold the line that they had won, they would be doing well. + +The shortcomings of an army raised in haste were beginning to show. +Rations from the first had been poor, and as a natural consequence men +fell ill under the hardship and exposure. To these hundreds of wounded +were already added, and to attend to them all there was a medical staff +that was hopelessly insufficient. No provision, in fact, worthy of the +name had been made. No stretcher-bearer corps had been organized, and +when the wounded came crowding in, even drugs and dressings were found +to be lacking. Could anything be more discouraging? No wonder that +General Shafter thought the situation serious. No wonder that he +telegraphed urgently for re-enforcements. + +And now the strangest and most unexpected move in the campaign occurred, +and altered the prospect of the war. To describe it fully, one must once +more turn to Hal and Gerald, for this lucky pair had a splendid +opportunity of observing everything. Both had taken part in the attack +upon San Juan, and both had been wounded--Hal through the fleshy part of +the thigh, and Gerald in the hand. Some hours passed before either went +to obtain the services of the surgeon. + +"This is rather late, young fellow," the latter said to Hal, as he +rolled up his trousers and showed the wound. "I suppose you couldn't get +here before?" + +"Yes, we could have come earlier," Hal answered; "but you were busy, and +neither of us was badly hit. But I'd be glad if you'd look at my wound +now. It's painful and I feel feverish." + +"Which is exactly what I was thinking. Put that under your tongue, and +we'll see what the temperature is." + +An examination of the thermometer showed that Hal's temperature was +high, and a searching inspection of the wound revealed that it was +inflamed. + +"You are both feverish and out of sorts," said the surgeon, as he +dressed Hal's leg. "Both with flesh wounds, which will get worse if +something isn't done. I'll send you to the coast for a day or two. A +blow aboard ship will set you up again." + +Neither Hal nor Gerald objected, for it was already known that no active +engagements would take place till re-enforcements arrived, so that if +they went to sea for a day or two, they would lose none of the fun. They +trudged to Siboney, therefore, and that evening were resting on board +the gunboat _Gloucester_, a converted yacht, which happened to be lying +close in beside the town when they arrived. + +Many and eager were the questions put to them by the men and officers +aboard, and Hal and Gerald were treated like heroes. + +"Tell yer what, young fellers," said one of the men, "you boys ashore +aer havin' all the fun. Why, I'd pitch all these fine rations and easy +times ter Jingo, if I could slip ashore and see a trifle of the +fightin'. They say that San Juan wur hot. Away out at sea we could see +the Spanish shells burstin' like fireworks." + +"Don't yer grumble, Jimmy," another broke in reprovingly. "Up to a week +or more back, we sailors wur exceptional busy. P'raps we'll get a go in +again. Thur aint never no tellin'." + +How near he was to being a true prophet this sailor had no notion, nor +anyone else in the American fleet. And yet, on that very evening, +Admiral Cervera's fleet lay in the harbor of Santiago, with steam up, +ready to slip cables and run from the harbor. But for what reason? Were +not the Americans doing their utmost to capture the Spanish fleet? Then +why play into their hands, and rush from security to destruction? + +The question will probably never be satisfactorily answered. It is said +that direct orders were received from Madrid; but in any case, on Sunday +morning, the 3d of July, the whole of the Spanish fleet was observed +steaming out from the harbor in bright sunlight. Instantly, every man on +board the American ships was wide awake. + +"Hillo! What is happening?" an officer on board the _Gloucester_ +shouted, as a puff of smoke darted from the flagship. "A gun, by Jingo! +That's from the _Brooklyn_, the flagship while Admiral Sampson is away. +Tumble up there, boys! There's fun commencing." + +The bell to the engine-room at once sounded, and the _Gloucester_ began +to run towards the entrance of Santiago. Hal and Gerald immediately +forgot their wounds, and hastened to help the men serving the +quick-firers. + +"Steady there, all!" cried the commander of the _Gloucester_. "Our guns +are no good against battleships. Well wait for the gunboats. Evidently +the whole fleet is coming out." + +Led by the _Infanta Maria Teresa_, with Admiral Cervera aboard, a line +of Spanish ships sailed from Santiago harbor, and, turning west, steamed +off in single file. In all there were six, the two last being gunboats. + +"Those are our mark," cried the commander, pointing to the latter. +"We'll get after them at top-speed. Boys, you can commence with the +guns." + +Rushing forward at seventeen knots, the _Gloucester_ began to fire her +weapons, and soon shells were singing about the decks of the _Pluton_ +and the _Furor_, the two Spanish gunboats. Then a lucky missile crashed +into the engine-room of the latter, and in a moment she was a wreck, and +rapidly sinking. + +"Now for the other," shouted the commander. "Give it her all you know, +boys!" + +The men responded with a will, and with such success that the _Pluton_ +was soon in a sinking condition, and to save her crew was run upon the +rocks. + +"Now we will see what else can be done," the commander of the +_Gloucester_ cried. "Keep her straight along the coast, quartermaster. +Perhaps we shall be able to pick up some prisoners. Hillo! Our boys are +givin' it to the Dons." + +Admiral Schley's fleet was, indeed, handling the Spanish ships severely. +Steaming straight in for Santiago, the Americans had put their helms to +port as soon as they were well within range. Then their guns began to +roar, and soon they were obscured in big clouds of smoke. Running west +along the coast-line of Cuba, the _Infanta Maria Teresa_ and her +consorts returned the fire as vigorously as their poor armaments would +allow, and all the time rushed ahead at their fastest pace, hoping to +escape. + +"They'll do it," shouted Gerald, excitedly. "They've the lead, and will +get dead away." + +"Not a bit of it," Hal answered quietly. "We have some fast ships out +there, and the _New York_ is patrolling the coast higher up. Admiral +Cervera's fleet is doomed." + +"It aer that," one of the sailors standing near by burst in. "Them 'ere +ships won't run much more'n an hour. Look at 'em now, and the way the +shells aer strikin'." + +With eyes glued to glasses, or with hands held above the brows to keep +away the glare of the sun, every officer and man on the deck of the +_Gloucester_ followed the course of the naval battle with breathless +interest. + +The leading Spanish vessel, the _Maria Teresa_, was by now nearly six +miles from Santiago, but she stood not a ghost of a chance. Every +available gun was turned upon her, and she was struck by no fewer than +twenty-nine shells. The number of hits was actually small in comparison +with the guns employed; but they were crushing blows. Two enormous +twelve-inch shells crashed into her stern, shattering everything in +their course towards the bows. Eight-inch, five-inch, and six-pounders +exploded in every part, killing numbers of the unfortunate sailors. But +even now she was steaming as steadily as ever, and was pluckily +replying; for her armor casing had protected her water-line and her most +vulnerable part, the engines. However, she was not to escape, for the +woodwork caught fire, and as there was a great deal of it, and as the +water main had been cut by the shells, she was soon a blazing mass, +drifting hopelessly and helplessly towards the land. + +"There's work for us there, boys," cried the commander. "Those poor +fellows are roasting, so let us do what we can for them. Mr. Morton, +tell off a party to land in the cutter. Some of the Dons may swim +ashore, and I can see a crowd of those sneakin' Cubans there. Just pitch +into them if there's trouble." + +"Aye, aye, sir," was the hearty response. "You boys from the for'ard gun +'ll come with me." + +"I'd like to be one of the party, too, sir," said Hal, stepping forward. + +"And I also," Gerald chimed in. + +"What! you two wounded troopers? What would be the use?" + +"Wounded! I'd forgotten all about it," cried Hal. + +"So you had, and I believe you," the officer answered. "You've both been +working with our boys like bricks. You can take it that you are to +come." + +Highly delighted at the prospect, Hal and Gerald quickly provided +themselves with cutlasses. Meanwhile, the _Gloucester_ had been steaming +at half speed towards the unfortunate _Maria Teresa_. Already the +Spaniard was close in shore, but the gunboat drew very little water. +Steaming alongside the blazing war vessel, she lowered a boat and sent a +party aboard, while another went ashore. On the beach a number of ragged +Cubans were standing, and as the exhausted Spanish sailors swam to the +land, they fired at them or threw them back into the waves. Dashing +through the surf, the American sailors swept the insurgents on one side. + +"Back, yer black-skinned murderers!" cried one of the men, rushing at a +Cuban who was in the very act of dashing a poor Spaniard's brains out. +Then his fist shot out in truly British fashion, and next moment the +native went crashing to the ground. "Thur; lie still, yer sweep," he +exclaimed, standing over the man. "If yer just so much as lift yer +skinny finger, I'll smash you." + +He looked it, too, every bit of it, and the Cuban cowered, not even +daring to move. + +"Some of you lads just look to these blackguards," cried the officer. +"If they try any of their games, cut them to the chin with your +cutlasses. The others can bear a hand with these poor fellows." + +But there was little fear that the Cubans would attempt more violence, +for when blows were threatened all their courage oozed through their +fingers. They drew back from the beach and sat down, glowering at the +men who had come to the island to bring them freedom. As for the Spanish +sailors, they were taken on board the _Gloucester_, Cervera and his son +being amongst the number. As the former stepped on board, Commander +Wainwright advanced with outstretched hand. + +"I congratulate you, sir," he said heartily, "on having made as gallant +a fight as was ever witnessed on the sea." + +Meanwhile, the work of rescue from the _Maria Teresa_ went on. Flaring +from end to end, and with deck and side plates white hot from the +furnace raging within her, she slowly drifted nearer the coast, her guns +exploding as the flames reached them, and her ammunition bursting with +deafening reports. But the undaunted Americans stuck to her, and would +not quit till every Spanish sailor needing help was over the side. A +quarter of an hour later the _Almirante Oquendo_, which had also taken +fire and was sorely battered by shells, ran ashore a little farther up +the coast. + +"There are more to rescue there, boys," cried the commander of the +_Gloucester_; and at once the gunboat steamed towards the burning wreck. +Then again the same gallant and successful attempt at rescue was made; +but barely in time, for suddenly the flames reached the magazine, and +the _Almirante Oquendo_ blew up with a deafening roar. + +Quick to follow her fate, the _Viscaya_ also drove ashore, and became a +total wreck. The _Cristobal Colon_ was the last of Cervera's fleet, and +by now she, too, was in sorry plight. Escape, which had seemed possible +to her, was now out of the question, for the fast ships, the _Texas_ and +the _New York_, were rapidly overhauling her. Shells began to hurtle +above her decks and crash through her plates; and, finally, seeing the +hopelessness of the struggle, her commander struck his flag. But the +_Cristobal Colon_ was no prize for America, for already she showed a +list, and scarcely had all the prisoners been removed when she filled +and sank, this being due, it is asserted, to the action of one of her +crew, who opened the sea-cocks. + +One fine scene there was as this magnificent vessel surrendered, and it +deserves to be recorded. The commander of the _Texas_ stood on his +bridge, and silenced the cheers of his men. Then, lifting his hat +reverently from his head, he called upon each and everyone to give +thanks to God for this victory, and for his own safety through the +fight. + +Hal and Gerald did yeoman service on this memorable day, and it was not +till every Spanish sailor who could be rescued was aboard the +_Gloucester_ that they thought of themselves. Then, indeed, they +discovered that they were worn out, and that their wounds were unusually +painful. But a long sleep did all that was necessary, and fresh air +being added to it, they soon began to mend. A week later they were once +more with their comrades, the Rough Riders. + +"Back again, and seen the last of Cervera's fleet," said Harman, in +tones which showed that he was not exactly pleased. "I never did drop +upon such pards as you. Talk about fire-eaters! Why, I believe this +feller, Marchant, has smelt Spanish powder ever since the war started. +You're meant for something bad, that's all I can surmise. A chap that +goes all through this war, and only gets in the way of a single pip, aer +got somethin' coming." + +He nodded his head significantly at the lads, and grinned. + +"Wall, I'm kind er jealous, I own," he proceeded. "Here aer we, +a-kicking our heels in the trenches, and you chaps enjoyin' yourselves. +And the grub! My! I've had my teeth through some mighty queer stuff, but +some of the salt pork doled out ter us 'd make a nigger squint! It aer +that tough that the only comfort aer ter work it into sausages. But it +aint going to last for long, for this here row has got the heart knocked +out of it. There's been a palaver, and now there's an armistice, while +the bosses discuss terms. Santiago aer done fur, and if you take it true +from me, so aer the war. The Dons aer fairly pulled ter pieces, and aer +durned sorry fur theirselves." + +That this was the case was self-evident, and the capitulation of +Santiago came as no surprise. On Saturday, the 16th of July, the deed of +surrender was signed, and, led by General Shatter and his staff, the +American troops took possession of the town, which was filled with +starving soldiers and civilians. + +Courteous and truly honorable were the Spanish officers, and, looking at +their pallid faces and wan cheeks, the boys from the States realized +that these were foes indeed, and men of whom any army could be proud, +and whom any nation might hold in high respect. + +That same day Hal and Gerald heard news which upset them considerably, +for, just as evening was drawing in, Jake, the faithful negro who had +previously warned them, came into the camp, and fell exhausted at their +feet. + +"Quick, boss!" he whispered. "Dat bad man come again. De missie and de +master fighting for deir lives." + +"Where? At Eldorado?" cried Hal, his heart palpitating with fear at the +ominous words. "Here, some water, Gerald. Pour some down the poor +fellow's throat. That will pull him round, and help him to get his wind +again." + +Gerald swung his bottle to the front, and rapidly unscrewed the cork. +Then he poured some of the contents down Jake's throat. + +"Ise better now," said the negro, in stronger tones. "But don't wait, +boss. Jake look to himself. Ride quick for de hacienda, for dat bad man +come dere two, t'ree hour ago, and rush at it wid his men." + +"Then there must be no delay," cried Hal, rising suddenly to his feet +with a stern look upon his face. "Two or three hours ago! That time has +passed since José and his ruffians attacked Eldorado! Quick! There is +not a moment to be lost, and every second is of consequence. Here, +Gerald, you see to Jake's wants, and get the poor beggar on his pins +again, while I go across to our friend the staff officer and ask him to +do something for us." + +He turned on his heel at once, and hurried towards a stone-built house, +above which floated the directing flag, and above that again the +star-spangled banner. A moment later he was face to face with one of the +regulars who was stationed outside, and on mentioning his business, was +immediately ushered into an office where, seated at a table, was the +staff officer who had befriended him before. + +"Well," said the latter pleasantly, "had your fill of it already, and +come to cry off now that the fun's gone down?" + +"No, not that, sir," Hal answered promptly, and in a voice which was +somewhat agitated in spite of himself. "You've been so kind before, +that I have come to ask another favor. The truth is that I am in serious +trouble. Will you--can you help me, sir?" + +The officer, who was arranging some papers on the table, swung round and +looked at him curiously. + +"Phew! trouble!" he exclaimed, giving vent to a shrill whistle. "It's +bad, I reckon, for the lad who slips ashore on the _Merrimac_, and risks +his skin at the game, is not the one to be easily put out. What is its +nature?" + +Hal was not the lad to talk, especially when deeds were wanted and time +was of the utmost importance, so on this occasion he contrived to +explain the situation in a few short sentences. + +"I am to understand, then, Mr.--er--I don't remember your name--that +you've friends close at hand, who are bein' worried by a scoundrel," +said the officer. "And since you've mentioned it so particularly, I take +it that the girl has got something to do with the flurry into which +you've worked yourself. Now, what is in the wind? What are you asking +for?" + +"Give me thirty mounted men at once," Hal blurted out. "I promise to +return with them as soon as possible." + +"With what's left, you mean! Thirty mounted men! Well, I don't know that +I couldn't oblige you." + +He looked out of the window, and cogitated deeply for a few moments. + +"Yes," he exclaimed, as if he had suddenly made up his mind. "Look here; +take this order and go quickly." + +He hastily jotted down a few words to the officer commanding one of the +very few troops of cavalry whose horses had disembarked on Cuban soil, +and, having sealed it, handed it to Hal. + +"There, go! Get away as quickly as you can," he cried, "and the very +best of luck, for you deserve it." + +Waiting only to blurt out his thanks, Hal tore away, and soon presented +his message. Half an hour later a small company of horse cantered out of +camp, and took the road to Eldorado. In front and leading them rode a +sergeant, sitting his horse with the grace and easy swing of a practiced +cowboy, and on either side of him were Hal and Gerald. Two hours later +they were within a mile of the hacienda, and called a halt for a rest. + +"There aint no firing now," said the sergeant, going into a clearing to +listen. "No, there aint so much as a sound, so you can take it that they +aer alive and kicking. If these critturs we aer after had rushed the +show, there'd be sparks flying into the darkness by now, I guess, and +they'd be cooking their dinners over the flames. You can put it down +that things has quieted down for the night; but the row'll fizzle up +again in the mornin'." + +"Then do you suggest that we shall remain here?" asked Hal, who was +impatient to get on, and full of forebodings for the safety of his +friends. "Supposing that brute attacks during the early hours, he'd----" + +"That aer jist about his game," the American answered coolly, "and it'll +be for us to put a stopper on it. Say, you, sir, take it easy, and have +a blower here for half an hour or more. Then we'll walk on, and when +we're pretty close, we'll leave the horses, and skirmish up among the +trees. Bet yer bottom dollar we'll soon see how the worry lies." + +Accordingly, after resting themselves and their horses, the troop set +forward again, dismounting and leaving the animals in charge of one of +the men when some three hundred yards from the hacienda. Then Hal and +the sergeant crept to the edge of the clearing. + +"There's a fire burnin' away yonder," said the latter, pointing across +to the opposite side. "Reckon them skunks aer campin'." + +"There are some stone buildings on that side of the clearing," Hal +explained. "I expect José and his gang have taken shelter in them." + +"That's the ticket, and they're as safe behind the walls as it aer +possible ter be. But we'll turn 'em out, see if we don't. Say, will yer +lead some of the boys over yonder, so as ter cut in behind them +critters? If so, you'd better move off at once. When the light gets +brighter, keep yer eyes wide open, and let 'em have it full blaze. Mind +yer fire to the right, or else it'll be a case with us." + +Hal readily agreed, and hurriedly returned to the troopers. Then he and +Gerald, accompanied by ten men, crept round the edge of the clearing to +the farther side, and sat down to wait. At dawn some sharp reports rang +out from the stone buildings, and answering flashes could be seen +spurting from the sand-bag fort on the roof of the hacienda. + +And now Hal's work began. Creeping through the plantations, he at length +reached a spot from which it was possible to see the men who were firing +at Eldorado. There were thirty or more, led by a man dressed in draggled +white, whom he easily recognized as José d'Arousta. + +"We'll give them a volley," he said, turning to his comrades. "Then +we'll get at them full tilt. Fix bayonets, boys!" + +Not a word was said in answer, but there was the ominous click of steel +against steel. A moment or two later a volley was fired into the midst +of the Spanish guerrillas. + +"At them, boys!" cried Hal, springing to his feet. "Charge!" + +At his shout the troopers dashed forward, and the greater part of the +enemy at once bolted. Some, however, were too astonished to move, and +fell at the point of the bayonet. As for José d'Arousta, he died as he +had lived, a hard and cruel man, but one gifted with extraordinary +tenacity and courage. Dodging a bayonet thrust with the rapidity of +lightning, he sprang back a pace or two, and, drawing a revolver, fired +point-blank at the trooper who was charging by Gerald's side. + +"Take that, yer durned son of a Don!" cried the man, thrusting fiercely +at him again. "Ha! tit for tat, my sonnie!" + +The bayonet caught José full on the chest, and, thrusting right through +him, pinned him to the wall. A deathly pallor at once spread over his +face, his mouth gaped, and the revolver almost slipped from his +nerveless fingers. But the manhood in him forced itself to the surface, +and he lifted his head to glare at his enemies. Then an oath escaped his +lips as his glazing eyes fell upon Hal, and with a last effort he lifted +the weapon and fired. + + * * * * * + +Hal took no part in the further stages of the war. Indeed, there was +little else to happen, for the fall of Santiago had been the beginning +of the end. The American fleet being freed by the destruction of +Cervera's fleet, the Government at Washington threatened to send some +battleships to bombard the coast towns of Spain, and in the meanwhile +dispatched an expedition to Puerto Rico. Menaced by a revolution at +home, the Madrid Government finally gave way, and, on the 12th of +August, peace was patched up between Spain and America, the former +relinquishing her possessions in the Caribbean Sea. + +It came just in time to stop the campaign in Puerto Rico, where some +brisk engagements had taken place; but the news arrived too late, alas! +to save the many poor lads who had come from the States to fight for +their country, and who lay dying of fever near Santiago. + +Of the Philippines there is little to tell. Manila was captured on the +13th of August, and with it went Spanish rule. But not so the islands, +for, led by a native called Aguinaldo, the inhabitants, who had +previously rebelled against their old masters, now objected to the new, +and chose to fight for their freedom. Thus for many a long day the +Philippines remained in insurrection. + +And now to close this story. Struck in the ribs by José d'Arousta's +bullet, it was weeks before Hal was up and about; and he undoubtedly +owed his recovery to Dora's devoted nursing. No wonder that when at last +he tottered on to the veranda, he turned to her with a flush of pride, +and drew her arm beneath his own, saying to Mr. Brindle: + +"Dora has promised to be my wife some day, and to that I know you will +agree, for you have practically told me so. Congratulate me, for I am a +lucky young fellow. I left England friendless, I came to this beautiful +island as a stranger, and I have won the flower of the hacienda." + +"You have, my lad!" exclaimed Mr. Brindle, advancing with outstretched +hand. "Fortune, they say, favors the brave, and yours is well deserved, +for you have fought manfully UNDER THE STAR-SPANGLED BANNER." + + +THE END + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Under the Star-Spangled Banner, by F. S. Brereton + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 41425 *** |